Resistance To Change In Organizations: Reasons And Strategies Essay Scholarship Essay Help

Introduction Psychologists refer to resistance to change as a natural reaction to uncertainty and/or the unknown. Organizations have human capital thus in times of change resistance is dominant. A change is likely to revolutionize the status quo in an organization; the nature of human beings is that they rather stay under the current prevailing condition than change to other lifestyles that they are uncertain about.

This notion and nature of human beings makes them resist change. A change in any process or activity in an organization requires careful preparation. Innovations and transformation are proving that change in how businesses are conducted is here to stay. Change is inevitable. Although changing people is not easy, future success of businesses is in how well they are going to anticipate and adjust to change.

The way business is conducted has to be adjusted with the changing environment. Change is a gradual process that must be well planned. The management should be actively involved in the change process since support is required from all corners. When an organization or a country at large, wants to make a change in the way things are done, then the start point is understanding the need that require change.

People are not willing to change, they are static; however if well implemented then it can be a smooth transition. Organizational culture has a great influence on how employees will embrace change and also how managers communicate to their juniors. Organizations with a freelance kind of organizational culture have better communication among the staff and with the outside environment.

To initiate change in such institutions is easier than in organizations where the management dominate in all decision making procedures without consultation of their juniors. In large organizations, there can be a division into various departments with each expected to face a certain area.

As much as there are departmental meetings, and departments are supposed to come up with their own way of doing things, there are meeting with the larger managements that are not restricted to the team managers alone. Managers in such departments should be given the mandate of communicating change; if the relation they maintains with the team members is not healthy, then change will receive unpleasant reception. This paper discusses resistance to change in organizations.

Reason for the Resistance When change is occurring in an organization, the way the management (who in most cases are the agents of change) communicate the change they want implemented in an organization determines whether the change will be embraced by employees or it will face resistance.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In an organization, communication is the system through which management and the teams transfer information. It is both upwards and downwards. Good communication in an organization means that issues and progress of the business are discussed in a way that the target group gets the intended message. In the case of a management that does not maintain good relations that facilitate communication when change comes it is taken as a move by the management to make things happen.

People will not be willing to come from their status quo and adopt the change but they will be willing to fight the change. Resistance to change where communication lacks is even higher when groups in the organization join hands together to repel the change. There will be no one who really understands the need for change since they are at a distance with the management.

For example, incase an organization want to establish a computer network in its organization, the employees may feel that the change is coming to replace them. They are likely to refuse change. This is the power of unknown since there is no one who is willing to explain what effect the change will have on the employees. The first step in successful change is to identify the communication weaknesses in a business. This can be through brainstorming where challenges facing the business can be identified.

Such challenges can be obtained through reviewing the day to day activities of the business (Guffer


Notions of Community and Notions of Self in The Plague and Patriotism Report (Assessment) essay help site:edu

Service to community depends heavily on the individual community member’s notion of self, which is in turn heavily influenced by his culture. This paper explores the differing notions of community exemplified by two very different main characters: Dr. Rieux in Albert Camus’ The Plague, and Lieutenant Shinji Takeyama in Yukio Mishima’s Patriotism. This paper will show that each character’s service to his community, or lack thereof, directly reflects his culturally defined role.

In Camus’ The Plague, Rieux begins the novel far more absorbed in his personal life than in his professional responsibilities as Oran’s only physician. His wife’s long illness necessitates a visit to a sanatorium out of town, and her leaving triggers tremendous guilt in him, both personal and professional, as seen here: “he begged her to forgive him; he felt he should have looked after her better, he’d been most remiss” (Camus 10). Rieux’s role as husband supersedes that of doctor, initially.

In Patriotism, we see the opposite is true of Takeyama. His role as an officer of the Imperial troops subordinates his role as husband, so much so that Takeyama’s “honeymoon trip was dispensed with on the grounds that these were times of national emergency” (Mishima 1).

The two characters differ wildly in their views toward their roles in the community also. Rieux, though a competent doctor and essentially kind hearted, exhibits a slightly annoyed air during the early days of the plague, and as the disease wears on, this annoyance graduates to full blown resentment.

“The whole of the following day was spent, so far as Rieux was concerned, in long drives to every corner of the town, in parleyings with the families of the sick and arguments with the invalids. Never had Rieux known his profession to weigh on him so heavily” (Camus 59).

Takeyama, conversely, observes his role as officer, soldier, and defender of the Imperial family with a religious austerity that borders on obsession. “On the god shelf below the stairway, alongside the tablet from the Great Ise Shrine, were set photographs of their Imperial Majesties, and regularly every morning, before leaving for duty, the lieutenant would stand with his wife at this hallowed place and together they would bow their heads low” (Mishima 2).

Both characters are products of the cultures they live and work in. Rieux, although an important member of the community, remains first and foremost an individual, amongst other individuals. The townspeople of Oran habitually place their own needs first, and identify less as a cohesive community, and more as a collection of individuals with a loose geographic connection.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More “Being ill is never agreeable, but there are towns that stand by you, so to speak, when you are sick; in which you can, after a fashion, let yourself go. An invalid…likes to have something to rely on,…but at Oran the violent extremes of temperature, the exigencies of business,…and the very nature of its pleasures call for good health. An invalid feels out of it there” (Camus 5).

Takeyama, by contrast, utterly identifies with the community represented by the Imperial troops. His connection to his fellow officers and soldiers is deeply emotional and intimately connected to his psychological well being. Upon discovering that the cohesive community he imagined himself a part of is actually riven with discord, infighting, and rebelliousness, the schism between his fantasy community and his real community rends his soul.

“Profoundly disturbed by the knowledge that his closest colleagues had been with the mutineers from the beginning, and indignant at the imminent prospect of Imperial troops attacking Imperial troops, he took his officer’s sword and ceremonially disemboweled himself” (Mishima 1).

Lastly, a significant disparity in the experience of time exists between these two characters, which also relates to their respective views of community. A good deal of time elapses between the imposition of the quarantine and the moment when Rieux and the other townspeople take action and begin helping one another:

“precisely when things seemed worst, people began to pull themselves together. Tarrou organized a group of volunteers to combat the plague. Rambert, on the eve of his escape, chose to remain and fight;…It was not a question of heroism; people hardly had enough freedom of choice to be heroic.

They simply decided to do what they could, even if their resistance was absurd. And perhaps, suggests Camus, to continue upholding one’s human obligations when there seems the least possibility of fulfilling them is, if not heroism, the best men can do” (“Community of Death” 98).

For Takeyama, on the other hand, he takes action the instant he learns of the mutiny, and his action is to flee, via death. “Well, then .” The lieutenant’s eyes opened wide. Despite this exhaustion they were strong and clear, and now for the first time they looked straight into the eyes of his wife. “Tonight I shall cut my stomach.”

We will write a custom Assessment on Notions of Community and Notions of Self in The Plague and Patriotism specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More (Mishima 3). His culturally defined role as soldier leaves no room for any other action, in his mind.

In Camus’ The Plague and Mishima’s Patriotism, each character’s culturally defined role ostensibly dictates the actions he takes to serve his community in a time of great strife. Ironically enough, Takeyama, the character who displays the most obvious adherence to the idea of community, is the first to leave his. Rather than stay and help his community during a civil war, he immediately kills himself and abandons it. It is Rieux, the reluctant community member, who remains to minister to the needs of his afflicted neighbors.

Works Cited Camus, Albert. The Plague. Trans. Stuart Gilbert. New York: Vintage Books-Random House, 1991. Print.

“Community of Death.” Time 16 August 1948: 98. Web.

Mishima, Yukio. Patriotism. Trans. G.W. Sargent. Mutantfrog Travelogue. WordPress, 19 October 2010. Web.


The Effect of Plastic Water Bottles on the Environment Research Paper essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Emergence of the problem

Effects of plastic water bottles to our environment

Solutions to the problem




Introduction In the past century, environmental issues have been on the center stage as core to man’s existence. The impacts and consequences derived from neglect of the same can be traced as far back as the ice age. Over the past decades, man’s industrious nature has shaken the balance that stood between his environment and the various climatic conditions that prevail in those settings.

As such, evils like Deforestation, air, noise and water pollution have been on the rise and consequently pose a threat to our own survival. This could be attributed to the rise in the global population accompanied by rapid technological and industrial advancement. These are among the key factors which have left a negative effect to not only the climate and the ozone layer, but also to our own health.

However, in realizing the error of their own doing, nations have come together and put a valuable effort to restore, maintain and manage their respective eco-systems. This study shall look into the environmental implications presented by plastic water bottles. A detailed analysis of relevant literature shall be provided so as to highlight the effects of plastic water bottles to our environment. To this end, solutions on how these effects can be mitigated if not avoided shall also be offered.

Emergence of the problem As the global population continues to grow rapidly, the demand for basic needs such as; food, water, shelter and clothing increases much faster. As such, industries and other providers are under constant pressure to produce and distribute these amenities to the ever demanding populace.

Arguably, water is by far the most important resource required by man. To this effect, the sale of bottled water has been seen as a feasible investment attracting lots of profits. However, issues have come up regarding the disposal of the empty bottles after use. While there are various campaigns promoting the proper disposal of plastic bottles, the number of empty plastic bottles polluting our environment is still very high.

Effects of plastic water bottles to our environment The use of plastic has been very beneficial to mankind. Plastic containers can be used in making durable bottles, packaging and preserving food and liquid substances[1]. This can be attributed to the fact that plastics are water, oil, chemical and sunlight resistant making it the best and economical substance to use in the packaging of perishable and non-perishable substances[2]. Despite these benefits, the amount of plastic bottles pilling up in our waterways and landscapes is alarmingly making the situation a cause of concern.

Andrady states that, the environmental effects of empty plastic water bottles do not begin as a result of poor disposal methods but rather, from the manufacturing stage of these plastic containers[3]. In addition, the author states that the creation of plastic bottles requires a lot of chemical pollutants and fossil fuels which contributes to a high percentage of air pollution.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More To further support this statement, the author asserts that some of the elements used in the creation of plastic contain toxic substances such as benzene and vinyl chloride. These substances have been documented as major causes of cancer and other human and animal ailments and birth defects.

In addition, during the production of these plastics, various forms of gases are emitted as well as liquid hydrocarbons which are known to affect the quality of air and soil. To this effect, it is evident that from the beginning, plastics are costly substances to our environment and should be avoided at all costs if the human race is to maintain the already fragile balance that exist between them and their environment.

Similarly, Stephenson points out the fact that plastics are durable as compared to other materials used to contain water[4]. The mere fact that it is durable is what makes it a proffered substance in the creation of water bottles. However, its durability also makes it a hazard to the environment. Being durable means that plastic is neither biodegradable nor degradable.

To this effect, it means that plastic substances may retain their original form for decades and the only process that affects them is granulation[5]. During this process, plastic substances do not decompose but instead, breaks down into smaller pieces. Animals and even children can easily ingest these pieces which in turn lead to various complications such as digestive problems.

In addition, the proponents of plastic use have argued that recycling is an effective method of mitigating the effects of plastic to the environment. Despite their argument, the fact still remains that a recycled hazard is still a hazard. On the same note, the recycling process has detrimental effect on the environment. Andrady confirms that during recycling of plastic substances, synthetic chemical constituents such as ethylene oxide and xylenes among other are emitted[6].

Besides having negative impacts on our environment, these chemical substances also cause serious damages to the human immune and nervous systems. In addition, they have been noted as having lasting effects on the blood and kidneys. With this in mind, the unsubstantiated claim that recycling is eco-friendly should be ruled out because it does not address pollution it only delays the inevitable truth.

On the same note, Goel states that plastic bottles among other plastic debris have been known to cause serious problems to marine mammals and fish. This he attributes to the fact that these animals often mistake small bottles for prey and end up ingesting them[7]. In addition, small pieces of plastic can also be ingested by fish thereby leading to digestion problems.

We will write a custom Research Paper on The Effect of Plastic Water Bottles on the Environment specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More When these plastic debris’ are ingested, they may lead to blockages in the digestive tract, thereby inhibiting the marine life ability to feed efficiently[8]. Studies indicate that 50% to 80% of turtles found dead are known to have died due to the ingestion of various forms of plastics which lead to malnutrition, starvation and eventually, death[9]. As such, this has resulted to the reduction in the turtle’s population.

Furthermore, plastic bottles which find their way into the large water bodies such as rivers, lakes and even the ocean have been documented as a mode of transportation for alien species. Since these bottles can float, they are often carried by the tides to far places. As they float to different regions, there is always a possibility that they carry on them various plant and marine organisms to these non-native marine lives[10].

In addition, since the plastics travel slowly, they give the organisms’ ample time to adapt to different water and climatic conditions thereby making them potentially dangerous to the marine life of the host regions. This not only affects the marine environment but may also be hazardous to humans who rely on these waters for their livelihoods.

Similarly, burning of these bottles has been known to produce toxic fumes which lead to air pollution. In addition, these fumes when highly concentrated can cause acid rains which affects both plant and animal life. Also, acid rains often degrade the quality of the soil and reduce the oxygen levels in water bodies[11]. This leads to the infection and death of different species of both plants and animals.

Fish larvae are highly affected by water pollutants and experience deformities and some times end up dying at a very young age due to the chemical components that shed off plastics. What should be noted in this case is that fish larvae play a pivotal role in maintaining the balance between plant and animal life in the water bodies.

As Goel states, they are consumed by other fish and they in turn consume much of the bacteria that if left unchecked may have negative effects on the water bodies. With this disruption of their life cycle, the fish population is greatly reduced and the life of the already existing species is under constant threat of extinction[12].

On the same note, Harrison states that fish can be displaced due to the disruption caused by floating debris such as plastic bottles[13]. Whenever fish sense a change in their environment, they often opt to migrate in search of the optimum conditions. Consequently, this disrupts their life and breeding cycles.

This unwarranted migration has led to the death of many fish mainly due to infections, being preyed upon and abandonment of eggs which die off due to lack of a favorable environment for breeding. Due to this sad state of affairs, fishermen are forced to overfish from the little that is left. This in turn does not give the remaining fish a chance to repopulate thereby leading to the current situation whereby the demand of fish in the global market far outweighs the supply.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Effect of Plastic Water Bottles on the Environment by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More On a related note, when plastic bottles are thrown into the storm water drains or the sewerage system, they can cause serious blockages within these drainage pipes[14]. This leads to a situation where water stagnates. Stagnant water smells bad and is a great environment for algal and bacteria blooms.

The effects of these microorganisms to the environment as well as our health are well known. Ultimately, the effects that plastics have on the environment are serious and if no serious intervention is carried out, we all may perish from our own actions or lack thereof due to neglecting our environment.

Solutions to the problem Plastic is among the worst pollutant in our environment today. The fact that it is a non-biodegradable substance made up of toxic chemicals makes it a great polluter of the earth, air and water[15]. With this in mind, it is a worthwhile endeavor to ensure that the use of this substance is reduced to a bare minimum.

The first and most important solution to this problem should therefore be to reduce the use of plastic bottles which will invariably lower its production. However, the implementation of this solution may be tricky since the use of plastic has penetrated in all aspects of our lives.

In a bid to reduce the pollution levels caused by these plastic bottles, the governments should implement various environmental friendly strategies to ensure that empty bottles are disposed off correctly. For example, increasing the fines charged for littering may be effective in deterring this habit. In addition, giving punishments such as collecting litter to offenders found littering may serve as an example to others all the while ensuring that all litters are effectively disposed off.

In addition, a significant policy is that of Tax rebates which will should be offered to bottlers who use other alternative containers. If such a policy is implemented, it will ensure that the toxic emissions created during the manufacturing of plastic are greatly reduced since this is among the most polluting stages of plastic bottles. In addition to this, all industries manufacturing plastic bottles should be mandated by law to plant trees which acts as carbon sinks thus reducing air pollution levels.

Birch and Wachter assert that individuals can do a lot on their own to reduce the carbon footprint[16]. America and China’s population are among the highest consumers of bottled water in the world. It is therefore important that they adjust their lifestyle if they are to reduce the levels of pollution caused by plastic bottles. This can be done by switching to other sources of drinking water like taps or even carrying water in greener containers.

The time and money spent by multinational corporations in lobbying for softer legislations on the use of plastic substances would be better spent on research of cheap and safe alternatives. The belief that such alternatives would be too expensive is aimed at discoursing opponents on the use of plastic bottles. There are existing scientifically proven alternatives for plastic but the big players have blatantly refused to embrace these choices.

According to Brebbia and Antunes do Carmo, alternatives for some of the substances (e.g. benzene) that cause water pollutions have already been found[17]. However, the authors point out that the prices of these substitutes may be slightly higher than those of the original product. This is because technological innovations are getting more expensive and the extraction and acquisition processes of these substitutes are also costly.

The shifts to these alternatives will save these industries millions of dollars in the future and ensure a safer and greener environment for generations to come. It is a fact that consumers will have to deal with high initial costs of the new technology; it is also obvious that this cost would be minimal in comparison to earth without the protective cover or aquatic life. Effects of the use of plastic not only affect the third world.

The United States and China have not been spared with hurricanes and floods taking toll on these two nations respectively due to unpredictable climatic changes caused by pollution. In addition, the significant drop in revenue from the fishing industry as well as the decline in the availability of fish indicates that something ought to be done to address this issue of pollution.

It is good news to note that action is being taken to reduce the effects of plastics in both global and national fronts; each and every individual has a role to play in conserving the environment and reduce pollution. Miller


Globalization in Latin American Countries Term Paper online essay help

Globalization is the process of enhancing connectivity and mutually supportive global markets and commerce. It leads to formation of a world economy and a single world market where there is disintegration of the nationalized borders an exercise which leads in integration of various nationalities and their economies. It is therefore a real phenomenon which creates positive as well as the negative impacts (National Council on Economic Education 129).

Globalization has therefore been made possible due to the increasing technological development more so on communication and internet. As the globalization increases, the countries are faced with the competition as a challenge which further leads into anti-globalization campaigns. This discussion is inclusive of the current as well as previous globalization effects on Latin America countries.

To begin with, Latin American economists, held soaring expectations of the market development which seemed possible in the emerging economies early on1990. There is still hope of the markets development even though the reality seems far from being achieved because equity and the commercial bonds are still illiquid and fragmented.

The stock market has been on liquidity decrease. In Latin America, there has been institutional reformations and advancement in the microeconomic management thus more expectations on the capital markets development.

Most countries in Latin America do dynamically and actively involve in globalization participation on development. It is also possible to present evolutional data of its capital markets that can be used in emerging economies apart from globalizations (Torre and Schmukler 3).

Although globalization has got a long history, its progression in the 21st century is not only remarkable but failure to know its outcome creates more trouble and tension to economists and other people in the world.

Some people have argued that there is no significant difference between the current global economy and the one which existed in the 19th century, it is difficult to negate the fact that the pace of the process of globalization is accelerating at a very high rate. For instance, there is a lot of technological development in the sector of information technology which results to further integration of markets (Hill and Dhanda 1020).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In addition, due to reduced trade barriers between different countries, people are moving from one country to another at a very high rate. The new forces that have emanated from globalization are beyond the ability of any country to prevent or even oppose. Factors that lead to globalization are referred to as drivers of globalization as discussed below.

There are various market globalization drivers which are inclusive but not limited to common customer needs and tastes, global customers, lead countries and transferable marketing. Common customer needs and tastes refers to a phenomena which results when customers in different countries prefer similar goods and that shapes an industry since every international company is forced to use global strategy levers to be in a position to fit in the global market.

Some customers are referred to as global customers because instead of buying from global markets, they prefer international markets helping to further increase the force of globalization. Transferable marketing helps to expand and increase global companies as it becomes easy for companies to market in different countries (Jäger 13).

Cost globalization drivers refer to all the factors that affect economics of industries like global economies of scale, favorable logistics, fast changing technology, sourcing efficiencies, difference in exchange rates and steep experience curve to mention just a few. As highlighted earlier, these factors affect an industry making it to go global in order to continue functioning and making profits. For instance, high products development costs forces a company to go global especially when the costs cannot be paid by domestic markets.

Currently, the fast changing technology also increases the costs of production. As a result, industries which use the current technology are forced to focus more on global markets since such markets help in recovering cost of production easily while compared to domestic markets. In such situations, globalization continues to extend and flourish (Czinkota, Ronkainen and Moffett 225).

Globalization is heavily affected by rules given by government inform of various policies which include favorable trade policies, common marketing regulation, government owned competitors as well as customers, host government concerns and compatible technical standards.

For instance, globalization is influenced by various governments polices like non tariff barriers, export subsidies and capital flow restrictions. Polices create a favorable environment, international trade is highly practiced, and globalization becomes inevitable. Competitive globalization drivers are inclusive of high levels of imports and exports. Following increase of trade between different countries, interaction between people increases leading to globalization.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Globalization in Latin American Countries specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More There are still other drivers like revolution of the sector of communication and information technology as well as improvement of business transactions. Such and other factors beyond the scope of this paper enhance globalization hence the term drivers of globalization (Kloby 250).

In Mexico, the areas that hold minimal disclosure and experience to globalization, basically areas that hardly draw foreign investment with no international market in reverence to unavailability industries seem to lag behind. Mexico has portrayed aggressive aspects in economy opening thus becoming a popular montage in focus of the globalization effects.

In 1985, the unilaterally tariffs were cut and also elimination of other boundaries that restricted trade. Many of the foreign investments boundaries were put into an end by 1989 while the liberation took place in 1994. There were several policy changes that contributed to the rise of international trade in Mexican at about 21 percent since 1980 to 2002 which recorded 11 and 32 percent respectively (Davis 421).

Globalization has led to relatively augmented incomes in Mexican due to its exposure to the global market. Mexico culture has also been influenced significantly for instance, development of westernization in reverence to fashion and language. Also, there has been local nationalism development in Mexican.

Globalization has led to structural change which is an indication that there are more expectations for the workers improvement. Out of improved technology: transportation infrastructure, communication, and energy have attracted foreign investments that in turn results to creation of job opportunities. Fall to barriers of investment has increased more chances to the trading system thus increase in income level through global economy involvement (Harrison 419).

Mexican joined a free trade union of the North America in the aim of achieving First World access. Out of this in 1995, poverty increased as well as the unemployment rates (Alias 4). Out of globalization, the foreign products found their way in Mexican.

These products presented a positive appearance but soon the domestic countries were faced with competition challenge with global companies in the struggle of maintaining the customers. International companies that find their way into Mexican, they entirely center on maximization of the profit paying less consideration to the Mexico economy (Harris and Seid 144).

In Columbia, there were tariff cuts in early 1990 as a result of the trade liberalization when it abandoned the industrialization policy. Therefore, there was the reformation of the Columbian trade on the financial markets. Also, there were some poverty improvements even though this only happened in the urban centers of Columbia as in rural areas there was stagnation of the same out of globalization. Columbia however has benefited on the quick global economic growth and interdependence on commercial activities (Uribe).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Globalization in Latin American Countries by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Out of the China and Eastern Europe output rise, there has been an increased demand in Columbia’s exports products which include: ferronickel and oil. Globalization has played a very significant role cultural transformation in Columbia, Nicaragua and other Latin American countries. All through, it has led to increased contacts on different values and exchange of diverse ideas (Robinson 102).

On economic globalization, there have been environmental consequences that have occurred as a result of the economies openings in Columbia, Panama, and Nicaragua where land use has become unrestricted thus failure of proper regulation to manage the land, has resulted to land degradation. Regulations are important as they play a significant role safeguarding the environment. Sustainability can however be achieved even in the practice of free trade.

The new development of the technologies in Panama has changed the trading face due to the increase in labor mobility and also the capital flow (The Effects of Globalization on Developing World Agricultural Systems). Geographical distances are no longer a barrier to labor markets incorporation. It is clear that there is already presence of the technological advances, financial liberations and also the trade innovation.

In Latin American countries, globalization is said to take a skeptical view as the rule that govern it are said to be unfair as they are specifically considered to advance other industrialized countries. Globalization has resulted into promotion of specific material values at the expense of others.

The sovereignty of the developing countries has been taken away by the way globalization is managed. There are economic systems which are grossly damaging as they are inappropriate especially when pressed upon Latin American countries (López-Alves and Johnson 150).

The global economy is currently characterized by various changes that result from globalization and the ever advancing technology. Further studies illustrate that there are various trends that are observed and the same result to the changing economy. Currently, manufacturers are using fewer raw materials to manufacture their products (Edward McMahon 14).

The current economy is also marked by less demand for physical labor and as a result, the cost of production largely depends on the applications used during manufacturing other than on human resources. Also, financial markets have become global because globalization has led to integration.

Economy has been characterized by international trade composed more of human resources, financial capital and ideas. It is therefore clear that though initially the success of a country was based on the availability of natural resources, currently, that is not the case since the most important factor is adding value to the products. As a result, countries which are able to use the most advanced technology in production have ended up being the economic giants.

As highlighted earlier in this discussion, it is important to note that there are not only challenges but also opportunities that have resulted from globalization. Several steps are required that managers need to take in order to remain successful. To begin with, it is important to identify the available opportunities in the global market.

Secondly there is needed to upgrade the products and services in order to be competitive enough in the global market. Since it is possible to invest in other countries, it is important for the managers to study the economic trends of such countries in order to invest where they can get maximum returns.

It is necessary to improve the quality of lives in the Latin American countries, thus calling for the reformation of globalization. Globalization can only be achieved when it is made fair to the whole society- everyone, thus getting rid of poverty pervasiveness. Globalization should by all means, enhance foreign assistance at the same time in debt relief (Williams 163).

Trading should be fair to all where the host industries inclusive of Latin American countries through globalization. It is good to provide free trade but at the same time liberalization should be limited. The main aim of globalization should not only search for economic profit as there is a need of enhancement of environmental preservation as all leaders should fix imperfect systems that lead to global governing (Eitzen and Leedham 119).

Globalization is a real phenomenon especially in the 21st century and cannot be stopped. Its challenges and opportunities are evident in each and every country. It is therefore most important for every person to adapt to the changes of the same. Countries need to make policies that can help them combat any problem that may emanate from globalization as well as policies that can help them prosper as other countries prosper.

For employees, it is important to increase knowledge and skills especially due to the fact that studies have indicated that the process of production is currently using the very recent technological development. Although there is a lot of literature on globalization, it is important for scholars to study the effects of globalization in specific countries and learn more on globalization.

Work Cited Alias, Cyril. The Impact of Globalization on the United Mexican States: Globalization is Good for Mexico, Yet Not for All Mexicans. New York: GRIN Verlag, 2008.

Czinkota, Michael, Ilkka A Ronkainen and Michael H Moffett. Fundamentals of International Business. New York: Wessex Publishing, 2008.

Davis, Matthew. Globalization and Poverty in Mexico. Web.

Edward McMahon, Luther Props. Balancing nature and commerce in gateway communities. New York: Island Press, 1997.

Eitzen, D. Stanley and Craig S Leedham. Solutions to social problems: lessons from other societies. New York: Allyn and Bacon, 2004.

Harris, Richard Legé and Melinda Seid. Critical perspectives on globalization and neoliberalism in the developing countries. Mexico: BRILL, 2000.

Harrison, Ann E. Globalization and poverty. Mexican: University of Chicago Press, 2007.

Hill, Ronald Paul and Kanwalroop, Kathy Dhanda. “Technological Achievement and Human Development: A View from the United Nations Development Program.” Human Rights Quarterly November 2003: 1020-1034 .

Jäger, Stephan. Globalization Drivers for Renewable Energies Referring to Electricity Production of E.ON: A Competitive Analysis in Comparison with RWE. Mexico: GRIN Verlag, 2009.

Kloby, Jerry. Inequality, power, and development: issues in political sociology. New York: Humanity Books, 2004.

López-Alves, Fernando and Diane Elizabeth Johnson. Globalization and uncertainty in Latin America. Mexico: Palgrave Macmillan, 2007.

National Council on Economic Education. Focus: Globalization. New York: National Council on Economic Educ, 2006.

Robinson, William I. Latin America and global capitalism: a critical globalization perspective. Mexico: JHU Press, 2008.

The Effects of Globalization on Developing World Agricultural Systems. 11 January 2008. Web.

Torre, Augusto de la and Sergio L Schmukler. Emerging capital markets and globalization: the Latin American experience. Mexico: World Bank Publications, 2007.

Emerging capital markets and globalization: the Latin American experience. Mexico: World Bank Publications, 2007.

Uribe, José Darío. Globalization and Colombia’s Policy Framework. 4 October 2007. Web.

Williams, Michelle. “Caribbean Shiprider Agreements: Sunk by Banana Trade War?” The University of Miami Inter-American Law Review (2000): 163-195 .


Violence in Video Games Research Paper essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Across the globe, the use of video games has been on the rise since they first hit the market. These video games are designed on various platforms thereby targeting their usage amongst children, teenagers as well as young adults. Playing video games occupies a big part of the way they spend their free time and some have even ended up being addicted to playing video games. This has raised an alarm especially considering the influence they might have on the young minds.

Video games that involve violence and combat have elicited reactions from different circles like the regulatory bodies and experts on mental issues who argue that they should be restricted since they might have a negative influence on the kids prompting them to engage in violent crimes.

Upon this concern being raised, various studies have been conducted seeking to show a relationship between video games that involve violence and existence of violent behavior amongst the young people.

Video games hit the market in 1970’s but the graphics were very simple and were not as combative. Games such as Pacman were built on a simple platform that would not be termed as excessively violent.

The video gaming field was later to be revolutionized in the 1990’s as technology advancements allowed for more descriptive and detailed graphical images most notable being the ability to view blood as fluid and making killing look as it happens in the real world. This marked the entrance of video games such as ‘Mortal Kombat’ which allowed the video game player to enter a killing mission.

The alarming nature of the violent video games elicited reactions from the law makers prompting the U.S congress to issue a regulation seeking to have the game developers come up with a way to rate them in the basis of age limit. This did little to halt the developers’ efforts to come up with advanced video games with the next innovation being more interactive 3-dimensional violent scenes where the user was able to be placed in the middle of the battle as the ‘first person shooter’.

The trend has since continued with more and more combative video games being invented and used by the young people and the situation has further been fueled by the rise in the usage of internet.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Studies conducted on this field in the past resulted in arguments with some showing that there is a relationship in playing violent video games and aggressive behavior while other studies showed mixed outcomes. Most of the research however showed that violent video games brought about aggressive personalities.

These studies were backed by recent cases of violent cases in schools e.g. the 1993 case of Columbine High School where two students (Eric and Dylan) went on a killing spree and in the end shot 12 students and a teacher. The two were said to be addicts of ‘Doom’, a violent video game.

Further evidence to link the two was seen in the video they had recorded just before they went on the killing rampage where they mentioned the “Doom’ video game. Several other cases of young people going on shooting rampages have been reported and substantial evidence given to prove the link between the murders and playing violent video games (Ferguson 30).

To try and explain the relationship between violent video games and aggression amongst the users, experimental, correlation and longitudinal methods have been used. Experimental research studies have only so far shown that playing violent video games only arouses a temporary short lived arousal of aggressive behavior. In correlation studies where the participants are required to fill in forms, the aim is to investigate the effect violent video games may have on personality and behavior.

Correlation studies are said to be influenced by one recalling past influences but all in all the final results have indicated that violent video games result in hostility and aggressiveness. Young people who are regular users of violent video games are likely to engage in more physical confrontations. Longitudinal studies involve the study population being observed in their natural living patterns.

These have shown mixed results concerning the relationship between playing violent video games and aggressive behavior. The immediate point to note is that such studies are open to a lot of influences with the biggest being that the subjects being studied are also exposed to other violent influences like Film and Television making it hard to point out the video games influence alone (Kooijmans 3).

Results from the various study methods have indicated a considerable amount of correlation between playing violent video games and aggression behavior leading to an increase in the criminal episodes reported amongst the users. Due to lack of a clear cut link on the influence of violent video games alone, calls have been made for a theoretical framework to be designed that will best explain the correlation.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Violence in Video Games specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The recent greatest contribution in this area is the development of the general aggression model (GAM) by Anderson and Bushman in 2002. The model explains a person’s resultant internal state e.g. aggression by looking at the how the differences in personalities and situations come into play when considering the effect playing violent video games might have (Shin 6).

The model explains that aggressive behavior is the resultant decision made by a person after thoughts, feelings and arousals interact. GAM model explains that playing violent video games produces effects that are both short lived and long-term effects. Playing violent video games in short term leads to aggressive thoughts, aggressive feelings and a feeling of violent arousal.

These only contribute to aggressive behavior temporarily. In long term, playing violent video games leads to steady development of violent beliefs and formation of aggressive attitudes. This leads to formation of aggressive behavioral thinking which eventually becomes a normal way of thinking causing the young person to be insensitive to aggression which makes them view it as a normal way of life. Most young people undergoing puberty have a lot of biological changes that go on in them.

As a result, as they grow mentally owing to environmental influences, the effects of violent video games may be incorporated as their minds go through the GAM model processes resulting in an aggressive lot. Violent video games have therefore been linked to the rise in cases of school shooters who go killing sprees as well as bullying in schools (Anderson and Gentile 2008).

Video games are in this age being developed with focus on appealing to the target population which is the children, adolescents and the youths who are in their early adulthood. This has been inspired by the recognition that more and more young people have been taking to playing video games during their free time and the facts are proven by the massive increase in video games sales by the owner companies.

According to Anderson, Gentile, and Buckley, as competition between companies in selling video games intensifies, they have resulted in innovative ways of designing the video games which has ended in a lot of arguably undesirable content in the video games (123).

When violent video games hit the market in the 1970’s, the violence content was very minimal and the effects further suppressed by the fact that the graphics were not as developed.

As time went on and technology advanced, it became possible to create simulations of the real life images making it possible to show killing as real. Nowadays the video games have been associated with certain characteristics which make them more appealing. They have become more interactive and hence addictive, and the environment in the gaming world is mediated for an appeal to the users.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Violence in Video Games by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Most violent games nowadays have sessions where the game player exchanges messages with the game making it possible to include violent language use. The narratives in most violent games explain to the gamer the variety weaponry available for use while further explaining how to use them. This has increased the young people’s awareness of assault riffles and other weapons that can be used in violent scenes while further instructing them on how to use them (Porter and Starcevic 4).

As the game developers struggle to stay ahead of the competition, more and more content has been added in the video games with the most notable one that have elicited mixed reactions being; graphic violence, sex acts, revealed nudity, blood filled violent scenes, and making taking criminal roles seem like a heroic act. Thanks to technological advancements, now graphic representations in the video games are now close to real life and so is the representation of violence.

With clear graphics, now the young people are exposed to a lot of complicated violent moves that are executable in real life. Playing Grand Theft Auto series presents one with simulations of real life violent acts where the gamer can steal cars, knock down pedestrians, take an assault riffle and shoot down a whole city population by killing anyone in sight.

Scenes in the gaming world filled with blood which increases the violent feel of the games. Some games have very elaborate manner of killing but exaggerated blood spills where to mark a victim who’s been hit and died, blood splashes. The recently introduced Suda51’s No More heroes on the once considered non violent gaming world Nintendo, is made up of scenes where the gamer crashes the targets limbs and includes a lot of blood splattering (Pramath 2010).

In quite a number of video games today, scenes of people exposing their partial or fully nude bodies have become very common. This corrupts the young people’s minds. The line was however crossed when games surfaced involving pure sexual acts. A certain gaming company took the idea further and incorporated use of violence in the game.

RapeLay, a game that hit the stores in 2006 sees the gamer take the role of a rapist and goes on a mission to violently undress and forcefully get sexual favors from unwilling victims in a crowded train. A certain level requires the gamer to take the role of the rapist and rape a woman and then two of her young daughters.

Such a video game clearly soils the mind of the young people and makes rape look like a fun activity. In most of the violent video games today, the user takes up the role of a criminal. The mission is committing a series of criminal acts while earning points for each successful act.

In Hitman Contracts, the game player takes the role of a hired killer who is sent on a mission to kill a certain high profile individual. You must in the process kill the soldiers among other crimes in order to earn maximum points. The heroic deeds praised in most violent video games give the young people’s minds an impression that one should commit crime to feel heroic (Pramath 2010).

Some violent games have been made with the ideas based on current points of conflict amongst states. After the September 11 attacks of the U.S by the Alqaeda terrorists, numerous games were developed with their story line revolving around terrorism.

Most of them however sees the gamer take up the role of a terrorist and sends them on a mission armed with heavy weapons which enable them to bomb cities and buildings. Breeding a young lot that sees terrorism as a heroic deed really serves little to fight the act itself. Other games have story lines that elevate current conflicts.

Postal 2 has scenes that seek to display the fall out of the nuclear bans between the U.S and North Korea while other games show the heroic deeds of using nuclear bombs. Some violent video games have caused a stir due to their abusive nature of a respected concept such as racial differences and respect for religious belief of honoring our dead. Left 4 Dead 2 came under much criticism for its story that revolves around killing zombies.

These zombies are African-Americans which makes it clear that the issue of racial discrimination may be supported in this game. Religious beliefs also dictate on the respect of the dead who are represented as Zombies in this game. This does much harm for the young minds and can shoot down the efforts to raise religious kids (Pramath 2010).

Despite the continued cries to restrict a number of violent video games and issue regulatory measures, more and more video games keeps on coming up and which seek to bring in new concepts. Some games have been totally banned in some countries owing to their nature to possibly corrupt minds including the young people and touching on sensitive issues that touch on a particular country. However their sales still continue in other countries prompting for production of more games.

Companies that develop these video games are in business at competition increases as more companies come up but the population keeps demanding for more and better ones. This pushes the companies to come up with new video games that bring in new concepts or are fiercer than their competitions. This way the flow of the violent video games continues as more are put in the market Cooper and Mackie (730),

Owing to the established influence of the violent video games on the children, parents are faced with the burden of bringing up kids whose minds have been spoilt by aggressive tendencies picked from the video games. As parents embark on the all important role of parenting their kids, they should be aware of the influences shaping the child’s behavior and take direct action to control it.

Several discussions in the recent past have been directed on the influence violent media content has on the kids and experts have pointed out violent video games in particular as having the most influence. Anderson and Bushman attributed this to the fact that playing video games creates an interactive atmosphere as well as requiring the gamer to play the major role in the violent scenes as opposed to a passive role in watching violent films.

Parents therefore should know this and be in a position to control the content in the video games their kids play. As a parent it is also very important to be always aware of what stage your child is in development phase. This way you will be better positioned in deciding the information they take in and the effect it will have on them.

This is because young people are in a stage where their form of learning is mainly experiential and their behavior is shaped by observing, imitating and adapting to the prevailing environment. Exposure to such experiences as playing violent video games can lead the young people in mimicking the roles taken in the games thereby resulting in aggressive behavior (6).

The understanding of the issues raised concerning the effects of violent video games, numerous studies have conducted on the subject with several models being developed to explain the effects. Most results have indicated a negative influence of playing violent video games arguing that they contribute to elevate aggressiveness.

It is however evident from other findings that there have been reported some positive correlation between playing violent video games and children’s behavior. Skoric, Teo, and Neo, stated that violent video games arguably act as an avenue for the young people to relieve their aggressive behavior thereby resulting in calm non-rebellious kids. Playing video games also act as a social activity where the child can interact with peers as they play the games.

Other positive results reported from playing video games include improved hand-eye coordination and ability not to be distracted and attention to details. A combination of these factors has been said to better academic performance for kids who play violent video games. This justifies why playing violent video games is still a very valid option for raise a better kid (6).

In taking active roles to regulate their child’s learning experiences and filter the contents of the video games, parents can make several efforts. It is important to check the video game for the rating which establishes whether it is appropriate for the kid’s age. This has been made possible by establishment of regulation seeking to have all video game developers provide rating for each game which restricts usage according to age limit.

Let the video playing sessions be within an area where you can monitor the kids as they play and if possible make attempts to play with them so as to understand the game content. Limit the amount of time spent playing video games to reduce attachment and negative influence. Encourage the kids to interact with their peers by participating in other extra curricular activities other than playing video games online (Sisson 5).

In conclusion, although there has not been established clear evidence as to whether violent video games cause aggressive behavior, many studies have pointed out toward a possible link between the two. Everyone is however in agreement that the violent video games are in compromise of morals and expose the young kids to in appropriate content. Further studies will however need to be done to support the issue of negative effects since some studies have shown that it is beneficial to the young minds.

Works Cited Anderson, Craig, and Douglas Gentile. “Violent Video Game Feed Aggression in Kids in Japan and U.S.” Science Daily, 2008. Print.

Anderson, Craig, Douglas Gentile, and Katherine Buckley. Violent Video Game Effects on Children and Adolescents: Theory, Research, and Policy. New York: Oxford University Press, 2007. Print.

Anderson, Craig, and Brad Bushman. “Effects of violent Video Games on Aggressive Behavior, Aggressive Cognition, Aggressive Effect, Physiological Arousal, and Prosocial Behavior: A Meta-analytic Review of Scientific Literature.” Psychological Science, 2001. Print

Cooper, James, and David Mackie. “Video Games and Aggression in Children.” Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 1986. Print

Ferguson, Christopher. “The School Shooting/Violent Video Link: Causal Relationship or Moral Panic.” Journal of Investigative Psychology and Offender Profiling, 2008. Print.

Kooijmans, Thomas. “Effects of Video Games on Aggressive Thoughts and Behaviors During Development.” Great Ideas in Personality, 2004. Print.

Porter, Guy, and Vladan, Starcevic. “Are Violent Video Games Harmful?” Australian Psychiatry, 2007. Print.

Pramath, Gregory. “Top Six Video Games Censored Because of Violent Content.” Gamingbolt. Gamingbolt, 2010. Print.

Shin, Grace. “Video Games: A Cause of Violence and Aggression.” Journal of American Psychological Association, 2008). Print.

Sisson, John. “Violent Video Games and Young People.” Harvard Mental Health Letter, 2010. Print.

Skoric, Marko, Linda Teo, Rachel Neo. “Children and Video Games: Addiction, Engagement, and Scholastic Achievement.” Cyber Psychology and Behavior, 2005. Print.


Organizational Research and Theory Research Paper writing essay help: writing essay help

Introduction An organization’s external environment is very relevant on how the organization is structured and conducts its operations, thus, it shapes the organization as a whole. An organization needs to understand that the environment is highly dynamic and ever changing; what happened yesterday in the corporate world or public sector may be completely different from what is happening now.

As the environment changes a lot of ambiguity introduces concerns for the individual working in these organizations. Organizations which do not appreciate change may end up being replaced or even being declared bankrupt and eventually closing down (Brayden, Teppo


Being famous to being rich Essay college essay help near me

Table of Contents Introduction

Social ladder

The futuristic perspective of being rich to being fame


Work Cited

Introduction The human species vary greatly in various perspectives ranging from intelligence, size, milieu, and social status. Social status pertains to the different categories of famous people and rich people. Famous people include rappers and singers, actors and actress, producers, television and movies stars, models, chefs, teachers; any person can be famous (reComparison contributing writer, par. 2).

Comparatively, there are variety of rich people who have gain their wealth status through delusion, legacy, diligent work, live insurance policies regarding the death of family member or by hitting the lotto (par. 2).

Social ladder In determining a person’s social status, many factors are considered. These factors include personal monetary value, a person’s family, who you know as well as how you tumbled upon your fame or money. There is a wide variation between the famous movie idols and politicians. A movie idol will earn a high opinion and admiration from the public, whereas a famous politician will command a big scope of fans when they are still in the limelight (par. 3).

Although millionaires and billionaires form the crest of the social status, in the young generation’s mind they fall short of fame since they seldom appear in the information media preferred by them. This is evident by the fact that a public spokesman can enjoy a higher social position relative to other private millionaires, if s/he is well-known (par. 3).

The futuristic perspective of being rich to being fame Ironically the famous persons as well as rich persons can at any time lose their fame and money. Nevertheless, when an individual who is famous loses his/her social status, some small degree of their fame still remains. The expression “fifteen minute of fame” applies for those persons who have been put in the limelight by publicity experts converse to those who have been espouse glorious or those regarded as fascinating by the masses; their work and career will still persist regardless of the reason for their fame (par. 4).

On the other hand, the rich can restore back his/her money after losing, by persistent hard work or by applying the same initiative that facilitated their success initially. According to those who are not rich, achieving a rich status has some mystery attached to it. Money goes to those who focus their thoughts to gaining wealth by applying very distinct steps which they uphold will result in success. The essentials of financial success are to some extent aligned with the laws of cause and effects (par. 5).

Conclusion Being rich does not necessarily mean you are famous; conversely, being famous does not essentially mean you are rich. A rich person can lose his money any moment whereas a famous person can only have his fame diminished to some degree determined by the cause for the fame.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Fame makes the social status easy to scale on the account of the big number of people know you, while a rich person can by his/her way up the social status. Although money can make one rich, it cannot necessarily make you famous; instead being famous is not a materialistic aspect of the society since any person can do something to become famous (par. 6).

Work Cited reComparison contributing writer. Being Rich vs. Being Famous. reComaprison – Compare it Yourself. 2010. [Online article] 30 November, 2010.


Public and Private Investigations Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

Criminal and other undesirable behaviors among human beings have been in existence for as long as the history of mankind. There has therefore been a need to stem these problems since they affect the members of a society either directly or indirectly. The government has the sole responsible of ensuring the security and general well-being of its citizens. Investigators play a great role in finding out the perpetrators of crime and hence help minimize these incidences. The essay compares the public and private investigators.

Public investigators are government law enforcement officers whose mandate is controlled by the U.S laws. Most public investigators include those from the FBI and are majorly engaged in criminal and civil law. Some of the major investigations carried out by these investigators include drug trafficking, child trafficking and kidnapping, bank robbery, fraud, terrorism, abuse of public office and cyber crime (Saferstein, 2000).

It is important to note that these investigators usually undergo some form of training in agency training institutions in addition to the high school or college education. The minimum enrolment criteria into such institutions vary based on height, weight, sight and general body fitness.

The intense training in such institutions is culminated by an on-job induction and practice. The police colleges majorly specialize in criminology and police science courses since these are the venture fields for the investigators. The state categorically lays down some policies that govern the work of these investigators (Saferstein, 2000). Licensure is usually considered a key factor in this practice.

FBI investigators, for instance, are required to work under several terms such as identifying themselves to the suspects before conducting an investigation. This ensures that the correct due process in enforcement of the law is followed. It should be noted that the findings obtained by public investigators form the basis of eventual prosecution and trial in a court of law (Kelly


The Development of Feudalism and Manorialism in the Middle Ages Essay writing essay help

West European Studies Feudalism refers to military and political practices in medieval Europe that occurred amid the 19TH century and 15th century. Sacking of Rome by Visigoths resulted to feudalism in Europe. This spearheaded (Brown, Elizabeth 1065) the Romans living in Europe to move back to their native land abandoning the land in Europe without organisation as well as Roman centralisation system. Disintegration of Europe following the Roman power exit gradually led to Feudalism systems.

The initial feudalism components occurred in Germany and France in the ninth and tenth centuries. Roman regime elements were taken to military and political practices. Furthermore, Roman villas alongside their property were given to leaders of the military temporarily in return to their loyalty both to the emperor and to Rome (Salisbury, Joyce


The True Meaning of Beauty Expository Essay essay help online free

Table of Contents Meaning of Beautiful

True Meaning of Beauty

Self-esteem (SE) in the social world

Misconstrued meaning of true love

True meaning of beauty within the social world


Meaning of Beautiful People often perceive beauty as the external or physical appearance while despising or lacking clear perception of the inner beauty. Generally, people therefore boast the idea that beauty is the perception or thoughts that other people have regarding ones’ appearances. This meaning of beauty is stronger when someone is associated with work, career or financial success.

The aspect of self-esteem in this case depends on others’ point of view, their thought and their articulation about your appearances. The physical beauty also has a link to association, interaction and friendship. If one works with physically appearing women, then they think of being in possession of beauty. When one receives favours that closely connect to their physical appearances, it is easy to form the egotistical and self-cantered personality.

Those who are concern of their physical appearances spend a lot of time on enhancing the self-image, since they are eager to improve or attract more attention and hence may end up as self-centred persons who easily despise others. According to Schutt (2006) “Their life-styles depends on the hair, clothing and overall physical attractiveness”

True Meaning of Beauty Beauty is not necessarily the physical appearance. Beauty is the inner aspect of the heart that causes humanitarian reactions. True meaning of beauty therefore touches on personality and self-esteem. Self-believe brings out the true meaning and feeling of beauty since one is able to love and accept oneself as well as others, thus creating confidence, inner security of personality, better character and strong self-esteem.

Self-esteem (SE) in the social world In Line with Ballantine and Roberts (2008), Self-esteem is the estimate or consideration of self-worthiness and this is therefore what makes up the true inner beauty. The self-esteem concept therefore indicates truthfulness of beauty as an internal trait that presents the overall sum of all traits of a person. This assists people in finding individual perceptions, personalities, temperaments or individuality.

People are generally interesting, boring, fun-filled or dull. This reaction depends highly on the internal beauty of a person. The personal roles, personal successes/failures, others views, social identity and comparisons are the main factors influencing the development of self-concepts.

People have different roles to play such as parenting, offering services/goods or guiding others. If you present a new role to someone, the role would initially feel alien, but with time, it becomes part of the self-concept for instance the parenting roles. This is an indication that one can be in a position to bring out success over challenging tasks through adjustment and improvement of the self-concepts.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Misconstrued meaning of true love Unfair comparisons to others set the loopholes for disappointments over performances. When based on the external or physical appearances, interpretation of beauty causes people to endeavour in protection of a wounded self-esteem since there are possibilities of rationalizing the competitor as having advantage for better performance. Self-identity defines the race, gender, and performance among other issues.

Being aware of a social identity changes the self-concept because when one belongs to a minority group, the social identity changes. Contrary to this concept, social comparison can involve unenthusiastic evaluation of others abilities or opinions. The meaning of beauty can thus cause people to have a comparison that alters the self-concepts and esteem.

True meaning of beauty within the social world True meaning of beauty affects both the self-esteem and self-efficacy. These two aspects are completely difference because of dissimilarity on the sense of competency and effectiveness. The tough achievements and fine manipulations improve the efficacy because one feels good about his/her abilities to set and meet challenging goals. Personal believes and feelings towards achievements thus determine the existence of self-efficacy and appreciation of the true beauty within a personality.

References Ballantine, J. H.,


Running Speed in Dinosaurs Term Paper custom essay help: custom essay help

Introduction Dinosaurs refer to a wide set of animals that dominated vertebrates living on land for more than one hundred and sixty years since the end of Triassic era to the late Cretaceous era. The species of dinosaur began disappearing in the third incident of crustacean extinction event. According to reports from the fossils, avian developed from a group of dinosaurs called theropod in the Jurassic era (Paul 14). A few of the birds evaded this period including their descendants. Never the less, birds in some instances have been classified as dinosaurs.

These are a set of animals consisting of more than nine thousand avian and perciform fish. Several kinds of avian dinosaurs have been identified, ranging from those that fly to those that do not fly. Fossil remains belonging to dinosaurs have been excavated in all parts of the world. A few of the dinosaurs were carnivorous whilst others were herbivorous. Furthermore, some dinosaurs have been having two pedals, others with four pedals.

Dinosaurs having two pedals assume the highest ultimate speed in running as opposed to those with four limbs. Never the less, some dinosaurs walking on fours sprint at a fast rate as opposed to their bipedal counterpartss. A case in point is the avian descendants which possess fast moving muscles of the upper arm which have evolved by time to form wings and can propel the dinosaur at very electrifying speeds especially under tension or when running after a prey.

Most of the present day animals have their ancestral roots among the dinosaurs’ .The world’s main vertebrates that fly are the birds. In addition to this, most of the dinosaurs have been reduced in sizes and are said to make nests including laying eggs in the nests as well as flying at very high speeds. The first fossils were discovered in the nineteenth century. Since the discovery, the remains have been preserved in various historic sites such as the museums.

Every excavated remain has followed the same suite making museums rich of dinosaur remains. Dinosaurs have appeared in best-selling editorials as well as films expending their fast moving characteristics. New discoveries of the same have been aired by media on regular basis. More so, the eroding dinosaur image as ancient monster has attracted the use of ‘dinosaur’ into gaining entry into vernacular by describing anything that is obsolete, huge, tending towards extinction and slows in motion.

Modern definition According to Phylogenic classification, dinosaurs refer to modern birds (Neortnithes), their recent ancestors’. Avian species have been characterized by presence of ostriches; these definitions encompass theropods, sauropodomorphs, ankylosaurians, stegosaurians, ceratopsians, and ornithopods (Paul 67).

General description Dinosaurs can be defined as land based archosaurian reptiles constituting of limbs erected below the body that existed during the end ofs Triassic and the end of Cretaceous periods. Most of antediluvian animals are purported to be dinosaurs (Paul 76). Dinosaurs constituted a large portion of animals living on land and which resembled mammals very closely.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Other sets of animals were very small and limited to the size of a rodent or cat. However, Repenomamus giganticus fed on infant dinosaurs. Since 2008, various dinosaur species have been identified. One of the Dinosaurs was found to be living in aerial or marine environments despite the fact that some theropods with feathers could fly. This simply means that some of the spinosaurids constituted of temporal aquatic characteristics.

Physiology Most people studying the origin and evolution processes among dinosaurs have given different opinions regarding thermal regulation which closely intertwines with speed in a given animal. Initially a hot discussion ensured with respect to the beasts ability to regulate the body temperatures.

Currently studies have supported the fact that these eroding species existed in regions of low temperatures hence most of them had thermal regulatory mechanisms to counter the cooler climatic conditions. Hence, the argument concurs with those who asserted that the dinosaur’s ultimate speed during sprinting was very low; hence they were slow moving creatures. An example of this fossil is that of the polar bears found in Antarctica region.

Discovery of avian fossils have also supported the thermal regulation concept among Neortnithes. The study of blood circulation among a set of avian dinosaurs is a true representation of all endothermic creatures. Theropods displayed an active lifestyle blood circulatory system that is characteristic of endothermic animals.

Warm-bloodedness among many animals can result from various mechanisms. For example, Mammals and avian whose body sizes are average have been compared with endothermic dinosaurs. These birds make use of their energies to increase their body temperatures above that of the surrounding.

Small sized avian have insulators in terms of presence of feathers and fat which aids in thermal regulation. Huge mammals like elephants, however, have a minute surface area compared to its volume which is in agreement with Halden’s principle. This feature enhances thermal regulation which resulting from the cooling of the body temperatures during hot seasons via flapping of the ears. This characteristic is important especially during running after a hunt.

Dinosaurs speed The legs of human beings are up right with knees that are straight due to their vertical bodies that put the C.O .G (centre of gravity) in alignment with the socket of the hip. Since both the body and the head of the bipedal dinosaurs were kept level as well as ahead of the hips despite the long tail which countered the balance, the femur sloped in front in order to maintain the feet below COG.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Running Speed in Dinosaurs specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This organization is however extremely represented in birds with short tails whose femoral bones are close to the horizontal line on walking so as to maintain the feet and knees a distant enough in front, hence during running, birds femur tends to strongly swing towards the back as opposed to the front (Martin 57).

Two sets of dinosaurs namely the sauropods and the stegosaurs developed elephantine biased towards straighter-jointed columnar limbs. The knee structure was reorganized in that it maintained wholly articulated upright. More so, the mobility of the ankle was reduced whilst the hind limbs were kept short.

This adaptation restrained the body from being pushed in to actual running irrespective of the size. For instance, young elephants always run at a slower pace as opposed to their parents in that at least one foot is always stack to the ground during high speed running.

Dinosaurs with straight limbs should have been much slower in running than elephants whose speed is equal to or less than 15 meters per minute or 25kilometres per hour (Paul 245). Neither, is it an issue to ascertain that medium and small dinosaurs bearing lengthy, slender flexed hind limbs would run at similar speed to galloping mammals and terrestrial birds whose speed is between forty to sixty kilometers per hour.

Challenges have been experienced in attempts to find out the highest speed in which heavy weight dinosaurs can attain. Some electronic technologies have claimed that tyrannosauras dinosaurs could attain a highest speed of approximately forty kilometers per hour equal to elephants of the same size which is the human beings sprinting speed.

Since large tyrannosaurus had better running adaptations as opposed to elephants, there lacks a likelihood of this kind of creatures having been slow, furthermore, some individuals indicates that enormous theropods capability to run was twice that of similar sized elephants and that this speed was equivalent to that of the non-thorough bred horses and rhinos.

Till date, the electronic analysis of dinosaurs locomotion processes in addition to storage of energy in the already stretched tendons of the limbs and springing resonance effect of the tail and torso. Neither, has it occurred that the capability of the programs used in finding out the speed could successfully ascertain extreme animals’ performance as well as estimate the modalities on which extreme dinosaurs which include the supersaurapods were able to maintain an upright posture with minimal movements irrespective of their huge bodies.

This is very important to note, however, this query has lacked answers for many decades (Lockley 12). It is even more depressing to think about all this mystery since track-ways indicate that the vast surapods were terrestrial never the less, their appearance looks irregular and their weight cannot give support to elephants whose speed is low and which bears a small body size. The supersaurapods needed super muscles and power to run across Mesozoic lands.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Running Speed in Dinosaurs by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More They also needed pretty adaptations like well built fiber muscles as well as tendons that have already been tensed to undergo evolution so as to enhance movement. If their muscles were pre-tensed then it is obvious that the huge dinosaurs might have very high running speed as opposed to computer analysis results.

General Anatomy and Speed The heads of the dinosaurs ranged from delicate structures to well formed structures. The sinuses or nasal passages were well constructed something that was very popular with the archosaurs. Most dinosaurs maintained prominent orbital openings, where as in others the opening was nearly closed off.

As opposed to other mammals that consist of prominent face muscles, and just like avian and reptiles, dinosaurs did not have muscles of the head thus the skin was in direct contact with the skull. This adaptation makes it easier for head restoration in dinosaurs as opposed to other mammals.

The outside nares are located in distant place from their nose despite the extent of the nasal cavity which extends in the exterior. Among some set of sauropods, the nasal cavity have been found extended in the anterior part of the skull, over the sockets of the eyes. Previously, it was said that this adaptation enhanced snorkeling of the dinosaurs during submerging. Recently it has been purported that retracted nasal cavities evolved so that it can protect them from irritation as they fed on cactus.

Most of the vegetation constituted of soft vegetation and this adaptation really helped the dinosaurs. The flabby nasal cavity extended interiorly such that nares on the exterior were positioned in normally close to the snouts tip. Nothing can proof that dinosaurs had proboscis. The skin that covers huge cavities in the orbits anterior of most of the dinosaurs smoothly extended to the exterior. The muscles of the jaw also protruded outside the cavities of the skull of the orbital sockets.

Snakes constituted fangs that were trimmed sharply. Amphibians on the other hand had teeth that could be seen upon closure of the lips. The amphibians also did not have muscles that covered the mouth cavity.

This adaptation seems to be satisfactory to many of the sauropods and theropods (Lockley 78). One distinct species is the spinosaurs whose arrangement resembles that of a crocodile with the front teeth spaced widely in different sockets. Hence this set of dinosaurs might have lacked lips and their ugly lips left uncovered on closure of the jaws.

Ornithischians came up with embryonic teeth. In therizinosaurs and Ornithischians the beak was based on the anterior of the mouth where as in theropods including most of the avian the teeth were replaced by the beak. Most of the birds with beaks do not have lips and cheeks .Never the less; condors have diminished mouths due to the fact that their side jaws are protected by elastic tissues of the cheek which vary from muscles of the cheek covering side teeth.

For sauropods and Ornithischians the side teeth were always inset, the surrounding cavities constituted smooth surfaces including the foramen which extending the soft tissues.

This implies that the well structured elastic cheeks enveloped the side teeth. This adaptation is clearly spelt out in Ornithischians and the tissues of the cheeks some which underwent ossification especially among the ankysaurs where cheeks protruded towards the beak.

The dinosaurs trunk vertebrae moved in various directions such as the dorsal convex or the straight line that varied from feeble to strong (Strickberger 57). The nature in which dinosaurs articulated more so during ossification of the tendons of the spinal meant that their backs were more stiff as opposed to those of lizards as well as other mammals though dinosaurs trunk vertebrae were not jointed.

Dinosaur ribs seemed to be more perpendicular yet this varied from one dinosaur to another. The hips and the stomachs of the carnivorous theropods were tiny indicating the diminished digestive system and also their running abilities. Large carnivorous dinosaurs could fast during hunger and porch for prey afterwards hence their stomachs remained hollow during the time of hunting.

On the other hand, herbivorous dinosaurs had enlarged hips and bellies which extended to the very extreme in that it adversely affected the fattest dinosaurs. The ankylosaurs shoulder blades were more warped along the extended axis so that it fits on the abrupt change from shoulders which were narrow to the bulged abdomen.

The muscles of the trunk were made light and this adaptation enhanced their movement. The gastrointestinal system was made flexible to aid in swallowing of food. The tail and the hip inclined con the same line as they appeared in vertebral of the trunk. Amongst the sauropods and therizinosaurs, the tail and hip were upwardly flexed with respect to the vertebrae of the trunk.

This enabled the trunk to be clutched strongly anchored upwards whilst the tail and hips maintained a horizontal plane thus an upright posture of the head was increased where as the dinosaurs ability to run on the hind limbs was maintained. Since most of this animal’s weight concentrated on their hind limbs apart from the tail which acted to counter the weight of the body, most the dinosaurs reared upwards including those whose forelimbs were longer than hind limbs.

Assessing the speed of Dinosaur A critical aspect to note in finding out the power and speed of dinosaurs is limb muscles mass, which constitutes a bigger percentage of the sum of mass in the high speed mammals as opposed to slow speed mammals (Paul 45). Lack of muscles on dinosaur fossils has made it difficult to accurately ascertain the exact speed of dinosaur, the best that can be done is just but finding an approximate figure which has had discrepancies from one researcher to another.

The complicated muscles of the limbs of the existing mammals find their roots in the history of dinosaurs. Dinosaurs preserved the plain structure reptile muscles which are prominent till date. For instance, the main muscle which are still visible in most dinosaurs and reptiles but lacking in mammals and avian are caudofemoralis tail based muscles that aided in pulling the legs backwards at the time of propulsive stroke.

Despite the fact the exact muscle dinosaur sizes cannot be identified, their comparative sizes amid various sets can be estimated. A case in point is the hips of the reptiles which consists of an undersized ilium in that the muscles of thighs are forced to be narrow restricting their size. The extended iliac of the mammals and avian hold a powerful and broad group of muscles of the thigh (Paul 56). The ancient prosauropods and herreraurs ilium was undersized hence must have consisted of very tiny muscles of the thigh.

Some of the dinosaurs had deep and extended ilium holding a very large group of muscles of the thigh promoting sustaining power. To some of the dinosaurs the trend was very extreme. On the other hand, tyrannosaurids and ornithomimids which belong to the family of ostriches consisted of large pelvis demonstrating the presence of distinctively enormous muscles of the legs with the ability to produce enough power during high speed propelling.

Longer hips were observed in ceratopsid dinosaurs which enhanced large hind limb muscles which promoted the fast fending off of the muscles. Surprising the large ilium lacked in saurapod dinosaur. This is due to the fact that this kind of dinosaurs did not have to move fast. This is the same issue with the elephants which lacked huge muscles beneath the knees due the fact that the limbs in which the shank muscles support immobile and short.

This was true of stegosauras and sauropods. Fast moving animals constitute a huge stack of shank muscles that manipulate the extended long, movable limbs through the tendons. For bipedal dinosaur such as avian, huge collection of limbs that resemble the drumstick muscles beneath the knee anchoring on enemial like projections in front of the joints of the knees.

Bringing back dinosaurs entirely makes their surface contours to be so simple in that their tails, limbs, and legs into to tubes that are simplified tubes and smoothing above the body topography. Among the saurapods, the neck vertebra protuberance, were prominent on the necks as they appear in giraffes.

Since the oesophagus and the trachea of sauropods well held up amidst the necks and their cervical ribs, the lower part of their necks should have been flattened. As opposed to two legged dinosaurs, four legged dinosaurs are huge with enormous body weights. The dinosaur’s skeletons were adapted to bearing heavy loads as opposed to running. The 3-toed two legged dinosaurs used to walk on twos.

This is what the cursorial dinosaurs adaptation to running. This feature is important and it has been well brought gout gin the modern avian which are ancestors of coelurosaurian. Digitigrades features enhance the length of the limbs since the metatarsal bones contribute to the length of the leg increasing the animals COG. An example is the limbs of human being which are used for jumping or running, during running, the runners sprint on their toes.

Estimating the Maximum Running Speed of Dinosaurs William Sellers and Phillip Manning attempted to find out the maximum running speed of dinosaurs using robot. In their finding they noted that multiple body simulations by use of approaches such as evolutionary robots seem to give steadfast estimates of the highest speeds attained by dinosaurs (Strickberger 87). For instance, multibody simulations, with minor variations in patterns of muscle activation as well as starting conditions resulted to constant estimates.

The ultimate running speed in animals is very technical and poses a lot of challenges in estimating this parameter. This is because as far one might try to estimate using an animal on pace, the animal might not run as fast as it could run. Furthermore most of the estimated values of the running speed of animals are given with regard to the observation findings which were conducted under compromising situations.

The ultimate speed of running among dinosaurs differs from one species to another. Whereas the situation may deem to be straight forward in humans in that the two hundred meter sprint may be above or below 0.1 of a second the maximum speed attained can exceed the normal speed by 12m/s. The situation in humans is apt for well known athletes with well built muscles as opposed to the estimations (Paul 67).

The above estimates concur with the biochemical techniques which estimate eighteen meters per second among ostriches and thirteen meters per second for emu. The differences in the mass of muscles affects the maximum speed and these changes have a great influence on the average speed of the dinosaurs. Another method of measuring the highest speed attained by the dinosaurs is by estimation the loading capacity of the bones and the value compared to the speed of the animals whose speed is known.

Conclusion All in all, dinosaurs were ancient reptiles that existed during the reptile’s period. These creatures dominated the planet hundreds and hundreds of years ago and faded way as time went by and until now we can only see the fossils. Dinosaurs were terrestrial reptiles whose locomotion was on an erect posture.

The most unique thing about the dinosaurs was the structure of their distinct hips that caused their hind limbs to protrude beneath their bodies and not spread out from the sides (Martin 56). When these animals evolved from ancient archosaurs, they were pedaling on twos but evolved to quadric-pedals. The evolution of muscles and the hip structure an adaptation that has enhanced its locomotion and other characteristics. Dinosaurs have been purported to have been the ancient reptiles that ran at a lightning speed (Lockley 78).

However, there lacks a clear evidence to ascertain this claim. Some of scientists have tried to estimate the maximum running speed of these animals using conventional robotic instrument with no success. Dinosaurs have evolved from time and time and from the distinct creatures birds, crocodiles have emerged. In evaluating the speed and power is the mass of the muscles of the limb (Martin 67).

Despite the fact that the exact mass of the muscles of limb cannot be determined due to the absence of the muscles on the fossils, their comparative size amid various groups can be produced. Scientist has tried estimating the maximum speed of dinosaurs.

Approximating the speeds of dinosaurs differ from one method of estimation to another. For instance, some scientists have argued that young children might out do their counterpart in running.

The various methods of evaluating the ultimate speed that can be achieved by dinosaurs are the same techniques which can be put to task in evaluating the speed of the animals in today’s world. For instance, the dinosaurs walking speed range between four to six kilometers per hour to six kilometers the ultimate running speed has been purported to range between thirty seven to eighty seven kilometers per hour.

The ultimate speed which has been said to be the maximum speed of the dinosaurs is the current speed of the fastest terrestrial Animals. This speed differs from one species to another and it is also dependant on the approach used. Each approach used has its own confounding factors that yield different results.

Works Cited Lockley, Martin. Tracking Dinosaurs: a New Look at an Ancient World. Denver: CUP achive, 1991.Print

Martin, Anthony. Introduction to the Study of Dinosaurs. London: Wiley-Blackwell, 2006. Print

Paul, Gregory. The Field Guides. New York: Princeton University Press, 2010.Print

Strickberger, Monroe. Evolution. New York: Jones


Discussion 4 Essay essay help online

In this discussion, you will explore the influence of technology on criminal investigations. As you perform your research, consider the technology we have examined so far. Use credible news sites that report on criminal cases.

For your initial post, find a real-world example of police using technology and explain the impact the technology use had on the criminal investigation. Specifically address the following:

Find an article and post the link. Cite your source at the end of the discussion using APA format.
Describe what technology was used and how it was used.
Explain whether the use of the technology led to a positive outcome.


Racism in the “Crash” Essay best college essay help: best college essay help

Introduction People are all alike despite their slight evident differences. However, their diversity is to a large extend, the root cause of all their conflicts. The fact that people vary in terms of their personalities, race, language, skin color, among others, is a clear implication that their interaction is subject to violence. Paul Haggis’ ‘passion piece’ Crash, set in Los Angeles proves this right. In his works, Haggis depicts an interaction of characters that differ in all senses; race, origin, skin color, just to mention but a few.

This is why statements like, ‘white shooter’, ‘Persian man’, ‘Hispanic locksmith’ stand out in the character’s conversations to mark their differences. It is from these divergences that the film’s title Crash is derived to imply the violence that results when two or more ‘different’ people interact. It is worthy noting that, all the characters in the film are victims of crashes and none is free of sympathy. Racism stands as the basis of these evident crashes.

As a way of developing the theme, Haggis strategically uses characters that fit themselves into the shoes of racists. Virtually, all the film characters portray crashes build on their racial differences. As a result, they end up jumping into conclusions based on race where they gain insights, not only about themselves, but also about the race itself.

Analysis Clashes stand out in the 36-hour encounter of the movie’s various characters like Ria. As the movie begins, the results of car crash involving Ria, Kim Lee, and Waters are no more than clashes. Ria and Lee abuse each other depicting their differing racial backgrounds. Lee referring to Ria says, “Why? Not my fault! It’s her fault! She does this…Stop in the middle of street! Mexicans! No know how to drive” (Crash).

These two portray their differing places of origins and each is in support of hers. Following the accident, none admits to be the cause. They end up arguing of the cause even after the motorcycle cop intervenes. Ria, a race-driven character attempts to fight Lee back since she (Lee) is a Mexican unlike her. Ria says, “I’ll give you a lesson…My father’s from Puerto Rico. My mother’s from El Salvador. Neither one of those is Mexico” (Crash).

This collision is a package, sufficient to pass Ria for a racist. However, following the crash with Graham as a result of the phone call, Ria’s reactions shows that, though people may be different, racial collisions can be avoided, only if people treat each other as brothers and sisters. She tells Graham, “That’s just where I begin to get pissed. I mean, really, what kind of man speaks to his mother that way, huh?” (Crash) This follows from racial trait that Graham portrays when he refers to her a white woman.

As she describes the composition of her family, she pictures the diversity of her parents but despite it, they are at peace with no racial crashes. In fact, she tells Graham that, could she be her father, she would punish him. In other words, racism is an offence and ought to be sternly punishable. Graham is a racist who seems to have learned a lot about racism through his collisions with people around him.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Though racism forms a good portion of peoples’ lives like Graham, they can in turn fight it based on the lessons they learn from the crashes attached therein. Graham is a racist. He knows what it means by racial collisions. He has experienced crashes with quite a number of people.

His racist nature stands in his crash with Ria as discussed above. For instance, as he is with Ria, he receives a call and through his response, racism is evident. He says, “…I’m having sex with a white woman” (Crash). According to Bell, there are some other instances where the racist characters, after learning the consequences of racism, try to cover them as much as possible (23). Graham is not an exception.

Though his racist nature is evident, his collision with Flanagan depicts him as an anti-racist, a situation that, based on insinuations, arises after he learns that racism is bad. For instance, Flanagan in an abusive exchange declares, “…black people, huh…more black men are incarcerated than white men” (Crash).

These abusive race-rich words are directed to Graham. Does Graham reflect racism in his response? Not at all! Graham is a changed man viewing racism from another angle. He replies, “What did you just say… all I need to do to make this disappear is to frame a potentially innocent man” (Crash). The ‘disappearance’ referred to by Graham is that of racism. He believes that racism can be arrested if people change their mind sets about others.

Therefore, according to Graham, racism is a real practice carried out by people like him, but based on his personal experience, that is, the experience of racial crashes, racism can be arrested if people like him, purpose to stop it. Rick is another victim of racism as the following paragraph elaborates.

Rick, a racist, as the story unfolds, has a story to tell concerning the subject of racism. He has encountered collisions, founded on race, with people like Karen and Jean, to mention but a few. For instance, as he collides with Karen, his racist character stands out. Their interaction, as Robert says, “…ended into quarrel and they disgusted each others ‘ race” (12).

In their crash, Rick says, “Fuck! Why do these guys have to be black?” (Crash). In this scenario, Rick pictures his racist nature. However, his view of racism changes as he converses with Jean. It is deducible that he has come to realize that all people, whether black or white, are all the same and for them to unite, they need to fight back the enemy that has caused that falling apart of things; racism. He assumes the front line in the campaign against this.

We will write a custom Essay on Racism in the “Crash” specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More For instance, when Jean is angered by James on the issue of locks, Rick enters to calm the crash. He says, “Shhh It’s ok. Just go to bed, all right…You lower you voice!” (Crash).These words are heavy laden with symbolism. The lowering of voice is no more than Rick’s efforts to minimize the issue or racism. According to him, racism is bad as it is the root cause of all the crashes he, among others, has gone through.

In conclusion, Haggis’ masterwork successfully pictures the subject of racism, as it stands on the ground. He employs characters, who strategically fit themselves into the shoes of racists. He symbolically gathers people who differ in all senses, origin, color, race, among others. Among them are Ria, Graham, and Rick.

All these stand as racists, who crash with one another as a result. However, they later come to learn that, with racism in their minds, crashes will never end. Through their personal experience, they begin a campaign against racism and this is evident through their reactions as they encounter race-driven people.

As the movie closes, all these characters viz. Rick, Ria and Graham, have not only gained insight about themselves, but also about race. They realize the difference between a black and a white person is only skin deep; beyond that, all people are the same. Haggis successfully drives home his lesson through these characters. According to them, and through their experience, they have learned that racism is a fuel, rather than a solution of crashes.

Works Cited Bell, Rahel. Racism in the Crash Movie. New York: Mavin Publishers, 2008. Print.

Crash. Dir. Paul Haggis. 20th Century Lion Gate Film Productions, 2005. Film.

Robert, Keith. Race: The Crash Movie. Mabros: HINN Publications, 2006.


Patriot Act Importance for the American Citizens Research Paper scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Because of the tragic events of 2001, and the consequences of the terrorist act, together with the overall concern about the security situation in the world, the USA government, headed by George B7ush, came to the conclusion that the law that enables the security services act as fast as possible is needed.

Accordingly, in 2001 the so-called PATRIOT Act of 2001 was created in order to prevent the tragic events from happening on the territory of the United States. Since the act clarifies the issues of the modern security system of the government and several points on the foreign and home politics, it would be a good idea to trace its creation, consider its points and see the results of the act applied to the real political system.

Coming into legal force on October, 26 2001, the act that was read as Uniting and Strengthening America by Providing Appropriate Tools Required to Intercept and Obstruct Terrorism Act of 2001 was supposed to make the active security system more efficient.

To be more precise, the new act enacted to help track down and punish terrorists and to prevent further terrorism, contains no provisions specially directed at libraries or their patrons.” (Ewing 8). Thus, it can be concluded that the act is supposed to make the system of tracking the terrorists and preventing their actions in a more efficient and productive way.

Historically, the PARTIOT Act has been derived from the act of the same meaning and influence that preceded the PATRIOT Act. Called FISA, or the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act, it was aimed at protecting the country from the possible invasions that the opponents could undertake, and covered the points that allowed the security system to act according to the circumstances, enabled with the power to protect the citizen with every single method possible. Abele explained it in the following way:

It prescribes procedures for requesting judicial authorization for electronic surveillance and physical searches of persons engaged in espionage or international terrorism against the U.S. on behalf of a foreign power. (Abele 19)

In other words, the GISA act was aimed at maximizing the protection for the citizen of the U.S. and making the system of the international security work its best. In fact, these were the prerequisites of the PATRIOT Act emerging. In spite of the fact that the Act was aimed at the most decent aim and was supposed t be greeted with open arms, there was some chill in the society, both political and civil, as the act came into force.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More However, to understand the reasons that underlay the creation of the PATRIOT Act, a deep retrospective into the history is required. The reasons that made the government make the decision to come back to the basics of the security system introduced in 1996 antiterrorism legislation were quite sufficient and well-thought. It must be admitted that these reasons were inspired by the idea of the overall security of the United States.

In order to understand the reasons for the Patriot Act, information concerning the months, weeks and days leading up to 9/11 is required. One primary reason for the Act was the belief that the traditional way of conducting business had failed; thus, the need for the Patriot act. (Smith 3)

Actually, there was a great deal of critics that made people think that the act was of no profit or use to the USA and that it practically was targeting at the democracy that the people of the United States were appreciating so much . This was the challenge that led to the accusation of not following the Constitution, which was close to passing a death penalty to the act. However, the creators of the act did not keep silence and presented well-thought arguments as well.

As it was the case after the passage of the 1996 antiterrorism legislation, immediately after passage of the 2001 Patriot Act hundreds of pressure groups condemned the law because of its capacity to diminish civil liberties protection in the name of the national security against terrorism. (Ball 70)

The idea that the opponents presumed was that, enabling the security systems to act according to their own plans in the name of defeating terrorism, the government was violating people’s rights, for the ways that the new law could be read were more than numerous. The suggestions of how far the security systems might go to provide total safety were rather gloomy and making people think of the stability of their rights and privileges.

The new law was found rather difficult to put into practice even with the parliament of the United States. Even the bodies of Congress suspected that the act will not be greeted by the citizen willingly. Actually, they had the reasons to worry.

Although the president’s influence is evident in both congressional bills, members of the House and the Senate fought hard to strike a balance between increasing the power of intelligence and law enforcement personnel and eroding civil liberties including the right to privacy granted to all American citizens. (Scheppler 27)

We will write a custom Research Paper on Patriot Act Importance for the American Citizens specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Indeed, taking into account that the new law presupposed that the intelligence had the rights of wiretapping and getting involved into people’s personal life, this was close to challenging the principles of the USA democracy. However good and efficient the new system of protection could be the violation of the nation’s constitutional rights was fraught with undesirable consequences, up to rebellion. Of course, the government could not allow itself to go that far.

The things that stirred such great debates in the society were the methods that FBI was allowed to apply to trace and prevent the terrorist acts before they took people’s lives. These could be many, but the most well-known are wiretapping and pen registers. As the most obvious violation of human’s rights, these methods were criticized by the population severely.

Section 216 of the Patriot Act amended the existing pen register and trap and trace laws to include e-mail messages. The Patriot Act allows intelligence agents to capture outgoing and incoming e-mail addresses, without intercepting e-mail content or subject line text. (Scheppler 32)

This triggered numerous protests that were held in 2001 for the act to be disabled so that people could feel safe about the freedoms that they had. “Given the past record in American history, these critics were not sanguine about the future of the civil liberties in the new age of asymmetrical warfare against terrorism” (Ball 70).

Indeed, the American citizens had the reason to worry, taking into consideration all the sufferings that the USA was to go through to achieve the democracy that they had. The new law did give the personal safety that was needed badly in the age when terrorists were so successful in their cruel act, but there still was the need for the democratic approach, which the new law seemed to ignore.

However, the ample heaps of critics that have been poured on the new project overlooked a very important subject, which was the importance of the national security system reinforcement. With all its drawbacks and the points that blowed the basis of the American democracy, it still provided a sufficient protection from the invaders.

This was the reason that had to be taken into account, for people needed security and protection badly. The terrorist acts might occur once again, and even more people could suffer. While there was something that could be done about the dangerous situation, all possible measures were to be undertaken.

Still it must be admitted that there were the positive feedbacks from the population, since it was understood that it was the matter of life and death for the U.S., the terrorist acts able to occur every single moment. The restrictions were needed to be applied to the acting system of security, which was well understood and was considered the prior goal of the governmental bodies.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Patriot Act Importance for the American Citizens by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More As time passed, the date of expiry of some of the positions in the Act was approaching. The date when these positions were disabled from the further influence was December 31, 2005. By that time, the security system should have improved and detected the probable danger of terrorism. According to the results that have been presented by that time, there were major achievements that have to be spoken about.

After all, the danger of the terrorist acts was solely vanishing, and people could finally feel safer in their own homeland. Although, like any other countries, U.S. cannot guarantee a complete safety, but the danger of the terrorist acts was practically nullified. The results spoke for themselves, claiming the new law to be effective.

Finally, the PATRIOT Act has gained the support among the American citizens and has proved its being a worthy method of solving the problems of the foreign policy that are connected with terrorism. It has been a valuable experience for the American people, and the safety that it provides guarantees that the USA will not suffer from the terrorism acts anymore.

Works Cited Abele, Robert. P. A User’s Guide to the USA Patriot Act and beyond. New York, NY: University Press of America, 2005. Print.

Ball, Howard. USA Patriot Act of 2001. Santa-Barbara, CA: ABC-CLIO, 2004. Print.

Ewing, Alphonse B., and Charles Doyle. The USA Patriot Act Reader. Hauppauge, NY: Nova Publishers, 2005. Print.

Scheppler, Bill. The USA Patriot Act: Antiterror Legislation in Response to 9/11. New York, NY: Rosen Publishing Group, 2005. Print.

Smith, Cary S., and Li-Ching Hung. The PATRIOT Act: Issues and Controversies. Springfield, IL: Charles C Thomas Publisher, 2010. Print.


Customer Satisfaction and Quality Management Research Paper college admission essay help

Article Summary Customer satisfaction has become one of important factors to success of a business in contemporary highly competitive business environment. Modern customers expect and demand for product and services that respond to their needs. To satisfy and therefore attract and retain customers, contemporary businesses make various initiatives. In the article “Evaluating Customer Satisfaction as an Aspect of Quality Management”, Krivobokova (2009) discusses how quality management can be used to achieve customer satisfaction.

At the minimum, customers expect quality products and services that meet their both physical and psychological needs. According to Krivobokova (2009), understanding and responding to varying customer needs can be challenging and costly. Providing quality products and services, according to Krivobokova, is one of the effective ways to achieve customer satisfaction.

Every business has one primary objective for existence and that is making profit. For a business to make profit, it is imperative for it to have sufficient customers for its products and services. Having customers, however, is not enough; a business should retain its customer and attract new customers to realize sustainable profitability.

Retaining customers and attracting new customers however is a major challenge to many businesses. According to Krivobokova (2009), having systems to assess customer satisfaction is not enough. In addition to assessing customer satisfaction to products and services, a business should be able to integrate the outcome in all areas of a business.

Although developing new products can be one of the strategies to realize customer needs, the approach can be very costly and fail to be lead to profitability. According to Krivobokova (2009), improving the quality of existence products and services progressively is the feasible way to satisfy customers as well as remaining profitable.

“Customer satisfaction affects the efficiency of the company’s operation as a whole” (Krivobokova 566). In essence, every aspect of a business; from sales, finance to operations is affected by customer satisfaction.

Krivobokova (2009), in fact, asserts that every individual in a business should consider himself as a sales person to products and services of the company. Accordingly, each individual in business should make the appropriate actions that can improve customer experience. To achieve the goal, however, appropriate methods for evaluating customer satisfaction should be prevalent.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More According to Krivobokova (2009), effective evaluation of customer satisfaction is depended on ability of employees of an organization to use information from market research to help their organization gain competitive advantage, and value of devices used to capture customer related information. For an organization to achieve customer satisfaction through quality products and services, market researchers should play an integral part in business decision instead of just being information providers (Krivobokova 566).

Matching effort for customer satisfaction and quality of a product or service has many benefits to an organization. In a sense, customers expect quality of a product or service to improve with time. However, when improving existent products and services organization should ensure that the improvement leads to improved customer satisfaction as well as ensure that profitability of an organization is retained or improved.

According to Krivobokova (2009), an organization should consider that contemporary consumer are much informed and can obtain similar products or services from many competitors. Accordingly, providing quality products not only helps a organization to satisfy and retain customers but also avoid negative publicity that can result from providing products and services that do not satisfy customers.

Analysis Today businesses are becoming more customers oriented. Success of a business in the current business environment is highly depended on ability of a business to satisfy its customer. Customer satisfaction however is somehow complex and depends on many factors. An initiative to improve customer satisfaction can be counterproductive especially where customer needs are not captured. Among other factors that customers expect in a product or service, is quality.

Quality, in a sense, is relative since it is dependent on quality of other similar products and services. However, providing quality products and services is taken as one of the strategies to competitive advantage. Krivobokova (2009) therefore addresses a very relevant issue in business today. The author demonstrates in-depth understanding on issues on customer satisfaction in contemporary business environment.

Quality and reliability of an article is highly depended on competence of the scholars that contribute to the paper. Proceedings of World Academy of Science, Engineering and Technology, the journal that publishes the article, only accepts articles from distinguished scholars. For one to qualify to publish with the journal, one must have minimum qualification of a PHD. Krivobokova is therefore a renowned scholar in his field. Besides the article, the author has other academic articles.

Organizations use various approaches to enhance customer satisfaction, including developing new product that match customer needs. In a way, the article tries to demonstrate the value of improving quality of existing products instead of developing new products as potential approach to customer satisfaction. The author shows not only the value of improving quality in customer satisfaction but also explain how the objective can be realized. The article assumes that customer satisfaction is desired and is a common objective for many businesses.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Customer Satisfaction and Quality Management specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Krivobokova, Olga. Evaluating Customer Satisfaction as an Aspect of Quality Management. Proceedings of World Academy of Science, Engineering and Technology 41 (2009): 565-568


Effect of Customer Participation on Customer Satisfaction Research Paper best college essay help: best college essay help

Summary In their article titled “The Interplay between Customer Participation and Difficulty of Design Examples in the Online Designing Process and Its Effect on Customer Satisfaction: Mediational Analyses”, Chang, Chen and Huang (2009) address the effect of involving customers in design process on customer satisfaction.

The authors note that there has been a trend towards customized products. They argue that today customers want to be involved in design of their products so that they can include specific features that they desire. Some key companies such as Dell and Adidas invite customer to participate in design of their product by prescribing specific features that they wish to be included (Chang, Chen and Huang 147).

According to the author, involving customers in design process can not only increase their satisfaction but also motivate them to pay more for a product. In addition to satisfaction, the authors suggest that involving customers in designing a product increases their self-congruity.

Although customer involvement generally increases satisfaction and self-congruity, the effect is subject to perceived complexity of design. Complex design, they note, can discourage customers that lack technical knowledge to understand the designs. In their study, Chang, Chen and Huang (2009) focus on effect of customer involvement when using “online interactive design tools” (Chang, Chen and Huang 147).

In the study, the authors intended to investigate whether customer satisfaction was enhanced by involving customers using online interactive design tools, whether level of complexity had effect on customer satisfaction, effect of customer involvement on their self-congruity and whether self-congruity varied with level of complexity of a design.

To accomplish the objects of their study, Chang, Chen and Huang adopted an experimental design than involved 180 participants. The level of satisfaction of the participants, between 18 and 25 year, was to be assessed. The experimental design took into consideration of participation and level of complexity of design. Two designs (a simple and complex design) of T-shirts were used for the experiment. The participants were divided into experimental and control groups.

The experimental group was asked to participate in design of the two designs of T-shirts while the control group was presented with complete designs. Using ANCOVA test to analyze outcome, the experiment showed that customer participation had significant effect on satisfaction and self congruity (Chang, Chen and Huang 150). In addition, difficulty of a design was also found to have significant effect on customer satisfaction.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Chang, Chen and Huang experiment confirmed the importance of customer involvement on satisfaction. When customers are involved in the process of designing their products, their sense of ownership to a product increases and so is their satisfaction. However, the authors warn against presenting customers with complex designs as this can lower their satisfaction.

Customers without technical capability to understand difficult design may feel frustrated or confused when presented with difficult designs (Chang, Chen and Huang 149). Although the study involved specific product, T-shirts, the outcome is relevant to other products. The outcome of the study strongly supports the idea that involving customers in design can boost their satisfaction.

Analysis Ability to achieve customer satisfaction is very important in the current highly competitive business environment. To gain competitive advantage, organizations today do everything possible to ensure that their products or services satisfy their customers. Customer participation is therefore one of the techniques that organization employ to achieve customer satisfaction.

The authors therefore address a very relevant issue in business today. The authors assume that by ensuring high customer satisfaction, an organization can be able to do well in its area of business and gain competitive advantage. Considering the current trend of customized products, giving customers opportunity to be involved in design of their desired products can highly determine their satisfaction.

The internet has evolved to be a major platform to interact with customers. Internet interactive tools therefore provide opportunity to involve customers in design of their products. When involving customer in product design using online interactive tools, it can be difficult to evaluate the effect of such participation because of impersonal nature of online tools. The outcome of the study therefore has great implication to organizations that use the internet to interact with customers.

Reliability of a research study is highly depended on the individuals that carry out the study. Chang, Chen and Huang are scholars in department of management at the National Chiao Tung University. The University is among the top higher learning institutions in Republic of china and world over. In addition, the authors adopt a strong experimental design to address their research objectives. Consequently, the outcome of the study can be relied.

Chang, Chen and Huang conclude in their study that allowing customers to participate in product design using online interactive tools can improve their satisfaction. They argue that allowing customer participation can increase their self-congruency and ownership.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Effect of Customer Participation on Customer Satisfaction specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Using online platform, customers can have easy access to many organizations that can provide them with product or services that they desire. An organization that provides better customer experience therefore has competitive advantage. Borrowing from the study, an organization that allows customers to participate in product design is more likely to achieve high customer satisfaction.

Works Cited Chang, Chia-Chi, Hui-Yun Chen and I-Chiang Huang. The Interplay between Customer Participation and Difficulty of Design Examples in the Online Designing Process and Its Effect on Customer Satisfaction: Mediational Analyses. CyberPsychological


The Effect of Customer Value, Customer Satisfaction and Switching Costs On Customer Loyalty: An Empirical Study Of Hypermarkets In Taiwan Research Paper best college essay help

Summary This is a summary of the article “The Effect of Customer Value, Customer Satisfaction, and Switching Costs on Customer Loyalty: An Empirical Study of Hypermarkets in Taiwan, by the authors Tsai, Ming-Tien; Tsai, Chung-Lin; Chang, and Han-Chao”. The study was conducted in Taiwan focusing on hypermarkets in retail industry sector, due to their increasing importance in the country. This paper is going to address these three aspects and their interrelationships.

The retail industry in Taiwan is very competitive and as a result, the hypermarkets offer low prices to their products than the micro- retailers and convenience stores in order to attract more customers.

Even though, the hypermarkets are incurring losses due to saturation of markets, thus a lot of effort is directed towards cutting on costs, retaining consumers, and widening profit margins. Tsai, Tsai, and Chang are of the opinion that satisfaction on a customer is key to success of any business. A consumer is always reflecting on goods and services that maximize on value (Tsai, Tsai and Chang 730).

According to Tsai, Tsai and Chang, a customer’s satisfaction is more likely to be increased if the value of goods and services satisfy his/her expectations, thus leading to increased consumption. Thus, an entrepreneur should look out at customer’s value from a customer’s perspective to lessen the disparity between these two perceptions.

Consumer satisfaction is a dissimilar function between discernment and expectation, and it is instinctively affirmative or negative feeling. In order to develop suitable responses, studies and researches should focus efforts on accurate measurement of the level of consumer satisfaction (Tsai, Tsai and Chang 731).

Customer loyalty on the other hand refers to the likelihood of his/her continued future consumption, service contracts, less possibility of changing a brand and affirmative recommendation to the public. Two types of consumer loyalty are identified namely; long- term consumer loyalty, which is considered a genuine loyalty and short- term loyalty, which describes the likelihood of a consumer to change business operators.

This describes the level of competitiveness in a liberal market economy. The fact that a loyal customer is likely to bring more customers to a business makes entrepreneurs consider loyalty a major boost. Customer loyalty could be measured in terms of recurrent intention to purchase and tolerance in price variations (Tsai, Tsai and Chang 732).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Switching cost theory generally is described as sacrifices or consequence penalties consumers sense they may sustain by changing entrepreneurs. It is considered as the substantial cost sustained as a result of switching service provider. Three main variable varieties describe switching cost theory.

They include: 1) Switching costs that are inclined to time (2) switching costs that are financial in nature and related to profit; and (3) switching costs that define an emotional relationship. Both a consumer and an entrepreneur are vital subjects in determining switching cost.

Higher costs of consumer switching are have a probability of highlighting the relationship between satisfaction of a consumer and loyalty of the consumer. This connection characterizes an investment of vital aspects by a consumer linked to resources, efforts, and time involved and presents a hindrance to a dissatisfied customer who wishes to switch suppliers (Tsai, Tsai and Chang 733).

This study sought to establish whether an affirmative view of the value of a consumer value would have a positive impact on satisfaction of a customer, and whether switching costs as the moderating variable would have an impact on the value of consumer relating it to the his/her loyalty(Tsai, Tsai and Chang 734).

The inter-relating effects between variables (consumer satisfaction, customer values, customer loyalty and switching costs) were investigated using regression analysis to authenticate the assumptions based on cause and effect correlation(Tsai, Tsai and Chang 736).

The results obtained established that the value of a customer has a considerable affirmative impact on the loyalty of a customer. Conspicuously, service value was noted to have a greater impact on customer loyalty.

Tsai, Tsai, and Chang are of the opinion that a consumer will continually approximate the optimum value of goods or services. Increasing the performance and the quality of services will not only satisfy the demand of a customer but will also appease the consumers and encourage a habitual intention to purchase and continued anticipated consumption.

We will write a custom Research Paper on The Effect of Customer Value, Customer Satisfaction and Switching Costs On Customer Loyalty: An Empirical Study Of Hypermarkets In Taiwan specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In addition, the study established that opportune and appropriate services, quality, and value of products provided by entrepreneurs enhance satisfaction of a customer and encourage short- term customers into long-term associations. The study also ascertained that satisfaction of a customer has considerable positive impact on the loyalty of a customer (Tsai, Tsai and Chang 737).

Critical Analysis Tsai, Ming-Tien, Tsai, Chung-Lin, Chang, Han-Chao. “The Effect Of Customer Value, Customer Satisfaction, And Switching Costs On Customer Loyalty: An Empirical Study Of Hypermarkets In Taiwan.” Social Behavior And Personality, 2010, 38(6): 729-740.

Ming-Tien Tsai is a PhD, Professor, Department of Business Administration, National Cheng Kung University, Tainan, Taiwan. Chung-Lin Tsai on the other hand is a PhD Candidate, Department of Business Administration, National Cheng Kung University and staff member, Department of Finance while Han-Chao Chan is PhD, Instrument Technology Research Center, National Applied Research Laboratories, Taiwan.

In their paper, Tsai et. al. review the aspects of customer value, customer satisfaction and customer loyalty and how they interact with each other for the better of the company. The market under study is the Taiwan market. They note that the Taiwanese retail market has become very competitive and the hypermarkets therefore have resorted to employing different strategies for the purposes of customer attraction and retention (p. 730).

The hypotheses of relationships between customer value and loyalty, customer satisfaction and loyalty, customer value and satisfaction and switching costs and Customer satisfaction and loyalty was used in evaluating the Taiwanese market (p. 732-734).

In their analysis of these parameters of the Taiwanese market, they use regression analysis to assess the impact of customer satisfaction. Loyalty and value, and they conclude that since the competition in the market is increasing and the other methods of tackling it are proving costly. Due to the increased competition in the market and with customers looking for the best whenever they go shopping, the supplier with additional services to the existing low prices will be most preferred.

For this reason, the hypermarkets have to look for ways that would be appealing to the customers and consumers, so that they may return more often. The only way would be by establishing customer loyalty where the hypermarkets would be guaranteed of a market for their products. They also note that switching costs play a significant role in the determination of customer base and purchasing power (p. 738).

An analysis of the market will be a very good move for the hypermarkets that may want to establish good relationships with the customer. Competition will lead to the prices going down and thus different strategies have to be developed to ensure competitive market advantage. One of the ways in which they could carry this out is by countering their competition in terms of prices and after-sales services.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Effect of Customer Value, Customer Satisfaction and Switching Costs On Customer Loyalty: An Empirical Study Of Hypermarkets In Taiwan by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The additional services that they provide will attract the customers and this will definitely spread to a large population of the consumers via word of mouth. In this case, it is very evident that customers are not only interested in the prices of the goods and services that they pay for, but also in the type and quality that they receive.

Their satisfaction with what they receive will determine their loyalty, and if they do not get value for their, they are bound to move to a different place in search of better offers! Therefore, the hypermarkets ought to maintain customer satisfaction gauges in order to correct the areas that are a letdown to them.

Hence, these companies have to set up quality assessment modules that will enable them to gauge their rating as a company and where they stand in terms of market-competition and customer loyalty.

Work Cited Tsai, Ming-Tien, Tsai, Chung-Lin and Chang, Han-Chao. “The effect of customer value, customer satisfaction and switching costs on customer loyalty: an empirical study of hypermarkets in Taiwan.” Social Behavior and Personality, 38.1(2010):729-738.


Physical Child Abuse Research Paper college essay help near me

Abstract Pressure on matters concerning child negligence and abuse causes great changes on subject pertaining childcare. Globally, there is great legal protection for unsympathetic cruelty by caregivers such as lack of proper provision of basic needs. Today, administrative support against child abuse and negligence is highly supported.

On the other hand, the issue continues to be of great controversy especially the obvious link towards outcome during adulthood. The problems associated with child abuse concerns its continual illegal and silent practice in addition to the effects caused on or by victims especially much later in their subsistence.

Introduction Child abuse refers to behaviour originating from exerted force thus causing an imbalance of power. Good examples of the disparity include the adult-child relationships, older and younger siblings’ interactions and the adolescent to child involvement (Crosson, 2007). Abuse causes unwilling participation in various activities unwillingly such as sexually related behaviours. Usually the child is unaware of the abuse due to the naïve state of mind or innocence. In most instances, the child is not in a position to understand the state of affairs.

This paper is an analysis of the effect of physical child abuse on an adult victim as well as its implication to future societal growth. The research also presents an analysis of dominant arguments and theories for the act at certain circumstances in relation to lifestyle.

Types of Abuse According to Dube et al., (2001) “Child abuse and neglect consists of any act of commission or omission that results in harm, is potential for harm, or a threat of harm to a child, even if harm was unintentional.” There are various types of child abuse classified under emotional, physical, sexual and child neglect.

In line with Dube et al (2001), abused children generally suffer from lack of care, love and safety. Physical abuse such as beating mainly causes body harm and often leads to emotional or psychological effects such as low self esteem or introversion (Dube et al, 2001).

Physical child abuse Physical abuse involves actions that cause bodily injuries on the child. These external injuries are either intentional or unintentional but with an aim of taming certain behaviour or discipline the child through physical attacks or punishments.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Types of physical abuse

The most common type of physical abuse experienced by victims is corporal punishment, slapping and pinching. Physically abusive guardians justify their actions by insisting on the need to teach and emphasize discipline. They call for attention to parenting by the “spare the rod, spoil the child’ rule, but end up physically abusing instead of correcting behaviours. The main aim of disciplining is to teach the right from wrong and not instil fear and other severe emotional effects through dictatorship.

One of the major elements evident in physically abused children especially as adults is unpredictability. According to Bromfield (2010), unlike the physical form of disciplining, the child is not aware of what is inappropriate according to parental guidance. Such victims live in anxiety over possibility of committing a wrong act.

They are worried of engaging in a behaviour that may trigger an offence. Secondly, abuse causes a child to agonize in anger. The intensity of abuse depends on the parent’s anger. Lastly, the abuser focuses on the need to instil behaviours through fear. The severe punishments in the aim of instilling discipline are thus physical abuse. As a result, the child learns ways of avoiding the parental abuse other than acquire good behaviours and mature as a disciplined individual through understanding.

Signs of Physical Abuse

There are some obvious physical signs of childhood molestation or abuse such as walking, sitting and playing difficulties due to incurred injuries. In severe cases, these injuries may cause disabilities. The abused victim gives the impression of strain during such common activities. Constant pains and physical irritation are also common long-term physical effects. Different bruises and scars marks on the victim’s body depending on the types of subjected abuse.

Effects of Physical Abuse

Adult victims of child abuse more prone to chronic pain and other physical health-related illness compared to the general population. Abused adult survivors of have chronic medical problems such as blood pressure, liver and heart related illnesses.

In line with research carried out by Miller and Perrin (2007), abuse and neglect has major impact on the immune system thus causing higher propensity of engaging risky behaviours, during later life spans such as drugs abuse or unprotected sexual engagements. Chronic pain disorders are also present in adulthood.

Physical abuse causes violent or criminal responses. The mistreatment and neglect makes a child to form cohesive dissociate from the family and high possibility of engaging physical abuse latter in life. “Children learn various activities and they might interpret physical abuse or domestic violence as appropriate methods of resolving conflicts and responding to stressful situations (Miller and Perrin, 2007).”

We will write a custom Research Paper on Physical Child Abuse specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This causes them to acquire and involve in criminal activities during their adulthood. In other extreme instances, abuse causes disabilities.

Abuse Intervention

There are various measures of intervening to prevent maltreatment and neglect such as social support therapies or counselling sessions for those suffering from neurologically or psychologically. These cares are more efficient methods of promoting resilience especially when early abuse cases detection and mediation occurs.

Conclusion Most behaviour-related problems are associable with victims of child. There are various future behavioural consequences associable with abuse such as delinquency, poor academic achievements, early pregnancy, ‘don’t-care’ attitudes, drug abuse, mental related health disorders and childhood mortality.

Physical abuse also lowers the social-economic status and thus high chances of neglect or abuse due to frustrations. There are very high possibilities that abusive parent were victims of childhood neglect or abuse. Those who face abuse or neglect during childhood are likely to eventually victimize others or subject their own children to similar circumstances. This is like a system life cycle among victims.

References Bromfield L. (February, 2010). Cumulative harm: the effects of chronic child

maltreatment. Presentation to the Tasmanian Magistrates Conference, Hobart. Print.

Crosson, C. (2007). Understanding Child Abuse and Neglect. (7th Edition). Allyn


Meditation and Its Educational Merits Research Paper essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Cognitive and Academic Performance

Mental Health

Human Development


Works Cited

Introduction Meditation is a set of religious practices, which involve the process of inducing psychological consciousness for the mind to be more conscious about the reality and become in touch with the spiritual world. Many religions in the world practice meditation as a way of praying but the styles of meditation differ from one religion to another.

Meditation is a common religious practice in many religions such as Buddhism, Christianity, Baha’i Faith, Hinduism, Islam, Judaism, and New Age Movement among others. Buddhists believe that meditation gives wisdom, while Christians believe that meditation is a form of prayer, which gives revelation of God and His will. Baha’i Faith fundamentally teaches that meditation is the spiritual key, which opens spiritual mysteries for the mind to comprehend.

Other religions and traditions believe that meditation have psychological, physiological or spiritual benefits. The diversity of believes surrounding meditation and its benefits have led to its application in non-religious systems of the world. This essay explores psychological and personality importance of meditation in an educational system.

Cognitive and Academic Performance Since meditation is a psychological process that enhances the conscious state of the mind, it has substantial benefits on the cognitive and academic performance of students.

Due to immense flow of information in the world and tendency of the students to multitask, their minds lose specific attention on important issues thus affecting their performance. The divided attention of a student’s mind has detrimental effects on his/her academic performance even though ability to multitask is a virtue that is encouraged in learning institutions.

According to Shapiro, Brown, and Astin, “…meditative practices enhance specific aspects or subsystems of attention in educational settings where attentional skills are central to successful learning” (10).

Concentrative meditation enhances ability to resist numerous environmental distractions when one is doing a given task, while mindfulness meditation enhances the ability to maintain attention during multitasking. Therefore, the practice of meditation improves the attentive ability of the students, hence their academic performance.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Ability to process information depends on cognitive capacity to receive an informational stimulus, process and store information in a meaningful manner. Research findings indicate that, students who have undergo meditative training prior to attentional blink test are able to detect two consecutive stimuli while those who have meditative experience are able to detect the first stimulus only (Shapiro, Brown


Johann Sebastian Bach Descriptive Essay writing essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Personal information

Musical carrier

Works Cited

Introduction Johann Sebastian Bach is regarded as one of the most important organist and composer of the Baroque period (Boyd 3). He was a German composer, organist, harpsichordist, violist, and violinist who works formed a major part of the baroque” music (Eidam 2, par. 4). This paper seeks to describe Johann Sebastian Bach’s personal life and contribution to music.

Personal information Johann Sebastian Bach “was born on March 21, 1685, in Eisenach, Germany” (Boyd 1, par. 1). He was the last born in the family of Johann Ambrosius Bach, a church organist, and Elizabeth Lammerhirt Bach (Boyd 1). He was born in a devoutly Lutheran musical family that had a musical tradition going back for as many as seven generations. Bach received his initial musical training from his father who taught him how to play the violin.

His good voice won him a chance to sing in the church choir. Bach’s father and mother passed away two moths apart in 1694. He was barely ten years old and thus he went to stay with his brother, Johann Christoph, who was an organist at St. Michael’s Church in Ohrdruf, Germany (Boyd 10). It was Christoph who first taught him how to play keyboard instruments.

In 1700, Bach was offered a chance to study at St. Michael’s School in Luneburg school because of his good voice (Eidam 25). He “would later be transferred to the orchestra to play the violin after a change in his voice” (Boyd 12, par. 3). During this “time he often travelled to Hamburg, Germany to hear other musicians” (Boyd Boyd 13, par. 1).

Late in 1707 Bach married his cousin, Maria Barbara Bach (Boyd 30). Maria died after 13 years of marriage and with seven surviving children. Later in 1721 Bach got married to Anna Magdalena Wulken who was a twenty year old singer at the time. She had to take over the role of a wife and a mother to his seven children (Eidam 54). In addition, during the next twenty years she presented Bach with thirteen more children (Boyd 67).

Bach “gradually lost his eyesight in his final years and was totally blind in the last year of his life”. He died on July 28, in 1750 following a stroke and high fever (Boyd 120, par. 1).

Musical carrier Bach was introduced to music by his father who taught him how to play the violin from an early age. He began singing in the church at an early age because of his beautiful voice. After the death of his parents in 1694 Bach went to stay with his brother Johann Christoph who taught him how to play keyboard instruments. He later joined St. Michael’s school to where he first began to compose preludes.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In 1703 Bach was hired as an organist in a church in Arnstad, Germany and these gave him a chance to further practice and thus develop his talent (Eidam 33). In 1705 he was given a leave for one month to visit a church in Lubeck, Germany, to hear how Master Dieterich Buxtehude played the organ. Bach extended his visit by four months without informing the church he worked for in Arnstad. When he came back to Arnstad he began to compose long preludes and modifying hymns in a way that confused the church congregation.

In 1707 Bach transferred to a church in Muhlhausen, Germany (Boyd 60). His new “well ordered music” such as “God is my king” impressed people there but it conflicted with his pastor’s requirement that music should remain simple (Boyd 61, par. 5). Thus he left for Weimer in 1708 where he got a job as an organist to Duke Wilhelm Ernest (Eidam 45).

During the period 1708 to 1710 Bach produced original organ music that earned him fame. Bach transferred to Cothen in 1716 at the request of Prince Leopold where he was assigned the duty to conduct the court orchestra (Eidam 47). His best instrumental and orchestral works were produced during his stay in Cothen.

During this time Bach also produced keyboard music that he used to teach his children. After the marriage of the prince there was less work for Bach and therefore he transferred to “Leipzig, Germany where he was named the cantor to replace the deceased Johann Kuhnau” (Boyd 80, par. 3). In Leizperg Bach provided different services other than his traditional organ playing that he was revered for. Among other functions he taught music classes, gave private singing lessons and taught Latin (Boyd 80).

During the Baroque period, Bach was regarded as being at the extreme end of the spectrum (Eidam 96). His music was characterized with detailed melodic lines more cumulative contrapuntal textures and this made it stand out as compared to music by others such as Handel.

Bach’s reputation declined after his death as his music was slowly being gradually considered as old fashioned (Eidam 102). However, a renewed interest in his works was prompted by Felix Mendelssohn’s Berlin performance in 1829 (Eidam 102).

Works Cited Boyd, Malcolm. johann Sebastian Bach. New York: Oxford University Press, 1999. Print.

We will write a custom Essay on Johann Sebastian Bach specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Eidam, Klaus. The True Life of Johann Sebastian Bach. New York: Basic Books, 2001. Print.


Camus’ Notions in The Plague, The Myth of Sisyphus and The Stranger Analytical Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Introduction General idea

The English proverb suggests the idea that the number of people on the earth equals the number of minds. However, it is possible to argue this statement because people change their mind during their life or every minute though a strong position in life is determined by the firmness of the mind.

Characters created by Albert Camus in his eternal novels include his ideas about the world, its structure, values, and motivation of every individual. Loneliness, exile, separation, inability to remember every minute, and a range of other things claimed to be absurd make the readers understand the author and his attempts to convey his message of the value of life as he makes us estimate the life by denying those values.

Thesis statement

Though Camus’ characters reflect his vision of life and its logic, each character’s ideas can be used to support the position of other; thus, the character of The Plague has a duplicate in The Myth of Sisyphus in terms of ideas and a life position.

Discussion of Camus’ Notions Support from the character of The Plague

The main character of The Plague, Dr. Bernard Rieux whose position in life is not really appropriate for the one possessed by a professional doctor serves as the reflection of the author’s ideas and perception of life through the horros of the plague and isolation. Though he knows what to do with the patients and is treated as a great expert, he does not value the life even when he finds himself isolated from his wife, he treats an exile as one of the strongest emotions (Camus, “The Plague” 165).

Every step made by this man leaves no doubt concerning the motivation and the highest purpose until the readers can see that this person does not value the life and does not realize the necessity of living and the predestination of men on earth. No matter how strong is his desire to save lives of ordinary people by applying to authorities and health care organizations, this terrible disease cannot evoke a desire to live in this dried-up man.

Ideas imbedded into the character of The Myth of Sisyphus

Though every character of Camus’ novels and essays is full of specific features, he/she is only a reflection of the author’s ideas and a strong life position. However, this does not seem to coincide greatly with the power of the author to evoke feelings in his contemporaries and in future generations. The concept of exile and loneliness seems irrelevant to the enormous energy that comes from every line written by Albert Camus.

The author writes about absurdity of the world and human lives without being absolutely sure that the readers are able to understand his ideas due to the number of meanings that can be applied. “His exile is without remedy since he is deprived of the memory of a lost home or the hope of a promised land” (Camus, “The Myth” 6); this statement reflects clearly the scope of human life that consists of different memories while it is not worth living without memories because no values and beliefs would be left.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Concepts of life in The Stranger

The Stranger combines characteristics of main heroes of The Plague and The Myth of Sisyphus because he is as clear and open as the narrator who explains the absurdity of the world; at the same time, Meursault is as lonely as Dr. Bernard Rieux who does not value his own life either. Though ideas of loneliness do not frighten the main character, he is not a lonely person; he is social and friendly with people he knows but does not express strong feelings about his mother’s death.

Lack of emotions makes this work of literature even more emotional though logical while another great idea conveyed by the author makes the things clear; it is when the main character analyzes his life: “I had been right, I was still right, I was always right. I had lived my life one way and I could just as well have lived it another” (Camus, “The Stranger” 121). This explains every attempt of the author to reduce the value of human life because the right to make a choice is an integral part of life and cannot be considered absurd.

Conclusion Novels and essays written by Albert Camus make us believe that there is nothing important in human life; moreover, the author makes us believe that the entire life is absurd and is not worth living.

However, when one reads carefully and notices every ambiguous meaning, it is possible to perceive the value of life and hints given by the author concerning the importance of making choice because we can do it and living our lives as we think it necessary. Every step taken by the characters of Camus’ novels is aimed at provoking thoughts and concluding on the suggested ideas and concepts that should be used as a basis for further reflections.

Works Cited Camus, Albert. The Myth of Sisyphus. Trans. Justin O’Brien. New York: Vintage-Random House, 1991. Print.

Camus, Albert. The Plague. Trans. Stuart Gilbert. New York: Vintage-Random House, 1991. Print.

Camus, Albert. The Stranger. Trans. Matthew Ward. New York: Vintage-Random House, 1989. Print.

We will write a custom Essay on Camus’ Notions in The Plague, The Myth of Sisyphus and The Stranger specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More


Environmental Pollution: Causes and Solutions Research Paper essay help online: essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

What is Pollution?

Causes of pollution

Solutions to pollution problems

Most suitable Solution


Works Cited

Introduction The past two centuries have been characterized by vast technological advances that have had a significant effect on man and his environment. One of these advances has been in the form of increased industrialization by man.

Industrialization has resulted in detrimental practices such as deforestation, air and water pollution which have all threatened the fragile balance that exists between man and the environment. The consequences that have risen as a result of neglecting to take care of the environment have now become a reality to the whole of mankind.

This has forced environmental issues to take a center stage in man’s life as nations have come together and put a valuable effort to restore, maintain and manage their respective eco systems. This paper shall present a concise yet informative research on the issue of environmental pollution. A definition of pollution shall be offered as well as a discussion on the major causes of pollution. Possible solutions to this problem shall be reviewed and the most suitable solutions offered.

What is Pollution? The United Nations Environmental Programme defines pollution as the “undesirable state of the natural environment being contaminated with harmful substances as a consequence of human activities”. Pollution of the environment can occur naturally but it is man-made pollution that is mostly degenerative in nature. Pollution occurs in the air, soil and water as a result of substances which are harmful being released into them.

Causes of pollution Waste disposal has been noted to be one of the main means by which water bodies are polluted. Most human beings have a tendency of throwing their rubbish and dirt into the water bodies and drainage systems assuming that they will be drained away to a better place. This results in the creation of rubbish hills which are not only an eye sore but they also pollute the air and the soil.

Fishermen and other members of the shipping industry pollute the waters by disposing cargo waste, plastic as well as noise emanating from their ships and machineries. The presence of such pollutants has serious impacts on the environment since some of the disposed substances are toxic.

Nuclear power has been exploited to provide power for running industries and cities. However, this power plants results in the production of radioactive waste which must be disposed off. If not properly disposed, radioactive waste can pollute the soil or water bodies if it is allowed to seep into the water table or into an ocean (Harrison 45). This form of waste is not only harmful to human beings but also to other animals, fishes and marine life. In a water body that is contaminated, the radioactive substances affect the fish and kills them leading to the decreased amounts of fish in the water body.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Another source of soil pollution is the excessive chemicals that are used in the agricultural sector, and homes. Mooney et al demonstrates that the weed killers used by individuals to tend to their gardens end up contaminating the soil (23). However this pollution does not end here for the contaminants often drain into the ground where they contaminate the underground waters. While this type of pollution is not visible, it still presents a serious threat to life resources. This pollution also extends to rivers in which the underground waters drain into.

Air pollution is mostly caused by the burning of fossil fuels which results in the emission of green house gases. Fossil fuels are needed to run most industries and for this reason, Harrison claims that rapid population growth which led to increased industrialization, globalization and the need for more room for expansion is to blame for most of the pollution cases (23). Air pollution by green house gasses is especially troublesome since it has been seen to cause global warming.

These gas emissions also lead to atmospheric pollution which in turn contributes to acid rain. This type of pollution is wide spread and very problematic because if it is not stopped at the source, the chain reaction that follows cannot be prevented or stopped. The acid rain pours into soil making them acidic and therefore nonproductive and into oceans contaminating the water therein.

Solutions to pollution problems The government has continued to play a significant role in reduction of pollution levels by adopting various strategies aimed at reducing pollution. A significant policy is that of Tax rebates which is offered to all industries that adopt eco friendly practices. This move by the government will reduce industrial emissions into the air as well as the level of toxic wastes that get into our water bodies by a wide margin since industrial fumes are some of the biggest causes of air pollution (UNEP).

In addition to this, all industries should be encouraged by law to plant trees which acts as carbon sinks thus reducing pollution levels. An increase in taxation on vehicles that are “gas guzzlers” can also aid in the battle to reduce green house gases emissions. In so doing, the adverse effects that air and water pollution by the industries have on our environment will greatly be reduced.

Over the years, it has been suggested that new architectural designs can help retard global warming. As such, the government must enforce the set laws which stipulate that new industrial, commercial and residential houses should be built using materials compliant with the new environmental laws.

More effective and efficient water and waste treatment methods have also been developed and it is a prerequisite to have them installed before starting up any industry. Citizens are also encouraged to use the 3R’s (reduce, reuse, recycle) model as part of their contribution towards a greener State.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Environmental Pollution: Causes and Solutions specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Individuals can do a lot on their own to reduce the carbon footprint. Throughout the world, the level of electricity consumption is increasing every day (UNEP). It is therefore important that they adjust their lifestyle if they are to meet the stipulated limits. This can be done by switching to less energy consuming light bulbs, using public means of transport as compared to personal vehicles, switching back to fans rather than using air conditioners, using LCD and plasma screens instead of tube televisions.

To curb water pollution, dish washers can be employed instead of hand washing thereby reducing water wastage. Using the shower instead of the bath tub has been known to reduce Co2 emissions. In so doing, the level of pollution will have reduced significantly and the effects of these pollutants on our environment minimized.

The industrial sector is notable the chief polluter in almost all countries. As such, any change in this sector no matter how small can spell a big difference to the overall reduction of carbon emission. Shifting to more eco friendly equipments that use less fuel is one of the notable ways in which industries can make a difference.

Industries that employ the use of boilers should install smoke density meters which check on the levels of smoke emitted into the air thereby creating a means through which these harmful emissions can be regulated (Mooney et al 89). Implementation of a decentralization program can also help greatly reduce both vehicular and industrial pollution. This is because decentralization calls for the spreading out of industries as opposed to having them concentrated in one area.

Most suitable Solution Knowledge based solutions are so far the best technique to tackle the problems of pollution that continue to affect our world. This is because an informed society is likely to understand the consequences of its actions and as such use this knowledge to solve its challenges that it faces daily.

As such, individuals must raise their level of interest in environmental issues to a level that is higher than it stands today. The reality is that few people know about some forms of pollution let alone their negative effect on our lives and the earth. If people were enlightened, it is likely that they would avoid activities that further pollution such as use of chemicals. Education and awareness therefore are the best ways to ensure that the environment is secured for future generations.

Conclusion This paper set out to provide an informative research on pollution, its major causes and solutions that can be utilized to ensure a reduction in pollution. To this end, this paper has outlined the major forms of pollution. The paper has then proceeded to discuss the major ways in which pollution occurs.

It has been noted that most of the toxic wastes that invade our environment are human-made. The paper has also revealed that while there is no single solution to dealing with the problem of pollution, there are a number of actions which can be taken to mitigate pollution. If implemented, these changes no matter how little will at the end make a vast difference in the lives of many people as well as the ecological balance that supports such existence.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Environmental Pollution: Causes and Solutions by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Works Cited Harrison, Roy. Pollution: causes, effects and control. USA: Royal Society of Chemistry, 2001. Print.

Mooney, Linda Knox, David and Schacht, Caroline. Understanding Social Problems. NY: Cengage Learning, 2008. Print.

United Nations Environment Program (UNEP). Urban Environment Unit: Urban Air Pollution. 2010. Web.


Vaquita – An Endangered Species Term Paper a level english language essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Social and Reproductive Life

Reasons for its Decline

Reduction of the flow of Colorado River

Conservation Efforts


Reference List

Introduction The vaquita is a small naval creature found in the Gulf of California and is in danger of extinction. Very few people have gotten the opportunity to see this species and many people may not be able to see it now that its existence is threatened. The vaquita looks like a curved stocky porpoise, and it is the smallest of all the porpoises in the world.

It survives in shallow waters. It is even believed to survive in lagoons where the water can hardly cover its back. Most Vaquitas are found on the northern part of the Gulf of California within Colorado River delta. This paper will give more information about the vaquita, explain some of the reasons that are causing its decline, and highlight some of the steps taken by the Mexican government to conserve this rare species.

A newborn Vaquita weighs about seventeen pounds and is approximately 30 inches long. Adults are 150 centimeters which is equivalent to 4.92 feet, and weigh not more than 50 kilograms, making then the smallest cetaceans in existence. Most parts of its body are grey in color and it has a smaller skull compared to other porpoises. Calves are usually a dark shade of grey and as they grow older, they are actually tri-colored having a whitish belly, light grey sides and remaining dark grey on their back.

Although they are commonly compared and closely related to dolphins, they vary in many ways. They have spade shaped teeth, rounded beaks and are stouter than dolphins who also have no beaks. Their triangular shaped fins are surprisingly larger and higher than most porpoise species. From far away, Vaquitas look like bottlenose dolphins but their behavior clearly distinguishes them from other cetaceans.

Social and Reproductive Life The Vaquita are more agile and less social than dolphins. They appear to be comfortable porpoises that like swimming and are sometimes found relaxing leisurely along the shoreline, but normally they barely come into contact with the sea surface and disappear for long periods, remaining inconspicuous.

They are also afraid of boats of all kinds. If a boat appears near them, they either hide under water or move to a different position. Vaquitas rise to the surface of the water to take in fresh air and then go under water for a long period of time. They like feeding on fish species, especially the smaller ones although they are known to be nonselective feeders and can feed on almost anything that crosses its path.

Being that they limit their living area, they tend to eat squid, grunts, benthic fishes and crustaceans. They have a loud shout indistinct blow. They have their own high frequency click they use to communicate with other vaquitas while plotting their course through waters. Vaquitas give birth to calves during spring, and gestation normally takes about ten to eleven months. Three to six years is believed to be the Vaquitas maturity age. Vaquitas are believed to have a life span of about 21 years (Jefferson, et al 2008).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Reasons for its Decline It is hard to find a person hunting Vaquitas because many people do not know much about them. Actually their existence was realized in 1958, after a survey was carried out by dedicated scientists. Since then, other scholars have developed an interest on this rare species and are carrying out research to understand more about them and how their survival can be enhanced.

Their existence is being threatened since they are normally trapped in gillnets that are used for fishing the totoaba which is also found in the Gulf of California. It is important to note that this species reproduces very slowly because they are very few in number. Therefore, if one female Vaquita is trapped in gillnets, it poses a very great threat to their survival (Leatherwood, et al. 1988).

The population of the Vaquitas has declined at a very high rate (15% every year). Their existence is mainly threatened by commercial fishing, which takes place within Colorado River delta. However, other species are being fished and this threatens the survival of the Vaquita. It is estimated that the population of the vaquita may be declining at a rate of about eighty percent for the next 20 to 30 years, which may render the species extinct.

Commercial fishing still stands as the greatest threat to the survival of the vaquitas, although there are other threats such as habitat degradation, pollution, and inbreeding, given that they population is very low. A lot of non-environmental friendly waste is being damped in Colorado River which is a threat to the security of the vaquita.

Many vaquitas have died from suffocation (given that they stay underwater for a longer period than they stay on the surface) and they are still facing the threat of environmental pollution. Agricultural farming has also increased around the area with many farmers using water from Colorado River for irrigation (Reeves, et al. 2002).

This has resulted in a decrease in the volume of water in the river thereby interfering with the habitat of the vaquitas. Apart from the use of water, the use of fertilizers and pesticides is on the increase and most of these chemicals find their way into the river. This does not only cause death to the Vaquitas, but to all other aquatic animals.

Inbreeding is also a major reason for the decline of the vaquitas. As seen earlier, a single calf takes about six years to mature and be able to reproduce. Also a female vaquita can only give birth to a single calf and this takes place annually especially during spring. Let’s assume there are about 100 female vaquitas out of the total population, this means that fewer than 100 calves will be born each year because the gestation takes almost one year and not all this vaquitas may be able to survive throughout the year.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Vaquita – An Endangered Species specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More If 70 calves are born each year, after six years we will have about 420 new vaquitas (holding all other factors constant). However, it is estimated that, the rate of death can go up to 84 individuals meaning that, all the calves may die before they are able to reproduce. The number of females may also decline.

Reduction of the flow of Colorado River Other risk factors for the decline of the vaquita species include but not limited to;

Increased rate of incidental mortality in fisheries

Indirect effects of fishing whereby the vaquitas are trapped in fishing nets

Use of hydrocarbon pesticides and fertilizers for agricultural purposes mostly in the Mexican basin

Reduced flow of the Colorado River which interferes with the vaquitas habitat

Reduction of the flow of Colorado river has not yet had negative effects on the current productivity but poses great threat on the survival of the vaquitas 9 (Lavín


A case against Software Piracy Essay scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

A case against Software Piracy

A case for Software Piracy



Works Cited

Introduction The significance of computers and subsequently computer software in modern lives is indeed unquantifiable. Teston asserts that software has become the building block of all major industries and as such, our very civilization (66). With this in mind, the issue of software piracy is of great concern since its impacts have a direct bearing on our modern civilization.

Over the last two decades, piracy has become so prevalent in modern society and most people engage in it without hesitation. The Business Software Alliance defines software piracy as the “unauthorized copying or distribution of copyrighted software”.

Pirating constituted copyright infringement and is therefore an illegal action punishable by law. While some people argue that software should be free for all in the first place and hence piracy is acceptable, others declare that piracy is tantamount to physical robbery. This paper shall argue that piracy is unjustifiable since it fails to respect the proprietary rights of the author of the software and results to losses to the software publishers and the society at large.

This paper will raise arguments that demonstrate that piracy is unjustifiable all the while relying on authoritative sources. A case shall also be made in defense of software piracy so as to provide a balanced view on the topic. A brief discussion with will analyze the arguments forwarded will then be used to prove that software piracy is mostly detrimental.

A case against Software Piracy Information technology has been the key driver of the US economy in the last few decades. The U.S. software industry has been a major player in the U.S. economy with the software industry contributing a substantial amount of revenue to the U.S. government. As a result of software piracy, MacDonald and Fougere document that the U.S. lost over a billion dollars in tax revenue in the year 2000.

This figure has risen over the years as piracy has become even more pervasive therefore resulting in even bigger loses on revenue by the U.S. These losses are as a direct result of the significant losses in revenue that the software industry suffers due to software piracy. Software piracy therefore robs our government off the much needed revenue.

The software industry employs hundreds of thousands of people in the U.S. As such, the mere existence of this industry contributes positively to the U.S. economy by providing employment to citizens who contribute to the economy by the taxes they pay and other consumptions they make. MacDonald and Fougere noted that software piracy cost the U.S. over 100,000 jobs in the year 2000 as software companies were forced to cut down on their staff so as to offset the losses brought about by piracy.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Professionals in the software development community are paid for their creative skills by the revenue which is accrued from the sale of the same. Piracy denies the software developers off their rightfully earned pay. This translates to a slowing in the growth of the industry which in effect retards the growth of the industry thus hurting the U.S. economy (Gopal and Sanders 381).

One of the justifications for piracy by the ordinary consumer is that piracy only hurts the big corporations which are already excessively rich and can therefore absorb the losses that result from their software being pirated. However, this is a fallacy since piracy does not only affect the software developers but also affect consumers.

Parsons and Oja reveal that as a result of piracy, software publishers may be forced to inflate the price for the licensed copy of the product so as to offset losses incurred due to piracy (73). Piracy therefore results in the legitimate buyers being penalized in the form of inflated prices. It is conceivable that if piracy was not practiced, software companies would be able to sell their products at prices that were affordable to all since the profits would still be significant as a result of the volume of sales.

Software piracy may result in personal loses to the consumer who has purchased or downloaded for free the pirated software. When people purchase or download software that has been pirated, they stand to suffer loses in the long-term. This is because when a person uses pirated software, they are not eligible to updates, patches or other software tweaks that the software publishers may come up with in the lifetime of the software.

HWM reveals that only those users who installed the original Symantec software had access to the virus signatures that the company regularly dispensed through the internet (40). A user with a pirated copy of the Symantec antivirus software will therefore have software which has an obsolete virus databank therefore leaving him/her exposed to viruses. The damages that this may result to are definitely more costly than a legitimate copy of the software would have cost.

The motivation for most pirates is to fight the pricing by software publishers which the software pirates deem to be exorbitantly high. This reasoning fails to take into consideration that software publishers take into consideration many factors when coming up with the prices. The revenue accrued from software products sales does not all translate to profit for the software companies but is used for other value added services such as; customer support personnel, free technical support among others (Parsons and Oja 73).

Software piracy decreases the software revenue and the companies are therefore unable to provide these services for free or in cases where they can, a customer has to wait for long therefore decreasing the quality of the customer service provision. Software piracy therefore reduces the quality of customer service therefore making the usage of a software product less enjoyable.

We will write a custom Essay on A case against Software Piracy specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More A case for Software Piracy Software piracy does not always hurt the profitability of a company and at times, it actually results in the software publisher’s gaining. Gu and Mahajan declare that while piracy is normally considered to be detrimental to a firm’s profit, leads to a market that is free of destructive price competition therefore resulting in higher gains by the software companies (1).

This is possible since piracy attracts the price sensitive consumers and once they are out of the market, those that remain are the ones who would not mind using more money for the licensed copy of the software. In an environment where piracy does not exist, the software firms will be forced to compete for the price sensitive consumers which will invariably result in destructive price competition thus lowering the profit margin of the firms significantly (Gu and Mahajan 2).

As a matter of fact, most of the software products offered by big corporations are sold at exorbitant prices that are not only unjustifiable but also unaffordable for some people. Parsons and Oja point out that in countries such as North Korea where the average annual income is a mere us$ 900, an individual purchasing a legitimate copy of Microsoft Office for US$ 250 would be spending over one-quarter of their annual income (72).

Piracy affords such a person a means through which they can get the same software at a greatly subsidized cost or even at no cost at all. Software Piracy therefore enables people to have access to software and make use of it to further their economic interests therefore benefiting not only themselves but also their families and society at large.

While piracy has been shot down for allegedly depriving people in the software industry off their livelihoods, software at times has the effect of increasing the sales of the software. At times, software pirates include a note to the user explicitly asking them to purchase a legitimate copy of the product if they find it useful.

In such cases, the pirated copy acts more as a “demo” and the user can proceed to purchase the legitimate copy if he/she finds it impressive. Software piracy therefore results in a popularization of a software product with increased sales for the same. This is a favorable thing for the software publisher who gains a wider market for the software product as a result of piracy.

One of the results of piracy is that it increases the popularity of the product itself. As such, there are instances in which manufacturers encourage pirating of their product as a way to gain market leadership (Luppicini and Adell 358). By encouraging the piracy of a product, a company can monopolize the market by making consumers attached to their particular software.

Luppicini and Adell suggest that software piracy “permits the shadow diffusion of software therefore increasing its user base over time” (358). This strategy has been utilized by major software players such as Microsoft and MacAfee to enable them capture a larger market.

Not sure if you can write a paper on A case against Software Piracy by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Discussion The discussions presented above have demonstrated that software piracy results in a stunned growth of the software industry in the region that is affected by this ill. As a matter of fact, software plays a very significant role in the economy of a country and as such, the repercussions that come about as a result of software piracy should be avoided at all costs.

Gopal and Sanders suggest that considering the enormous level of monetary resources that are at risk as a result of software piracy, more effort should be dedicated in mitigating software piracy (396). In the U.S., Federal laws have been put in place to try and tackle the problem of software piracy. Teston reveals that in 2007, the Federal law increased fines to $250,000 for software copyright infringement and the jail term to 5 years so as to try and deter people from engaging in software piracy (75).

One of the defenses of piracy is that is gives the user an opportunity to test the software after which they can purchase a legitimate copy. While this scenario would be ideal if it played out like this, in most cases users are just content to continue using the pirated copy and do not consider purchasing the licensed copy.

In addition to this, some proponents of software piracy advance that piracy is justifiable since it helps people who cannot afford software priced for the U.S. market, this argument fails to hold considering that software piracy is not limited to developing countries with weak economies. Parsons and Oja document that most of the countries which have high incidences of software piracy have strong economies and income per capita (72).

An argument presented by advocates of piracy is that software is public property and as such, its use should not be restricted by proprietary laws. Teston revealed in a study on the attitudes of technology students towards software piracy that most people are of the opinion that manufacturers do not retain any property rights to software following consumer purchase (73).

This notion is further reinforced by the assumption that software companies have enough resources to absorb the losses brought about by piracy. While big corporations such as Microsoft can afford to absorb the losses that software piracy brings about, smaller software publishers may be unable to do the same and piracy will therefore result in them running bankrupt. Piracy therefore threatens the means of livelihood of people working in the software development industry in addition to hurting our economy.

Conclusion This paper set out to argue that software piracy is unjustifiable since it results to huge losses to the software publishers and the society at large. To reinforce these claims, some of the major faults associated with software piracy have been discussed. A significant point raised in this paper is that the pervasiveness of software piracy in our country has a huge negative effect on not only the software industry but also the country’s economy which loses billions of dollars to pirates.

Piracy not only has negative effect on our economy but it is also a federal offense. Every individual should therefore take actions to mitigate this detrimental practice by ensuring that they purchase only legal copies of software products and avoid any pirating activity. By doing this, the individual will have helped keep software publishers in business which will positively impact our economy.

Works Cited Business Software Alliance. What is Software Piracy? 2010. Web.

Gopal, Ram and Sanders, Lawrence. “International Software Piracy: Analysis of Key Issues and Impacts”. Information Systems Research vol. 9. No. 4, December 1998.

Gu, Bin and Mahajan, Vijah. “The Benefits of Piracy – A Competitive Perspective.” 2004. PDF File.

HWM. “The Piracy Issue: Did it Destroy Asia’s Answer to Bill Gates?” HWM. Vol. 2. issue 6, 2002.

Luppicini, Rocci and Adell, Rebecca. Handbook of Research on Technoethics. Idea Group Inc (IGI), 2009. Print.

MacDonald, Laurie and Fougere, Kenneth. “Software Piracy: A Study of the Extent Of Coverage in Introductory MIS Textbooks.” Journal of Information Systems Education, Vol. 13(4), 2001.

Parsons, Jamrich and Oja, Dan. Computer concepts illustrated introductory. Cengage Learning, 2008. Print.

Teston, George. “Software Piracy among Technology Education Students: Investigating Property Rights in a Culture of Innovation.” Journal of Technology Education, Vol. 20. 1, 2008.


The Media’s Influence on Eating Disorders Argumentative Essay college admission essay help

Introduction We are being worn out daily with information about everything from all over with the flare-up of information technology. We have television delivering news at home, a radio in the family car, and at work the internet. We are being presented with new information at every side with this entire media.

Through the media, we are able to know what the latest is, what is hottest, and even what is good or bad. Regardless of whether we acknowledge it or not, the truth is that this information influences our choices. These are choices about our dressing styles, where we visit, what we purchase, and our appearance. The media seeks to enlighten us, convince us, entertain us, and change us. The main goal of doing all this is to engage crowds so that advertisers can market their products and services.

According to recent research, nearly all food-manufacturing companies use images of slim models to advertise their food. The companies do this regardless of how unhealthy the food might be. Over the years, the media has succeeded in painting a picture that associates thinness with beauty.

When the food companies use the images of thin models in their advertisements, they are simply associating the food to being beautiful. This gives people the impression that by eating the food they will be as beautiful as the model in the advert is. This is however not the case since most of those foods are unhealthy and might even cause diseases.

Perhaps the biggest effect of how the media influences eating habits is evident in McDonald advertisements. Research shows that McDonald and other fast food companies run flashy adverts that are appealing to customers. In most cases, the people who watch this adverts end up eating the food being advertised regardless of how unhealthy it is.

It is surprising to note that the food companies do not warn people on the dangers of too much intake of such foods. Worried about the effect that such adverts have on people’s minds, doctors recently unveiled an advert that showed a dead body in a morgue holding a piece of hamburger from McDonald. This advert was meant to prove to consumers that the fast foods that they take could cause death.

The best demonstration to prove that advertisement can influence the food we eat is best seen in the documentary Super Size Me. First, the documentary tries to show us why fast food companies are not genuine in their advertisements. This is achieved by showing just how impossible it is to “eat one chip.”

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This shows that people have to purchase plenty of what is on sale to get satisfied. This is seen as a conspiracy by companies to get more customers and more money. The documentary shows how people destroy their health by continuously eating fast foods. Despite this fact, more people are still rushing to MacDonald for a bite of hamburger something that goes ahead to show just how much the media influences our eating habits.

Conclusion Unlike in the past, it is now easier to get information due to the flare up of information technology. Today, everyone is able to know the latest news wherever they are and at any given time. Fast food companies have taken this opportunity to market their products to a receptive society.

Due to the influence that the media wields, many people are turning out to try the fast foods that they see in their favorite adverts. This is happening regardless of the health problems associated with these foods. This shows that the media is capable of influencing our eating habits.


Best Hiring Methods Research Paper best college essay help

Introduction Resume and various background inspections of a potential employee is not a waste of time or energy but a strategy to safeguard the firm’s resources. The critical analysis assists in weeding out possible fraudsters and unqualified persons. Deceiving candidates can either format their resumes to indicate high credentials or provide functional resumes to cover up or underplay the negative and unusual circumstances. The presented documents are therefore not enough for determining qualifications of a candidate.

Due to the current harsh economical situation and high unemployment rates, potential employees are today customizing their resumes to indicate that their credentials are a perfect fit for the specified jobs. Targeting resumes causes people to structure resumes that cover details in order to ensure perfect qualification or fit.

Background of the Problem There are considerable amount of pressure on matters of recruitment. There have been great changes on the subject pertaining hiring methods, for instance legislation of laws relevant to protection of privacy and formality that criminalize negligence or abuse of employee’s rights.

Nevertheless, today most employees have centrally strengthened their position against fraudulent employees. With this kind of confrontation over employment procedures, hiring matters continues to be of great controversy especially due to the obvious link towards outcomes. The problems associated with employee’s hiring methods concerns its legal procedures and effects caused by lack of scrutiny, especially much later in their subsistence.

Thesis Statement As a legal practice pertinent to the law, what are the benefits of employees screening before employment? This paper is an analysis of the basic procedures of employees’ appointment process, as well as its implication over the firm’s growth. The research is an analysis of dominant hiring procedures common among various employees. The study also forms an analysis of effects of poor recruitment procedures.

Objective/significance of the study The main objective of the paper focuses on job appointment procedures, with a close analysis of the developmental problems associated with the process. Another significance of the study focuses on various intervention approaches and procedures to avoid major economical impacts to the firm. The paper also forms an analysis over other probable choices in the subject matter. Lastly, the research takes a conclusion concerning the issue based on the findings.

The procedure of the study The literature reviews and external consultations will enable better understanding of the topic. Preparation of the research over the chosen topic will enhance and quantify the research as a study topic and prepare for responses. Collected information tabulates and ranks the findings to broad areas and helps to narrow the scope to the objectives of the study analysis. The analysis then draws the conclusion from generally analyzed data of the review.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Purpose of the study The main purpose of this study is to evaluate the right and common procedures of hiring. The document also offer suggestions from research on ways of considering various processes and predicament, in the aim of eliminating economical losses associated with wrong hiring.

Background checks The background checks are very important during hiring since they enable the employer to safeguard the organization, firm, members of staffs and the potential employee under interview. Any employees should avoid making poor hiring decisions by rushing to engage someone. In most business settings, one appalling hire can be the main source of failure, especially when the candidate is to hold a high-level position in the firm.

In line with the United Stated Chamber of Commerce (Towers and Terry, 2004), more that 30% of failures in small and medium sized firms fail due to poor hiring practices. The poor hiring is mainly attributable to lack of proper background checks. Due to the current competitive markets in the job industries, lack of proper mitigation practices causes high probabilities of hiring dangerous and objectionable employees.

The background checks involve the resume scrutiny. The economically challenging times requires an employer or HR department that is able to analyze the credentials of a prospective candidate since fraud cases are rampant. Most job seekers are desperate because they start their search when in frantic need. The resumes are thus full of fictions stellar facts that require critical analysis.

Reference checks Reference checks entail background research of prospective candidates either through online, interviews or through social networking. The procedure of finding further information of the potential candidate beside what the employee provides in the curriculum vitae is significant and not unethical or discriminatory, as critics would argue.

The potential candidates only offer the employment dates, salary history and job categories; therefore, a lot of information remains tentative. This makes the procedure of reference checking tiresome and lengthy.

Arguably, sometimes it is important for employers or the HR team to move beyond the official setting and check background information of the potential employees provided in social media sites. Resumes often dupe employers into engaging, training and integrating wrong candidates into their firms only to discover that the presented credentials were fraudulent. Thorough analysis is time consuming, but the procedure safe guards the huge amount of resources invested for recruitment and hiring procedures.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Best Hiring Methods specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Reference checks should also include critical review of presented backups such as cover letters and job applications. According to Levitt and Dubner (2009), over 50% of job applicants lie about their credentials through exaggerations or embellishments and it is easy to detect mismatches from analysis of all the presented materials.

Educational history checks Performing educational checks is also important due to the increased forgery cases of the academic certifications such as fake degrees. There are bogus job references as well as evident high volumes of ill-equipped applications. The HR management has to find the right person from huge volumes of unqualified applicants, thus need to invest time and energy to ensure academic background accuracy. Direct interview also assist in detecting suspicious responses, contradictions on issues regarding academic performances and achievement.

Checking on every fact on the academic certificates such as exact dates of undertaking or completion of study, the majors, the trainers or supervisors’ details requires verification from the institutions, in relation to what the candidate provides.

Employment history checks The employer must be in a position to determine truthfulness over issues regarding job titles, salary histories, reason why the candidate left previous jobs and job performance history, compensations, previous remuneration offers and any other assisting financial information. This procedure requires one to verify what the candidate provides by consulting the previous employees.

Consulting the former employers Former employers can provide vital information and free employment screening of a candidate. They are able give information that will never be in any of the presented documents such as, performance efforts and employment histories. The best procedure is to either visit or call and seek answers to specific questions for instance achievement history in the firm.

Direct questioning assists in getting a clear picture. The employer must consult previous employees and inquire how the candidate was able to achieve the stated success, improvements, teamwork, marketing goals, official and unofficial contributions. Any negative information from previous employers ought to reveal the reality from stated oblivious facts in the resume.

References Levitt, S.


Analysis of the opening and closing pages of a novel Compare and Contrast Essay writing essay help: writing essay help

Introduction The first chapters of any play or novel are important as it is where the characters are introduced to the reader and one gets to know their personality and beliefs. From the onset the reader may love or hate the main character. For the character that is loved, there is a connection, either the reader feels pity for the character or identifies with the character’s situation.

It also reveals the setting of the novel. What are the timelines the book is it set in? Is it a historical book, futuristic book or a book set in the 21st century? Themes or strong ideas of the author start to emerge in the first chapters.

The reason for the title of the book may also emerge in the first chapters or the last chapters of the novel. The first chapters foreshadow the rest of the action in the book. The first chapters reveal the tone of the narrative voice or characters. Is it sarcastic or ironic? The first chapters reveal to the reader the kind of action that will be there in the rest of the book.

At the end of the novel the writer needs to have shown the main theme of the novel clearly. The reason of the title of the book should be clear. There are certain ideologies or perspectives the author tries to communicate. At the end of the book the reader may agree with the author or strongly disagree. There should be no loose strings such that the reader is left hanging. The reader should not be left confused or lost. The characters in the book will have experienced changes in their life and it needs to be clearly shown.

Burgess’s- A Clockwork Orange First Chapters

A Clockwork Orange is a novel set in the future, in the city of London. The state runs every aspect of the economy. There is a high level of youth violence. The language spoken is “nadsat”, a fictional language that is similar to English with a few extra words.

The book opens with a scene where Alex, who is fifteen years old, with his friends Pete, Georgie and Dim are drinking milk at a milk bar. Immediately the reader is shown the violent streak in the boys. Alex hits a drugged man in the bar since he hates the song being played in the bar stereo. Once outside they meet an elderly man carrying science books and immediately they beat him up. They tear up his books and take his money.

Now that they have some money they decide to shop-lift. They buy some old women food since they want an alibi. This shows us the extent of their selfishness and not the goodness of their heart. They then go to a candy shop, steal and beat up the owners, a man and the wife.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It is not enough to steal from someone; they love violence and love beating someone up. The violence shown in the first chapters helps us understand we are dealing with violent teenagers. When the cops arrive the boys force the old women they bought food for to provide an alibi.

This incident shows the boys may have been in trouble with the law before. In the second chapter they beat an old man who is singing old songs in the streets. These young men need no reason to beat someone up. They just do as they please. They later come across a rival gang of six boys whose leader is Billyboy. They are raping a young girl. They fight with them and win.

Later the boys go to a cottage named “Home”. They manage to get inside the cottage. Alex lies that his friend is sick and needs an ambulance. The woman inside is compassionate and allows them in. They beat up the woman and her husband who was inside the cottage. They then rape the woman as her husband watches. This shows the extent of their sadistic nature. The boys are merciless and evil. The man is an author with a manuscript called A Clockwork Orange.

They destroy his manuscript. This is the title of the book and bears great meaning. The author does not reveal the meaning at this point in the book. The pace and action of the first chapters is quick. In the first two chapters, the boys have committed five acts of violence, one act of rape and coerced the old women to give them an alibi. This is in the duration of one day.

The book is written in the first person point of view. We are shown Alex’s life and the scenes in which he is in. The book is about free will which humans have been. An individual chooses whether to commit evil or good acts. Alex is using his free will to commit evil acts. He is cruel. He does not thinking of other people and the pain he is causing them. Alex’s friends set him up during a robbery.

He is arrested and sent to prison. He hears of a Luvodico’s Technique treatment that is believed to remove the criminal tendencies of a man and causes him to be good. He lies to the police about a cocaine shipment concerning one of the prisoners so that he can be taken for the treatment. Later he beats to death another prisoner who makes homosexual advances towards him. The governor visits him in cell and agrees he should be treated so that he is cured of evil.

Afterwards he is released from prison. The treatment has conditioned him to do only that which is good. These are the last chapters of the book and the author brings out the main idea of the book. Alex has no free will or the power of choice. He cannot stand acts of violence whether sexual or not.

We will write a custom Essay on Analysis of the opening and closing pages of a novel specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More He feels like vomiting every time he witnesses a violent scene. At the library he meets the elderly scholarly man he attacked with his gang. The man tells the crowd and they beat Alex up. He feels sick as they beat him. He cannot defend himself. He cannot beat anyone. When rescued by the police, the policemen turn out to be Billyboy and Dim who beat him up mercilessly. He is unable to defend himself.

He wants to commit suicide and cannot. He cannot even hurt himself. He ends up at the cottage “Home” where his gang attacked a man and gang-raped the wife. He finds the man, F. Alexander who welcomes him, hears his story and wants to lodge a complaint against the government so that they are not re-elected.

Alexander starts to suspect Alex and his friends are the ones who attacked him. Alexander’s friends who also want to expose the government arrive and take him to another location, his new home. Alex while at Alexander’s house had seen his book A Clockwork Orange that shows human beings as oranges in God’s Orchard.

The humans have been turned into machines having no free will. He jumps out the window desiring to die. He is taken to hospital critically ill. The end of the novel now shows Alex returning to his normal self with a free will. When shown pictures by doctors he displays sexual and violent reactions. The doctors at hospital under the instructions of F. Alexander cure him while he is unconscious.

Last Chapters

The novel ends with Alex at the milk bar with his friends. He beats up an addict in the place and allows his friends to beat up an elderly man once they are outside the bar. He realizes though that he is tired of the violence and desires a family. He reprimands his friends for their violence. “Look droogies, listen, tonight am just somehow not in the mood.

I know not how or why it is but there it is” (Burgess, 185) At the end of the novel, the author makes the conclusion of his theme of the power of free will. The experience in Alex’s life validates the author’s argument that one should be left to choose good deeds rather than be coerced into doing good. The end shows us the change of personality in Alex and what he has learnt about goodness and violence. The finishing chapters wrap up the theme and the character changes.

Amis’s- Lucky Jim First Chapters

The novel Lucky Jim is set in Britain, in the early 1950s. In the first chapter the reader is introduced to Jim Dixon and Welch who are both lecturers. The scene is at the campus of an English college. Welch is giving Dixon stories but Dixon is disgusted and frustrated by the kind of stories given. Dixon is a sarcastic individual. He cannot voice any complaint at Welch though because as he is afraid of being fired. Welch is his boss. He enquires about Margaret a lady who he has been getting close to especially after her lover left her.

She is recovering at Welch house after she attempted to commit suicide. Dixon is frustrated by the past kind of relationships he has had with women. He further thinks about the way Margaret can ask unexpected questions at times. She also has the habit of confessing a lot of things to him. In the second chapter she confesses to Dixon that she had tried to commit suicide again but the neighbour found her unconscious and took her to hospital.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Analysis of the opening and closing pages of a novel by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More She is depressed with the fact her lover left her. This is another individual who is unhappy with the current status of affairs in her life and wants to escape it all. Escape is also what Dixon is thinking about. This is especially Margaret changes the subject from her attempted suicide to their growing intimacy by giving him intimate glances.

Dixon surprised and frustrated by the change of topics starts smoking and goes to the bathroom and thinks of how he can leave Margaret at the hotel and also quit his job. He has been thinking a lot about London and wants to go there. He stills his thoughts though as he remembers he needs a job and cannot quit. Another thing he is frustrated with is the fact that he paid for the bill yet Margaret earns a higher salary. According to him Margaret should have settled the bill.

From the onset we are shown a disappointed man angry with the world around him. There is a huge discrepancy between Dixon’s strong thoughts and his attitude towards people. He is very timid, unable to speak. He also comes up with horrible faces of people in order to express his disgust. The language in the book is highly descriptive and full of metaphors. It is delivered in a humorous and sarcastic note. Later, Dixon finds the courage to do something he would never do.

He goes to a musical session organised by Welch. He notices Welch’s son, Bertrand is with a highly attractive woman called Christine. She is the niece of Gore-Urquhart, a famous artistic individual. Christine has arranged a meeting between Bertrand and her uncle as Bertrand wants to be her uncle’s personal assistant.

Bertrand though is having an affair with Carol, a married woman. Carol encourages Dixon to approach Christine since he is interested in her. She tells him to forget the Margaret ties. Dixon does not have the heart to tell Margaret off even though he is not attracted to her. He however takes up the challenge and when they are all at the summer ball he tells Christine he wants to take her home. Christine agrees and they actually kiss at Welch’s home. On Sunday Margaret comes to see him, upset that he left her at the ball.

Dixon, angry finally tells her he is not interested in her at all. Margaret has a tantrum but eventually accepts that it is over. Even as he makes these steps towards being assertive about what he wants he faces fear at times and feels Christine is too good for him. At a dinner later at the Welch home, he talks to Margaret about getting back together. Christine still wants to date Bertrand so she tells Dixon that a relationship with him cannot happen. Dixon agrees but he hates the circumstances that are forcing them to make such a decision.

Last Chapters

In the ending chapters it all ends well though. While Dixon is giving a lecture at the college strange things happen. When he speaks it is not his voice but an imitation of Welch’s voice and then the Principal’s voice.

He tries to change his voice but he is unable. Welch becomes angry with him and fires him. Ironically, Gore-Urquhart offers Dixon a job after seeing him make his funny faces of disgust. Christine finds out about Bertrand and Carol’s affair and decides to leave him. Christine and Dixon meet later and decide to be together.

At the end of the novel the last chapters show us the way everything has worked out for Dixon. The relationship he wanted is now a reality because he chose to speak up. He does not get the courage though to tell Welch he does not want the job. It is because of comical circumstances that a decision is made.

Conclusion The two novels are different in some aspects. The characters in A Clockwork Orange are students while in Lucky Jim the focus is on the lecturers. The pace of Lucky Jim is also much slower and it is not as action packed. It focuses more on conversations and the thoughts of Dixon. There are also no acts of violence in the opening pages of Lucky Jim. The tone of the novel is humorous and sarcastic.

The language is also full of metaphors. Jim fights with Bertrand and thinks of him as “The bloody old tower-faced boot-faced totem-pole on a crap reservation.” (Amis, 209)The two main characters in the novels, Alex and Dixon go through some character changes. Alex, a violent and cruel teenager has experiences that cause him to tone down and even become sentimental about wanting a family. He becomes less violent.

Dixon on the other hand approaches a woman he believes is too good for him. In the end he gets to be with Christine and leaves the job that he hates at the college. At the end of the novel the theme or message in the novels is clear. Men without free will are like machines and Dixon at the ends up being lucky as the title of novel suggests.

Works Cited Amis, Kingsley. Lucky Jim. United Kingdom: Penguin Classics, 1993. Print.

Burgess, Antony. A Clockwork Orange. New York: Norton, W. W.


Designation Report on Central Commerce Collegiate Institute Report best essay help

Original and Present Use: So far, the building was initially called a school of business and commerce. At the current moment, Central Commerce Collegiate is a public school situated in Palmerston-Little Italy, Toronto, Ontario. In the course of development, it has transformed into a composite school (Central Commerce Collegiate Institute n. p.).

Architectural Quality and Description Exterior:


The columns of the Central Commence Collegiate are made of stone blocks and the walls and facades are made up of brown bricks. The windows are framed with white decoration. The doors are decorated with glass lights. Above the doors, there are windows with balcony and windows with four-two lights. The columns are also outfit with widows at the second and third floors.


The project is a three story construction with masonry walls designed in the neoclassical style. The building is symmetrically balanced; widows and doors are of monumental proportions. All windows have simple molded frames with lintels. This style became quite popular in the end of the 19th century. Front windows are constructed in groups of three with six-over-two wood sashes. The entrant door is decorated with carved stone; it has six-over-six lights and with surmounted molded hood.

The wings and the center portion have three quoins that are made of brick. The wings at identical sides of the construction are three bays wide that initially had three double-hung wood windows. In general, the construction has not changed, except for few interior and exterior details. In particular, as it is the example of 19th century architecture, the air conditioning system has been installed recently. Nevertheless, the entire building preserved its original, historic appearance.

Interior Materials:

The interior characteristics of the building are typical for the architectural style – terrazzo made up of concrete floors and ceilings finished with plaster. The interior doors opening are finished with wood doors and glass lights.

The inside windows are operable and, therefore, it is quite convenient for teachers to control air temperature and ventilation. The central air-conditioning system is installed in the main corridors of the collegiate. There rooms are finished with acoustic tiles at the ceilings, below the interior doors and upper portions of window frames.


A three story building is composed of three floors; the first one contains the lunchroom and classrooms. At the second floor, classrooms, auditoriums with library, offices, and the exhibit space are located. Entrances to the classrooms are situated at the third floor (Central Commerce CI n. p.)

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The crawl space and partial basement stretches under the historic construction. In the building, there are a lot of unique interior features that had remained in the school after the World War second. In this regard, Central Commerce Collegiate can be considered as valuable historical construction performing the function of local amenity.

Description Room functions

The classrooms at the first and the second floors are destined for conducting lectures and lessons. The offices at the second floor are occupied by teachers and professors. The library located at the second floor can be used both by instructors and students. This is also the place where students can conduct their researchers and prepare for their examinations. The exhibit space is destined for organizing various presentations and official meeting on special occasions. The classrooms can also be occupied by students and teachers for independent learning and research.


The room planning is organized in a relevant way, but there are still some lapses in function allocation. In particular, there should be a strict distribution of floor on the studying sections and reading sections. The offices, classrooms, and libraries are located at the same floor is not beneficial for the learning process and it would be more appropriate the divide functional zones more accurately.

Architectural Styles Characteristics

Exterior and interior design belong to Neoclassical Architecture, which quite reminiscent of Late Baroque architecture. Hence, it primarily highlights planar qualities, but not sculptural volumes. The light and shade effects as well as projections and recessions are flatter; sculptural bas-reliefs are enclosed in tablets, friezes, or panels.

As a proof, the elements of building design also have features of the Georgian style and the Federal style architecture. It is worth saying that the architecture project is also a combination of neoclassical elements and Collegiate Gothic architecture. The Gothic elements are presented in the construction of front columns and stone cladding.


The architectural project personifies rationalistic orientation in construction. Strict lines, symmetric forms, and classic columns reminding of Roman ancient times are the main features of neoclassicism. All forms and are simple and relief decoration is traditionally focused on the roof edges.

Therefore, the building can be considered as a traditional architecture (Hopkins 120). More importantly, Central Commerce Collegiate fits the practical requirements of educational establishment and provides the construction with character that presupposes its utilitarian purpose. One of the practical features of the building is using a three-storey structure that was often used in the Canadian architecture (Carr 80).

We will write a custom Report on Designation Report on Central Commerce Collegiate Institute specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Site Considerations Contexts and Relationships:

The site is located not far from Fred Hamilton Park and Bickford Park. The entire area is surrounded by household and, therefore, the school has a beneficial condition in terms of destination and location. Located between Montrose Avenu and Roxton Road, the construction is located in the residential area. Central Commerce Collegiate Institute is an important example of vernacular architecture. Traditionally, such buildings were constructed along with the development of neighboring sites.


The site is located on a flat plateau in the central part of Toronto. It maintains its original topography. A large front lawn faces Montrose Ave and it is covered with grass. The building is surrounded by large trees that are located behind the school and it is located not far from housing district.

Historical Considerations Background:

Since its foundation in 1916, the Central Commerce Collegiate Institute was initially constructed as a business school. Therefore, all facilities and building design were initially destined for the learning process.


At the present moment, the construction serves as an educational establishing providing various academic courses and programs.

State of the Building Exterior Fabric Condition

The exterior fabric conditions of the building are almost perfect. The excellent conditions are predetermined by the building materials used in construction. Specifically, the utilization of brick and stone blocks ensure great durability of the building. However, the problem is that is impossible to assess the quality of brick with regard to its due date. The stone blocks are mostly presented as the building foundations. They also serve as the basic material in constructing the front columns.

Interior Fabric Condition

Interior fabric conditions were subjected to more serious alterations. Due to the constantly developing informational technologies, the interior should be constructed and equipped in accordance with the existing standards. In this regard, the Institute has a computer class at the second floor that should be better ventilated than others.

Structural Stability

Due to the fact that the building was constructed in the half of the twentieth century, the structural stability is quite high due to its mass structure. Stone blocks and brick ensure the construction with good structural stability characteristics. Being presented in a traditional style that is far from modern construction the building has good characteristics for over a century.

Recommendations Analyzing the data, the report has revealed that the building has a stable structure. The location and landscape are also congruent with the functions affiliated with the construction. In addition, a combination of Neoclassical and Gothic elements perfectly suits the practical utilization of the building and corresponds to the prevailing trend in the Canadian architecture. However, the building should be always monitored and evaluated to ensure that all structural component and durability of materials correspond to the existing standards.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Designation Report on Central Commerce Collegiate Institute by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Works Cited Car, Angela. Toronto Architect Burke: Redefining Canadian Architecture. US: McGill-Queen’s Press, 1995. Print.

Central Commerce CI. Searching Toronto. Web.

Central Commerce Collegiate Institute. Toronto District School Board. Web.

Hopkins, George D. Creating Your Architectural Style. US: Pelican Publishing, 2009.


Latinos and African Americans: Friends or Foes? Analytical Essay cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Although the merging of the nations is the most widespread tendency all around the modern world, and especially in the USA, with its “melting pot” conception, some peoples are trying o keep their traditions safe for the future generation. Still involved into the process of the nations’ fusion, these people are cast into a completely new nationality, with its own tradition and lifestyle.

At present, there are two basic mixed nations in the USA. These are African Americans and Latin Americans. Whether they can live peacefully or are bound to fight for their place in the sun is the topic of the given research.

The Way It All Began: Why Coming to the USA? The People with Two Hearts: Between American and Spain

One of the most peculiar things about the Latin Americans, or Hispanics, is the fact that they manage to keep their culture highly worshipped and yet know the language and the culture of the country that they are living in. In fact, they can be called bilingual and bicultural, for the art of adaptation that they have shown as they have been living on the territory of the USA is stunning.

The journey that took the Latinos to the United States was long and tiring. Although it was not that tragic as the reasons that took the Africans to the United States once, the Hispanics did take their toll on the sufferings of moving to the new country and acclimatizing to its traditions and rules.

However, they settled in the new environment rather quickly, and in 1565 they already founded the city of St. Augustine in Florida. Nowadays one of the cities with the highest ratio of the Hispanic and Latin American population, St. Augustine was the Promised Land for the people who abandoned their traditions and their home in search for a better life.

Torn Away from Homeland: Far from the Hot Sun of Africa

It was a little bit different with the African Americans, though. Since they were brought to the United States involuntarily, they were practically forced to live in the new country and according to the new rules. Taking into consideration that they were brought to the U. S. as slaves who have no rights or freedoms, it can be easily understood that the African Americans found the new life unbearable.

As the slavery was laid to rest along with the racism, there was some more air given to the African Americans so that they could lead a more or less normal life (Bailey). Although there are still some conflicts arising from time to time, the African Americans are finally treated the way that people should be in their new homeland.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Life That They Live: Making the Difference Discovering the World of the African Culture in the USA.

The Afro-Americans are famous for the novelties that they have brought to the United States, among them numerous specific features of their culture one of the most peculiar things about them is the fact that these people have absorbed the American culture, inheriting the most outstanding parts of its culture.

In contrast to the Hispanics, who tended to stay aside form the influence of the American culture and wanted to restore their own traditions in the place of their new settlement, the African Americans were eager to take the new culture and to intertwine it with their own vision of the world. This approach was foreign to the Hispanics, and the barrier between the two nations that were living in the same foreign land were parted even farther, feeling the growing tension between their cultures and their lifestyle.

This was the point where the rivalry between the Hispanics and the African Americans for a place of their own in the heart of America began. It was clear that the Hispanics were not going to subdue to the growing influence of the culture that surrounded them, as well as that they were not going to yield in this clash of cultures. It seemed that this was the starting point for the rivalry between the Hispanics and the African Americans.

On the Way to New Spain: The Latinos and Their Culture

In contrast to the African Americans, the Latin Americans kept to the stem of their culture as fast as they could. It was well understood that preserving the culture of a united but small and lacking the influence nation was almost impossible. The dominating culture was supposed to swallow the remaining of the Hispanic traditions and customs, chewing them into the new lifestyle that the Latin Americans could stick to without the risk to be called foreigners.

However, the idea proved wrong, and the Hispanics have introduced the culture that was no less influential and original than the one of the African Americans. The influence of theirs finally became immense and impressive, for the modern tendencies show that more and more people from Europe and America are getting captured with the lifestyle suggested by the Hispanics.

Amazing, but true is the fact that these people have been maintaining the traditions of theirs through the poverty and the misery of their immigrant life. This was something that should be highly appreciated and valued no less than the cultural impact of the African Americans. Again, the clash of cultures drew these two peoples together in a battle.

In a Course of Work: What Kind of Workplace Are They Provided with? The African Americans Employed: Jobs, Salaries and Stakes

Although it is extremely hard for an immigrant, even a legal one, to find a full-time and well-paid job in a foreign country with the people’s prejudice against the foreigners and the lack of the working places even for the native dwellers, not mentioning the newcomers, the African Americans have managed to find their place under the hot sun of the United States.

We will write a custom Essay on Latinos and African Americans: Friends or Foes? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More As a rule, they do not take the leading positions, preferring to do the job of an ordinary officer, like most immigrants do, which is the major concern of the modern business researches in the United States.

There are still some difficulties in the employment sphere for the black people. It goes without saying that the discrimination in the sphere of employment still takes place, not only in the USA, but also in a number of countries where immigrants are to live.

The mistreatment of the foreigners must be rooting somewhere deep in the native dwellers’ psycho, for there is no other explanation why the African Americans should take lower positions and receive less money than an average white American does. Shepard has managed to express this idea in the very best way:

About one-third of African American men are employed in the highest occupational categories: professional, managerial, technical and administrative, whereas about one half of white men have jobs in these categories. Similarly, about 60 percent of African American women are employed in these occupational categories, compared to three-fourth of white women. African Americans are almost twice as whites are likely to work in low-level service jobs. (256)

Such data I something for the sociologists to be concerned about, for this also causes huge rivalry between the African Americans and the Latin Americans concerning the working places. Trying to earn for a decent living, both peoples face huge difficulties and are made to compete in attempt to get the desired job.

The Latinos and Their Ambitions: Time for Siesta

Unlike most of the American people, the Hispanics are not preoccupied with Napoleonic ambitions and career plans. the lifestyle that they lead, which is close to living in a rural area, is quiet sufficient for them, and they are rather unlikely to fight for the post of the president or else.

Still the nation has to find some means to earn for a living, and thus a lot of Latin Americans agree to take the positions that the Native Americans consider as the low-level jobs. This makes the Latinos the main opponents of the African Americans, which are eager to take the above-mentioned positions as well.

As a rule, the Hispanics are left with nothing in this battle, and the African Americans occupy most of the profitable positions. The rivalry peaks here, and the struggle for the better position and for the better future of the people that have been forced to live in the foreign country.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Latinos and African Americans: Friends or Foes? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The recent polls held in this sphere suggest that the situation with the working places for the immigrants can improve; however, still a great amount of time is needed to support the immigrants that cannot survive in the environment that requires the necessary competitive skills.

It is clear that, historically, the people of the Hispanic origin did not need to struggle for the job and earn the money with such difficulties, and it must be taken into account that they need to accommodate to the changing environment. In contrast to the African Americans, who are used to conflict in cases when they do not agree with what have been suggested, the Hispanics would rather grin and bear it, which does not add to the life endurance of these people and the psychological health of their environment.

However, when speaking of the promotion and marketing sphere, one can suggest that the Latin Americans have got quite used to the idea of living in a foreign country and making business in it, for they have achieved a certain progress in building the marketing relationships within the country:

A direct result of the Spanish-language-centered infrastructure of the U.S. Hispanic marketing industry is an ethnic division of labour whereby the Latin American corporate intellectuals from middle- and upper-class background rather than U.S.-born. (Davila 34)

This might seem amazing, but such is the present state of affairs in the Hispanic employment sphere. As it can be seen, the rumors about the Latin Americans not getting enough working places have been a bit exaggerated. However, this does not mean that the problem of employment of the Latin Americans has been solved once and for all. There are still some reasons to think that the battle will go on.

The Aspect of Education: Can the Same Things Be Taught in Different Ways? What the Schools for Latinos Are Aimed at.

Like most schools, the educational establishments on the territory of the Latin America are aimed at giving children the basis for their future higher education and career development. At this point the schools where the Latin American children learn do nit doffer from the rest of the schools in the United States. The difference comes when the role of the bilingual education comes to the forth.

Darder emphasizes the role of the two languages in the education of the Hispanic children, making it one of the core points that make them different from the American children:

Within the last two decades, the issue of the bilingual education has taken on a heated importance among educators. Unfortunately, the debate that has emerged tends to recycle old assumptions and values regarding the meaning and usefulness of the students’ native language in education. (274)

Because of the tension that arises as the two cultures collide, the issue of the languages becomes one of the most heated subjects to discuss. Although the privilege of mastering two native languages seems quiet a profit for the Hispanics, they still cling to their native roots, trying to make the emphasis on preserving the national culture.

Do the U. S. Schools Suit the African American Children?

In contrast to the Hispanics, African Americans do well in mastering English. Since many of them hardly know about the African ancestors of theirs, and are not aware of the language that was spoken in the culture of their native land, the African Americans have no linguistic problems in the schools. However, there are still the issues that make them equal to the Latin Americans in terms of the quality and the results of education.

In fact, the African Americans are almost in the same situation as the Latin Americans in terms of the national identity and the educational systems. Their national peculiarities are ignored in the same way, disregarding everything that makes them different from then Native Americans.

Many teachers and principals state that they have not reformed the curriculum to reflect ethnic diversity in their schools because they do not have ethnic minorities in their school populations and, consequently, no racial or ethnic problems. These educators believe ethnic content is needed only by ethnic minority students or to help reduce ethnic conflict within schools having racial problems. (Willie 137)

Thus, it becomes clear that in the system of education the Latin Americans and the African Americans are not the opponents, but the companions in misfortune.

Through the Social Aspect and What Researchers Found There The African Americans: Reaching for the Stars

However hard the immigrants could try to reach for the highest position in the society, there will always be the native dwellers that will surpass them in some of the aspects. Thus, striving to climb higher is what the Latin Americans and the African Americans have been trying to do since the time when they settled in the new country, but there have been very few positive results of their attempts.

Again, trying to get into the upper classes of the society, the two nations arrange another battle to obtain the best positions. However much scorn the Hispanics could display towards the blessed life of the rich I the USA, they cannot resist trying to nip on the piece of the upper class life.

But the African Americans surpass them in the respect of arranging their lives. Being more accustomed to the traditions and customs of the modern business world, they manage to become the leading part of the society much more often than the Hispanics, who prefer to stay rebels.

There is no need to say that the African Americans are doing their best to gain the access to the higher class society, which is sometimes crowned with success, but in most cases both African Americans and Latinos remain on the same middle class level. However, the data that has been presented so far are too scanty to restore the whole picture:

Researchers may assume a social lass level among the participants such as classifying African Americans or Latinos as urban and therefore in poverty without collecting the necessary data to substantiate this characterization. (Liu 48)

With such characteristics of the state of the African Americans and Latinos in the United States, it is necessary to add that the current situation needs a thorough revision. The results of the latter can seem encouraging for these nations to continue their attempts to belong to the higher class of society. Although they must make hard efforts to achieve this goal, the results must be worthwhile. And, after all, there has always been the need for the people who will push the country towards the progress.

The Latinos: Home, Sweet Home

As Vazquez admits,

Although impressive and important, studies that equate income with social status are nevertheless misleading. Latinos are indeed becoming more socially mobile, but the income numbers also show that 75 percent of Latino households earn below the national median, a proportion that is just as significant if one is interested in understanding the size of a low-wage, low-skilled Latino working class. (394)

With regard to the above-mentioned information, it could be logical to suggest that the approximately equal score on the social position might level the rivalry between the Latin Americans and the African Americans, but this idea proves wrong. The constant battle for the better position and the competition that people are involved into, that is, the contest where the smartest wins, make people’s character harder and more difficult to approach.

What makes the situation not so complicated is the fact that the Latin Americans cannot be called ambitious people, and they are not longing for the top positions. Working in the sphere where their skills can be used and appreciated is what Latin Americans are aimed at, and that makes the conflict between the two nations living as the foreigners on the territory of the United States not so escalated.

Conclusion Regarding everything that has been mentioned above, it is possible to suggest that the tension between the two neighboring nations, African Americans and Latin Americans, is bound to last fro quite long period of time.

Because of the fact that they are actually experiencing the same difficulties, Latin Americans and African Americans will remain rivals, although they have a lot in common which could allow them to be friends, not foes. Instead of competing with each other to prove the superiority, they could struggle to achieve success together, yet they prefer to stay apart from each other.

The reasons for these nations to treat each other in this way can be different. Perhaps, one of the most important and weighty ones is that both nations are afraid of their cultures merging the way they have merged with the American one.

To keep their traditions untouched as long as possible, they prefer to maintain the relationships that allow them to coexist, but they are both reluctant to make friends and improve the situation within the sphere of education and employment. However, there is a link that might help these two peoples finally make friends. Called Caribbean Latinos, they are a mixture of the two. As Suarez puts it,

Certainly the shared Afro-Latino background that tends to distinguish them most within the pan-Latino composite, along with the attendant complementary relationship to blackness, promises to have unifying repercussions within the U.S. racial formation, where the significance of the color line seems to be in no way declining. (71)

In the light of the above-mentioned, there is still hope that the two great nations will find common language. Because of numerous factors the Latinos and the Afro-Americans have to get together to become stronger. In spite of all the obstacles that stand on the way to this union, there is hope that in the nearest future the Afro-Americans and the Latinos will build the relationships based on cooperation and mutual respect.

Works Cited Bailey, Anne C. African Voices of the Atlantic Slave Trade: Beyond the Silence and the Shame. Boston, MA: Beacon Press, 2005. Print.

Darder, Antonia, Rodolfo D. Torres, Henry Gutierre. Latinos and Education: A Critical Reader. New York, NY: Routledge, 1997. Print.

Davila, Arlene. Latinos, Inc.: The Marketing and Making of a People. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press, 2001. Print.

Liu, William M. Social Class and Classicism in the Helping Professions: Research, Theory and Practice. Thousand Oaks, CA: Corvin Press, 2010. Print.

Shepard, Jon M. Sociology. Stamford, CT: Cengage Learning, 2009. Print.

Suarez-Orozco, Marcelo, Mariela Parez. Latinos: Remaking America. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press, 2008. Print.

Vazquez, Francisco H., Rodolfo D. Torres. Latino Thought. Lanham, MD: Rowman


Guide for better meetings Report best college essay help: best college essay help

Meetings are regarded as one of the best ways of achieving several activities at once. In one meeting, the leader can pass his or her information, identify challenges, find solutions, and make the final decision. To have better results of any meeting, it’s advisable to follow some steps when conducting it. Productive meetings require good and early planning, positive attitude, a purpose, and a committed leader. This paper will discuss the steps to be followed to have an effective meeting, and meeting leadership.

Before a person leads a meeting, there are some leadership responsibilities he or she should fulfill for the meeting to be effective. Meeting leadership requires one to conduct thorough research on the requirement of the organization, and be aware of the best result that can be obtained in a meeting.

When this research is done, then the meeting can be called (Bell and Smith 98). Sometimes if the main theme of calling the meeting is just passing certain information, the leader can as well find other ways of communicating this. Meeting should only be called when there is a dire need for communication.

The other responsibility of a meeting leader is to be prepared. Thorough preparation of the meeting is required from the time the attendees are informed to the time of conducting the meeting. The leader has a responsibility of informing his or her team about the meeting at least 48 hours before the time of starting the meeting.

Let the attendees be aware of the meeting purpose before they gather for discussion. The third important responsibility to be accountable in meeting leadership is for the leader to be strong and someone with acceptance in him or her (Bell and Smith 463).

The strength of the leader should be demonstrated when planning for the meeting, when deciding the most appropriate format, and his or her emphasis on the meeting agenda. Acceptance is applied by involving the attendees to contribute freely in the discussion. This should not be dictated by the position of the meeting leader, but should be open to all the participants.

The leader should apply tactics of inviting input from all the attendees, and filter the ideas of those people who like talking too much. By doing this, everyone in the meeting will have a chance to contribute and be heard by the rest.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More To begin with, the meeting leader should decide in advance both mission and vision of the meeting before tabling it. This includes the main purpose of the meeting at that very moment and the future perspective of it (Streibel 51). The meeting leader should have all this written down to avoid any confusion during the meeting.

Being the leader, one cannot handle the meeting alone, so the next step is to decide who will be taking the minutes during discussion. The next step is for the leader to define the needed people in the meting. He or she should ensure that all parties are represented; this enables all the grievances to be tabled without favoring a certain group.

Let the meeting leader as well decide the starting time of the meeting and the ending time. This helps in fully utilizing the available time for the meeting and tackling of all agendas (Streibel 21). After deciding the time, the leader should write down the meeting agendas, mission and vision of the meeting, beginning and ending time, the people expected to attend, and any other relevant information and pre-distribute to the attendees.

The venue of the meeting should also be included on this paper. Giving the attendees the meeting agenda in advance, prepares them psychologically on the matters to be discussed thus very active in contributing the ideas. While setting up the venue, a spacious and comfortable room would be the best.

A conducive atmosphere in the room would be necessary to give the attendants chance to interact. Suitable refreshment should be provided to avoid boredom in the room. We assume now the day has arrived for the meeting and it’s the time for it to begin.

The meeting leader should greet and welcome people to the meeting. Incases where it’s the first meeting and people are not familiar with one another an individual self-introduction should be done shortly (Bell and Smith 130). This brings in the aspect of socializing among the attendees, as they have known each other.

The next step is opening the floor by a short speech that should include matters like, all ideas are good, anyone is free to disagree with any suggested idea with a reason behind, thus making everyone free to propose or oppose according to his or her wishes.

We will write a custom Report on Guide for better meetings specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This now comes the time for the leader to go through the agenda items one after the other. After mentioning the first agenda, the leader should invite different views from the attendees and creativity. Incase there is any need of demonstration; there should be enough room for doing it to enhance good results. The responsibility of the leader should be to list all the ideas on a board where everyone can see, but the name of the person who contributed should not be included.

Later the ideas with the least gaps and have higher chances of succeeding should be agreed upon by the leader and his or her team in the meeting. Incase there is still some information needed, the leader should come up with a group of people among the attendees to follow up (Streibel 32). If a decision have been made also set a group to prepare a report to be brought back to the meeting.

At this point some action items should be identified, to have the first priority in the next meeting. As the meeting leader approaches the terminal of his or her meeting, some time should be preserved for anyone with questions. All the ideas that have been discussed should be summarized and be read to the people.

Before closing the meeting, follow up is a very important aspect that should never be forgotten. The meeting leader should take his or her time alone to evaluate the whole meeting. Its time to tick what worked out and what is still calling for some improvements. Through the use of the minute written another document should be generated to give a full description of the meeting (Bell and Smith 418).

This can be achieved by use of negative or positive comments, posing questions, criticizing, and recommending ensuring that document is of quality. When he or she is through with this, all the participants should be given a copy each. Keeping an eye on the progress of the next moves is also very crucial. These items take the place of next meetings agenda number one. The leader can now thank everyone for participating and actively contributing to the discussion and close the meeting.

Works Cited Bell, Arthur and Smith, Dayle. Management Communication, (2nd ed), ISBN0471755249, 9780471755241, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2005.

Streibel, Barbara. Plan and Conduct Effective Meetings: 24 Steps to Generate Meaningful Results, ISBN0071498311, 9780071498319, McGraw-Hill Professional, New York, 2007.


The Concept of Competition on the Market Term Paper college admissions essay help

Table of Contents Introduction




Introduction Hayek (103) believes that when economists overemphasize the importance of perfect competition, they are actually ignoring the solution when the situation is imperfect. In fact, the concept of competition is even more important when the market is imperfect so they should strive at offering a solution to that situation.

Competition A good solution to an economic problem should be one that gives answers to problems as they are and not as they should be. To this end, any prescriptions that start from the situation as it should be would not be very useful. For instance, in perfect competition, it is assumed that the products and services in the market are identical.

However, this is quite untrue in reality; people’s needs and knowledge vary tremendously so suppliers must respond by offering heterogeneous products. Additionally, human skills will keep varying from time to time with a high number of them changing for the better.

This means that the nature of services and goods will also alter in response to these skills changes. In essence, no two doctors can ever be the same and the services they offer may not always be the same. Therefore, studying a theory that assumes these doctors to be the same would be very appropriate academically but would not be very useful in the real economic environment.

Hayek (106) believes that competition is all about the spread of information. If people are aware of the possibilities within a certain market then they will be motivated to make efficient use of the resources. However, for that to happen, then the information being taken around must be constantly altered.

Economists advocate for a theory that presumes that these factors do not change and this defies the very essence of competition. In this regard, it may not be wise for economists to continue depending on the perfect competition model which must always leave all factors constant.

In order to place a certain argument in context, it is always crucial to understand the agents involved in the matter and time frame affecting them (McNulty, 81). For example, economic theories and models were created and propagated by certain individuals who analyze their economic environments within a certain timeframe. In essence, what this implies is that the theories they had created may have ceased to be relevant because the times and the environments they were analyzing may have altered.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Human behavior is never really constant so certain theories may soon become outdated or passed with time. Hayek’s argument that competition is always altering indicates that most of the information collected by economists would simply be outdated even within the span of one day. This casts doubt on a perfect competition model that presupposes no change in the market (Rizoo


Instructions Analyze the case and opinion in Keith v. County of Oakland, 2013 U.S. App. LEXIS 595 (6th Cir.) located Essay essay help: essay help

Instructions Analyze the case and opinion in Keith v. County of Oakland, 2013 U.S. App. LEXIS 595 (6th Cir.) located in your textbook on pp. 337-342. Write a case study review of Judge Griffin’s opinion that answers the questions below. Support your review with analysis and evidence from the unit reading and outside sources. What are the legal issues presented in this case? Did the plaintiff establish a valid claim of failure to reasonably accommodate? What did the appeals court decide? What accommodations was Keith requesting? Was it reasonable? Support your opinion with an argument based on the course concepts and existing legal evidence or precedents. Did the county follow the interactive process required by the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)? What did they do well? What could they have done differently? Your paper should be a minimum of two pages, not including the title and reference pages. You are required to use a minimum of three sources, one of which may be your textbook as reference material for your case study. Adhere to APA Style when constructing this assignment, including in-text citations and references for all sources that are used. Please note that no abstract is needed. This Case Study Example provided by the CSU Writing Center shows this type of formatting.


The Tale of Genji Analytical Essay essay help

Introduction The Tale of Genji is an ancient Japanese writing credited to the Japanese novelist Murasaki Shikibu in the early 11th century. The book is sometimes referred to as the world’s first novel and its specific classification and influence in both the eastern and western cultures has been a subject of dispute. It was originally written in court Japanese but has undergone several translations to date, even undergoing a translation into modern Japanese as the original language was too complex to be comprehended by average Japanese.

Plot Genji narrates the life of a son of a Japanese royal leader, referred to as Hikaru Genji. Genji is demoted to a commoner status on political grounds and starts an occupation as an imperial official. The account focuses on Genji’s romantic life and illustrates the conventions of the aristocratic society of this period, a lot is referred to in relation to Genji’s attractiveness.

Genji was the second child of some ancient royal leader and a low-grade mistress, known as Lady Kiritsubo. His mother passes on when Genji is only three. Genji’s father then gets to know of a lady (Lady Fujitsubo), previously a princess of the former emperor, who bears resemblance to his dead mistress, he later marries her. Genji falls in love with his stepmother, against tradition. Genji is upset due to his illegal love to Lady Fujitsubo and is on a collision course with his wife. He also has affairs with other women and in most of these cases, his advances are met with repulsion, the woman he loves dies, or the woman is boring.

Genji makes a trip to the rural area of Kyoto where he finds an attractive ten-year-old girl (Murasaki) and learns that she is a niece of Lady Fujitsubo. He abducts her, brings her to his palace, and trains her to be his wife. Genji continues to meet Lady Fujitsubo secretly and they have a son together. Everyone except the two believes the boy is the emperor’s son. The boy later becomes the prince and Fujitsubo becomes the Empress.

Genji and his wife resolve their dispute and she bears a son, but he dies soon. Genji is distressed , but is comforted by Murasaki, who becomes his wife. Genji’s father passes on and his political rivals transfer power to the courts. Genji is later exiled to a nearby town (Suma) when he is found secretly meeting a mistress of his brother. While in Suma, Genji has an affair with a woman who bears him a daughter- his only daughter.

The Emperor forgives Genji and he returns to Kyoto, and his son with Fujitsubo assumes the position of emperor. The new Emperor recognizes that Genji is his actual father and promotes him to the highest position possible.

Genji’s life begins to collapse when he turns 40. He marries another woman and this changes his relationship with Murasaki, who now desires to be a nun. Murasaki passes on.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In the subsequent chapter, Maboroshi, Genji considers how short life is. The next chapter, Kumogakure, is left blank and symbolizes Genji’s demise. The rest of the chapters focus on Niou and Kaoru, who are close friends. Niou is a royal prince while Kaoru is identified by people as Genji’s son but the real father is Genji’s nephew. The two are fighting over several daughters of a royal prince in Uji, a far-off town. The story ends suddenly, with Kaoru wondering if Niou is hiding the woman he adores.


Fiscal Policy and Monetary Policy Essay essay help online

Fiscal policy is one of the principles that are employed by a government to generate revenue thus prevent the decline in economy. It relies on taxation and spending. The government prevents the decline in economy by regulating interest rates and circulation of market.

Decline in economy may be due to imbalance between the government revenue and the way that money is spent. When the economy is balanced there is no need of having a fiscal policy. This means that the expenditure of that government is sustained by the revenues collected by the government.

According to Blanchard (2000), the economy is most likely to decline when the rate of unemployment increases because the government is not able to collect adequate taxes from employees’ salaries. To rectify this problem the government should persuade investors to come and do business in that country because by doing so the government will benefit from the taxations that will be imposed on employees and imported goods.

In addition to that, the foreigners will bring more foreign currency which will be exchanged with the local currency thus the demand for local currency will hike and therefore increase the value of the local currency. Thus, sectors like tourism generate more income when most tourists are people from other countries.

There are several ways through which the government can obtain money for running its daily routines. These options are the backbone of monetary policy, in which the government tries to control the supply of money hence boosting the economy. The first option is to issue treasury bonds that allow individuals to lend their money to the government for some time. The individuals will on the other hand reap the benefits of retrieving the profits that accumulate at the end of each month while the initial amount is left untouched (Mishkin, 2004).

The shortest time that a treasury bond can last is sixty days but the period can still be extended. Actually treasury bonds are preferred by most investors because they provide low risk investment. The government has to ensure the money obtained from creditors is used for the intended purposes only or else incur more losses beyond recovery.

Secondly, the government can sell some of its properties to generate revenue. This includes possessions such as vehicles, houses and land. The sale of these properties is done through public auctions where several people who are interested in buying the same property are requested to quote their respective price tag. The bidder who quotes the highest price is allowed to walk away with the property. The money obtained from the sale of government properties is then injected into the economy through various sectors.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Selling of these properties does not only generate income for the government but also reduces government spending. For instance a government may decide to trim the motorcade of its cabinet ministers in order to save on fuel consumption. Every cabinet minister is allocated a few vehicles that do not consume more fuel.

Additionally land owned by the government may be sold to a potential real estate investor to help in solving the problem of inadequate housing instead of leaving it idle. Most people prefer to buy properties that are owned by the government because they are considered to be relatively cheap as opposed to those sold by individuals (Heijra


The Geological composition of Larimar Research Paper college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Introduction The essay is critical examination of Larimar. The paper will bring forth the geological composition Larimar, the importance and uniqueness, reason why it should be appreciated as well as the value of the same in USD. Larimar is in the family pectolite. It is characterized by hardness of between 4.5 and 5.

The color usually ranges from white, deep blue light blue, sky blue to green blue. The crystal system of Larimar is triclinic (Websters 2). Larimar was discovered by Mendez back in 1974. Mendez decided on the name after joining factoring in the name of her daughter Larisa and Mar which is Spanish word referring to the sea.

Geological composition of Larimar It is worth noting that the chemical composition (geological) of Larimar is made up of odium silicate hydroxide (NaCa2Si3O8 (OH)). It is composed of largely pectolite, the chemical composition is acidic. The formation is coined to volcanic rocks of Miocene period where andesites as well as basalts did erupt within limestone. More over, Larimar do have vugs which constitute a number of other important mineral aside pectolite.

It is important to note that the pectolite fillings were secondarily occurring within the flow as result of the eruption. Due to erosion, the pectolite were washed downwards toward alluvium and gravels along the beach. A river well known as Bahoruco did carry the sediments that contain pectolite into the sea. The action of tumbling during the transportation of the sediment resulted to the blue color of Larimar (Woodruff 21).

Although it has been fond in Bahamas, Larimar is a typical material found in the Central Republic of Caribbean. Two main locations where it is found are Los Checheses and Bahoruco Range. Since pectolite is a rock and it is what constitutes Larimar, this thus means that it has more set of minerals.

Importance Larimar is an important resource that has been and need to be appreciated due to its uniqueness and use. This stone has been widely used in jewelry or ornamental purposes as well as in semi-precious market. Additionally, it is worth noting that in the past, the stone provided artists with a medium in which they could express their ideas. Since it was a durable material, this meant that such piece of art could be available after several years (Carlson et al. 234).

On the same note, it should be appreciated and opt to be as a result of its healing properties. The local of Central Republic especially in Bahoruco believe that Larimar can heal ease the pain as a result of inflammation, curb fever as well as reducing heat of sunburn. Additionally, the precious stone is seen as a radiant of love, peace, joy as well as clarity thus need to be used by individuals who are under depression.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Value The value of Larimar varies greatly but on the basis of size, weight and shape. Records reveal that the cheapest cost $ 5.00 while the most expensive is $138.05. The two main categories of Larimar are round and oval. The table below summarizes the value of Larimar;

Table 1. Value of Round and Oval Larimar

Round Larimar (size, mm) Weight(Carats) Color Price 13.70 7.75 Mottled Blue $46.50 45×20 Slab Mottled Blue $18.75 Oval Larimar 9.7×13.5 – Mottled Blue $5.00 10×8 /- – ” $8.25 12×10 – ” $12.00 13.5×9.4 4.35 ” $39.15 13.9×9.9 8.00 ” $24.00 17.7×13 13.50 ” $40.50 23×14.3 15.45 ” $138.05 Source. Carlson, Diane, Plummer, Charles


Proposal Modeled on Swift’s Modest Problem Solution Essay essay help site:edu

China has been the most highly populated country in the world for innumerable years. Its population on December 1st 2010 was approximately 1,355,033,812 (Population of China 2010 n. p.). From a head count of almost 660 million in 1961, the figure rose rapidly and crossed the one billion mark between 1981 and ’82 (Population of China 2010 n. p.).

Interestingly, the increase in population in the two decades within a 1961-1981period (approximately 340 million or 17 million per year) is more or less equal to the increase in the subsequent three decades between 1981-’82 and 2010 (approximately 355 million at only 12 million per year). It may be surmised that some measures were put into place around 1980 to control the burgeoning birth rate to over 12 million births per year.

China had been through a traumatic lustrum immediately after its famine in 1962, in which a reported figure of 30 million citizens died of starvation. People learned by default how to manage with limited resources and it dawned upon them that their biggest problem lay in the large numbers of mouths to feed.

On their own, they started reducing the size of their hitherto huge families. Chairman Mao, leader of People’s Republic of China, latched on this trend and came out in favor of small families, particularly because China was just about finding its global feet post-famine nearing the 1970s (Li 446). However, the Chinese people’s pace of reducing family size was relatively slow.

Facing wide-ranging socio-economic problems linked with overpopulation, Chinese authorities resorted to diverse methods to keep population under control (Cook n. d.). As assessed above, “China started the one child per family policy officially in 1979” (Cook n. p.). Families were offered various incentives to limit their offspring to one.

“Stiff punishments were threatened to deter families from procreating more than one child, like fifty percent income tax, withdrawal of jobs or other benefits, forced medical termination of unauthorized pregnancies” (Cook n. p.) and other draconian measures.

“Chinese preference for male offspring showed up as a huge number of cases of female infanticide” (Cook n. p.). In a study called The Ratio of Males to Females in China, the Chinese, like Indians and many other Asians, “prefer sons to daughters outright” (Liu


Imperialism or National Protection: What is the Definition of the United States of America? Essay cheap essay help: cheap essay help

What is the Definition of the United States of America? Imperialism and national protection resemble intertwined terms where the United States of America is concerned. This essay looks at two key speeches made by the U.S. presidents Harry S. Truman during the Cold War, and George W. Bush during the first Iraq war. In these documents we witness the definition of the United States, specifically, how the United States defines itself, how it sees itself as a country, and how it views itself as a member nation of planet earth.

The United States protects its own interests, namely, resources such as oil, as well as the democratic political system, and this protectionism extends to the four corners of the earth. Foreign policy is national security, and vice versa. Where the United States is concerned, borders, and the right of nations to govern its peoples as they see fit, remain lip service items.

Let us begin with the Truman speech. The Truman Doctrine was delivered on the 12th of March, 1947, before a Joint Session of the United States Congress. Since Truman’s time, and likely before, the United States has adopted a father knows best attitude toward the rest of the world.

The United States believes that it speaks for the world, and it feels beholden to look after the world. How much of this paternalism stems from self protection? All of it. Interestingly, however, in Truman’s words, “one of the primary objectives of the foreign policy of the United States is the creation of conditions in which we and other nations will be able to work out a way of life free from coercion. This was a fundamental issue in the war with Germany and Japan.

Our victory was won over countries which sought to impose their will, and their way of life, upon other nations” (Truman 4). The irony of this statement, in light of the constant and unrelenting interference that the United States subjects numerous nations all over the world to on a daily basis, appears lost on Truman.

Truman’s speech points to one of the core tenets of the self image of the United States; colloquially, the United States defines itself as the world’s dad, in the traditional sense. It sets the rules, and it enforces the rules. The Communist threat that Truman spoke to in the Truman Doctrine was couched in terms that impressed upon Congress that the issue facing a small Mediterranean country somehow affected the United States.

In Truman’s words, “the very existence of the Greek state is today threatened by the terrorist activities of several thousand armed men, led by Communists, who defy the government’s authority at a number of points, particularly along the northern boundaries” (Truman 2). Central to the self image of the United States is the idea that other countries of the world seek their guidance and protection, which speaks to the paternalistic attitude the United States leads with in its foreign policy.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Truman speaks to the legitimizing effect that Americans have on the political processes that take place in other countries when he points to the “692 Americans [who] considered this election to be a fair expression of the views of the Greek people” (Truman 3). Certainly, the United States does not recognize its own domineering nature, and thus feels no need to correct it.

Rather, the United States tends to justify its actions as necessary, Truman details, because “the free peoples of the world look to us for support in maintaining their freedoms. If we falter in our leadership, we may endanger the peace of the world. And we shall surely endanger the welfare of this nation” (Truman 6). Foreign policy as national security, though self serving, appears to be genuinely rendered.

In 1991 George W. Bush addressed the people of the United States from the Oval Office to announce and contextualize the commencement of military actions against Saddam Hussein following the invasion of Kuwait by Iraqi forces. In this speech, Bush exhibits a little more care than Truman to present the case for war as having been decided via consensus with other nations, and only after the exhaustion of all other avenues:

This military action, taken in accord with United Nations resolutions and with the consent of the United States Congress, follows months of constant and virtually endless diplomatic activity on the part of the United Nations, the United States, and many, many other countries. Arab leaders sought what became known as an Arab solution, only to conclude that Saddam Hussein was unwilling to leave Kuwait….Our Secretary of State, James Baker, held a historic meeting in Geneva, only to be totally rebuffed (…290).

Bush also carefully asserts that “our goal is not the conquest of Iraq. It is the liberation of Kuwait,” and reminds the American public that “this will not be another Vietnam” (Bush 292). Bush elucidates that Saddam’s actions forced the hand of the world. “The world could wait no longer. Sanctions, though having some effect, showed no signs of accomplishing their objective…While the world waited, Saddam Hussein systematically raped, pillaged and plundered a tiny nation, not threat to his own” (Bush 291).

Bush also paints the United States as an equal member in this large team of concerned international interests, when he highlights that “twenty-eight nations – countries from five continents Europe and Asia, Africa, and the Arab League – have forces in the Gulf standing shoulder to shoulder against Saddam Hussein” (Bush 292).

The Bush speech also contains an interesting tactic. To address the issue of oil, widely understood to be the main reason why the United States became involved in the first place, Bush employs a sympathetic and highly credible source as his mouthpiece: the soldiers themselves:

We will write a custom Essay on Imperialism or National Protection: What is the Definition of the United States of America? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Listen to Hollywood Huddleston, marine lance corporal. He says, “Let’s free these people, so we can go home and be free again.”…Listen to one of our great officers out there, Marine Lieutenant General Walter Boomer. He said, “There are things worth fighting for.

A world in which brutality and lawlessness are allowed to go unchecked isn’t the kind of world we’re going to want to live in.” Listen to Master Sergeant J.P. Kendall of the 82nd Airborne: “We’re here for more than the price of a gallon of gas. What we’re doing is going to chart the future of the world for the next 100 years (Bush 292).

In the United States, imperialism and national protection essentially complement each other, and function as synergistic terms. The United States protects its own interests worldwide, as opposed to within its own borders. Foreign policy is national security, and vice versa. The right of free nations to govern themselves remains conditional upon United States’ approval.

Works Cited Bush, George. “Address to the Nation Announcing Allied Military Action in the Persian Gulf.” America Through the Eyes of Its People, Vol. 2. 3rd ed. Boston: Pearson Longman, 2006. 290-293. Print.

Truman, Harry S. “The Truman Doctrine.” America Through the Eyes of Its People, Vol. 2. 3rd ed. Boston: Pearson Longman, 2006. 1-6. Print.


Social Networking and Marketing Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Table of Contents Technical Communication

Challenges of Social Network Marketing

Costs and Benefits of Social Networks to Marketers

Potential Clients and Products for Social Network Marketing

Social Network Populace


Works Cited

Technical Communication Social networks sites have attracted interest of most goods and services marketers, for the reason that there are quite a couple of benefits for a firm that invests in the systems. Social-Interactive and online marketing is quickly gaining focus and is thus gaining good publicity among most contemporary marketing strategies.

The amount of sales in this form of marketing is often the unit for measuring performance. The huge number of socials sites users makes the strategy a preference, therefore, the increase on amount of transactions generated through social networks marketing. This is attributable to the capability and effectiveness of the social sites (Plummer et al, p.33).

Challenges of Social Network Marketing Information security is the biggest challenge this firms faces because as technology advances, the ability to cope effectively with today’s security threats in social sites such as web hacking to steal consumer identity, and other internet disruptions also incarcerates the freedom of usage.

Virtual networks or social networks marketing face insecurity-related complexities and slowness in progression because clients are keener to clarify viability before venturing into any form of transaction. Risks involved in virtual transactions or commitments causes a huge threat especially to vibrant sites such as Face-book, MySpace, twitter, linked-In or emails servers, since they necessitate submission of personal information.

Before investing in social networks marketing, it is important for any firm to consider incorporation of proper information security strategies. In order to have effective business alliances there is need for security of Information.

There are possible instances of insecurity, for instance recent Google and Yahoo security attacks in China. This requires major investments on security measures in protection of such risks including loss of patent laws, compromised integrity or loss of data and change of personal information by malicious people or fraudsters.

The future of marketing through social network sites requires great support from government regulations and business policies or requirements. There is urgent need to quantify the sites’ information security as a competitive advantage. Regulations also make the customers to feel comfortable transacting in such firms and provide a legal platform in case of violations.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Costs and Benefits of Social Networks to Marketers According to (Wimmer and Dominick, p.33), social networks are generating a lot of enthusiasm among majority of internet users, especially the youth and interaction procedures are equally advancing at a very high rate.

Today, marketing firms engage in this interactive form of advertisement to meet customers’ needs, market new products as well as ensure constant business growth. Leisure is a strong advantage to the advertisers since they are able to find and capture attention of most people easily; particularly those who are better off financially and have the will to spend.

Social networks marketing also offer remarkable easiness of client participation through interactive marketing. Most firms prefer such form of networked marketing, since there are high rates for diversification. Marketers are able to adjust quickly to the market conditions and are in a position of easily building relationship with clients through easy procedures at lowest cost possible.

Some of the benefits to the customer include convenience, ability to gain extensive information and direct or online engagement with suppliers means few or no strain associable to need for persuasion during trade.

Social network sites are able to provide data that relate to a company’s decision to venture into a certain market. The sites also provide chances for diversification of the market niche and profitable opportunities for marketing both internationally and locally.

By viewing the interactions, profiles and comments, the marketers are able to note significant aspects of the market such as local and international purchasing powers thus engage strategies that would elevate sales (Cooper et al, p.104). Today, the advertisement or marketing trends have changed from the physical seller to buyer interaction to the automated social advertising trends (Cooper et al, p.104).

Vibrant advertising is crucial in the efforts to get in touch with customers. This is the reason why face-to-face advertisement has been very effective as a concrete reference measure since as time in history. Social sites such as facebook or twitter have become the current modernized word of mouth.

We will write a custom Essay on Social Networking and Marketing specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Most social sites users share the purchasing experience with close friends or family members. The friendly advice on either the good and bad aspects of a product is a measure of protecting each other from unfavourable products or exploitations, but eventually adds up as a marketing tool. The procedure of informing each other within the social forums helps the business to grow. It is equally a fast way of marketing new and reliable products, since people recommend them during normal interactions in the social sites.

The benefits of social-sites marketing strategies are wide, but having a few advertisement aspects or pages on social sites is an excellent strategy for enhancing sales. The firms also need to invest heavily on security since the possibility of gaining unsavoury reputation is easy due to promotions that lack proper branding.

The main drive behind use of social sites advertising ought to be achievement of business growth (Cooper et al, p.107). Beside the fun involved, one of the many benefits for marketing through in social sites for the company would be to garner popularity. The strategy has to attract attention in relation to products or services. Social sites enable the marketer to customize information and capture the attention of specific category of audience.

The marketer is also able to divert from the common advertisement strategies and build relationship with potential clients or give extra information to market the company as a whole. When the readers know more about the company, they gunner confidence, trust and embrace the opportunity to know more. Making the company’s sites interactive attracts the attention of potential clients every time they are online, because they confidently enjoy any new posting of new models.

A company that advertises on social sites also benefits from the ability to form a forum of friends, and use social network pages to add new friends to the social forum. Attractive marketing article and new information provides an attractive feature for most people, this means that the company is able to capture more and maintain potential clients as social friends easily.

The ability to use the social sites in providing clients with links to more information about the company is equally an advantage of using the social pages. Persuasive and encouraging marketing strategies are additional and easy strategies to utilize in social sites or pages. Companies are able to avail the latest information about the business and bolster the list of amazing friends, who will equally act as marketing entities for this style of social marketing strategy (O’Guinn et al, p.18).

Potential Clients and Products for Social Network Marketing The internet mainly captures attention of the young and middle-aged potential clients, who are dynamic and thus open-minded to capture any new ideas available from the virtual world.

There is a significant increase on the number of people using the internet. According to Wimmer and Dominick (p.33), most people have access to the internet today either at schools, social centres, cyber cafes or at the comfort of their homes or offices and are hence potential clients.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Social Networking and Marketing by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Most of the common or more appropriate products for online trade include books, computers, software, computer accessories, gifts, food products and cars. Merchandises like cars and the spares are often not available for consumers within the local markets.

The online purchasing provides ease of purchase, convenience, facility to compare product lines, ability to compare prices and easy way of paying (Wimmer and Dominick, p.34). It is therefore easy to capture attention of potential client through the social sites as opposed to other forms of advertising. This is a clear indication that companies are able to realize better returns due to low marketing costs and more sales.

Social Network Populace A firm is able to enhance growth of the number of potential clients enormously by having advertisement pages on social network sites. Currently, social network sites are the favourite social networking forums, thus the best preference for marketers.

The procedure of using social network sites pages to market products and services has to take the natural style meant for social sites, which is to reveal the business through building relationships. Today, social network sites have over 200 million global users, thus the reason why this is an appealing market niche (O’Guinn et al, p.18).

Already thousands of marketers in different fields use social network sites pages for their marketing reasons, but majority of them are amateurish Junk-mails distributors. Such kind of informal advertising and over commercialization is prone to affect usage in future, for instance if one keeps on finding interrupting adverts. The meaning of social sites face compromise and therefore people with a main aim of connecting to friends, associates and families will pull back from usage.

Conclusion As good marketer, aims at using the latest and widely embraced technology, to capture attention of the audience into their profiles. This step assists potential clients to learn and relate to the firm. People interested in social sites have interest in finding background information of the company beside the products. There is equally a need to search for categories or marketing groups or environments that portray general interests.

Social sites also provide groupings of people with similar fields of interest where it is easy to share knowledge and new content regarding latest or particular products or services, for instance women are generally interested in beauty products and share various similarities. This means that it is easy for a marketing firm to capture large attention easily. It is also possible to share content among friends who maybe potential clients.

These strategies assist in reaching almost the entire network of millions of subscribers within the shortest time possible. Unless marketers are able to maintain socialization and creation of social groups as the main purpose of social sites, majority of their advertising strategies will compromise the sites and prevent people from frequent access, since they will aim at avoiding the interruptions.

Works Cited Cooper, Scott. Grutzner, Fritz and Cooper Birk. Tips and Traps for Marketing Your Business. New York, NY: McGraw-Hill Inc. 2008.

Plummer, Joe. Rappaport, Steve.


Critical Evaluation of Self, God and Other Philosophical Phenomena Essay (Critical Writing) a level english language essay help

I am aware that I am a mortal being that exists in a constantly changing world alongside other beings. The fact that I am human differentiates me from other non human beings though there are some aspects that we share. I exhibit noesis; a capacity to sense what goes around me, hence understand what is going on in my surroundings.

It is through his faculty that I am able to be conscious of all forms, tangible or intangible that I come across. Perception and reasoning allows me to have a world view (weltanschauung) which is apparent in my syntactic association with all things that I perceive. I pursue eudemonia after considering what is right or wrong, good or evil (ethics).

I consider God to be an all knowing, omnipresent, and omnipotent being who is perfect and unlike us, does not change. This view of God is not so divergent from the one held by Plato who considered God to be intangible and impersonal.

I believe that God is orderly and I therefore attribute the order that is prevalent in the world to his power. It is the same power, in my view, that brought the universe in to being from the void that existed before then. This view concurs with the one held by Plato as he was against negative depiction of God; he postulated that God was pious and divine.

In my view, evil comes from the devil’s manipulation of man. Devil takes advantage of imperfections of man and drives a wedge between him and God resulting to his disgrace. Probably this implies that God is to some extent responsible for presence of evil since he is the one who configured man with his imperfections and fails to reign in the devil who manipulates man

Questions Epistemology-What do I know?

Epistemology is concerned with what knowledge is, how it is structured, its characteristics, frontiers and how it is acquired. I seek knowledge continuously through for instance personal inquiry, practice and education.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Logic-What is a valid argument?

An argument becomes valid if its conclusion is logically derived from true premises.

Metaphysics-What is reality?

It is concerned with the basic character or nature of being. Things are not always what they seem to be; some appearances may be deceptive while some may end up being real while they are thought to be invalid.

Ontology-Who am I? / What am I?

I am a human being. A human being is a mortal being that exists, has an intellect and uses his wisdom to try and overcome limitations that characterize him.

Axiology-What is good value?

We will write a custom Critical Writing on Critical Evaluation of Self, God and Other Philosophical Phenomena specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Value is the worth that is assigned to an object or phenomena. Something is said to be of good value if it exhibits harmony and beauty or has been arrived at through the right way.

Ethics-What is the aim of life?

Ethics is concerned with morality in life; a distinction between good from evil, right from wrong and vice from virtue. While living, human beings concern themselves with doing what is just, good and right.


Chocolat by Joanne Harris and The Edible Woman by Margaret Atwood: Discussing the Relations Between Food and Family, Friends, and Comminity Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Both stories under consideration – Chocolat by Joanne Harris and The Edible Woman by Margaret Atwood – disclose the primary importance of food as measurement of character’s thoughts, emotions, and feelings. Hence, food is the main amplifier and triggering point in family relations, specifically in relations between a man and a woman.

In both novels, food serves as means for breaking conventional norms in society and for distorting the main underpinnings of stereotypical thinking. However, there are some substantial discrepancies in perceiving the role food and its relation to human relations and society.

Particularly, the novel Chocolat by Joanne Harris presents food as a symbol of temptation and desire which brings a splash of color and luxury to the town. Food serves to provoke feelings and helps villagers to evade from routine. In contrast, Atwood presents food as the purpose for analyzing human’s negative qualities and emphasizes consumerist tendencies in the novel. The main heroine, hence, is more absorbed with existential problems when identifying herself with edible commodity.

Both novels present food as an indicator of gender roles and sexuality. However, these considerations are presented in various connotations. Hence, in Chocolat, confectionary symbolizes the revival of sexuality and gender considerations.

The main heroine, Vianne Rocher, a chocolate maker, is presented in apposition to Francis Reynaud, a priest who is trying to suppress human fleshly desires and who impels the villagers to keep Lent (Harris 10). However, Vianne’s mysterious appearance in the village revives the celebration of taste and imbues people with sense of life. In this regard, food is associated as a gift of love and understanding. It helps people re-evaluate their positions in society.

In Atwood’s novel The Edible Woman, food serves to reject gender roles. In particular, Marian refuses to eat because she is afraid of the responsibilities of being a woman. Marians perceives everything through the prism of consumption. So, when she describes Peter’s apartment she assimilates all details of the rooms through food and related notions such as “assimilation” and “digestion” (Atwood 36).

In the same way, she refers to society that similarly processes women and converts them into more “digestible” forms. In this regard, Marian’s refusal is viewed as a protest to be assimilated and digested by domesticity. Nevertheless, despite the discrepancies presented in both works, they still present gender and identity crisis.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In both novels, food personified character’s thoughts, judgments, and needs, but differently. Hence, Harris’s protagonists, Vianne Rocher perceives life as being full of colors, bright impressions where chocolate is one of means for imbuing mere existence with unforgettable moments (Harris 78).

For the heroine, food allows to fill the life with taste, smell, and sense and revive desire to live and love. In this regard, symbolizes temptation, desire, and love. It is not surprising that the writer describes the events during the Lent when people should reconcile their human desires. Unlike Chocolat, Atwood introduces food to emphasize that everything in out world is subjected to reason and people look at each other as a “perfect” or “irrelevant” match (Atwood 39).

Therefore, the cake woman baked in the end of the novel discloses rationalist and consumerist tendencies in relations within a community and between people. In the same way, Marians associates her body with food and divides society into predators and preys. Through rejecting her social and gender roles, Marian refuses to become a member of the society because the fear of being eaten and assimilated. She, thus, alienates from her female nature and places herself apart form the process of maturation and becoming a woman.

Chocolat and The Edible Woman present various philosophical interpretations of food. In particular, Joanne Harris puts forward a solely idealistic view on food that serve as means of inspirations and enrichment of social life. Being a good example of magic realism, the novel provides unconventional approaches to describing the role of food in society.

The food, thus, is a symbol of revived spirituality that provides motivation to resolve conflicts and establish new relationships. In this regard, the shop opened by Vianne is associated with something idealistic and even mysterious. In this shop, the villagers can find “the right” chocolate for healing their broken hearts and for solving their spiritual and amorous affairs.

The shop “opens in a such small village: there is a strict code of behavior governing such situations, and people are reserved” (Harris 18). In contrast to Harris’s vision of food, Atwood’s novel presents food in negative connotation. In particular, food personifies reason, pragmatics, and consumerism. In this regard, Marians is obsessed with her materialistic view on human relations. She denounces the established norms of relations between a man and a woman that are originally dictated by nature and morale.

In conclusion, it should be emphasized, that both literary works provide completely opposed views on the role of food in society and in family relations. The role of food can be explicitly viewed through the authors’ description of gender roles in society, characters’ needs, goals, and outlooks on life, and philosophical concepts introduced.

We will write a custom Essay on Chocolat by Joanne Harris and The Edible Woman by Margaret Atwood: Discussing the Relations Between Food and Family, Friends, and Comminity specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Hence, Chocolat is a novel, which belongs to the stream of magical realism, describes how Vianne’s confections change lives of the villagers and improve family relations. The Edible Woman, however, is fully opposed to Harris’s ideas because food is presented a means for describing and emphasizing Marian’s consumerist outlook on human relations and society in general.

Works Cited Atwood, Margaret. The Edible Woman. US: McClelland


Monsanto Company’s Monopoly Essay essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

History of Monsanto

Market impact of the monopoly

Market acquisition


Introduction The essay is an over view of monopoly. The chosen company or organization for the purposes of this study is Monsanto a company that holds about 70% to 100% of the market in commercial seed. It is well known for producing herbicide roundup, pesticide, crop seeds and it was sued by those organizations that compete with it for monopolistic practices as well as anti-trust.

The company was founded in 1901 and headquartered at Creve Coeur, Missouri in United States of America. It employs slightly over 21,000 as at 2009. In 2008 its revenue and net income stood at $11.37 and $2.02 billion.

Economists coined the term monopoly to refers to an existing situations whereby a particular person or an organization do have adequate say or control concerning given goods or services thus determining as well as dictating the conditions or terms under which consumers as well as other persons will have the potential to land their hands on such goods or services. There are four main characteristics of monopoly, single seller, market power, price discrimination as well as firm and industry.

History of Monsanto It was founded in 1901 and well known as a multinational corporation that leads in biotechnology in the field of agriculture; additionally it produces genetically engineered seed. 18 years down the line, it partnered with Grasser’s Chemical Works thereby expanding its business in Europe. It later grew to produce industrial chemicals. In 1940 the company became well known in producing plastic. Four years later it started producing DDT bit was later banned, in 1949the corporation acquired the American Viscose (Julfekar, 2010).

Five years down the line it joined hands with Bayer to engage in Polyurethanes in United States of America. The corporation bought G.D Searle


Taoism: Growth of Religion Essay essay help online

Introduction Taoism is a Chinese theoretical and religious system, which was the basis for a civilization in olden China. Lao-Tzu born in 604 BCE is said to be the initiator of Taoism. Buddhism had a significant impact on Zionism after its initiation in China. Taoism supported Buddhism and basically united with it.

People saw Buddhism as a distant form of Taoism. Later, Taoism became a simple practice and its priests and followers later implemented various supernatural and mysterious customs similar to those of European alchemists. Afterwards, Taoism lost its zeal and the devotees of its practice are now mainly found in Hong Kong and Taiwan. [1]

The history of Taoism The beginner of Taoism was known as Lao-Tzu. It is claimed that Lao-tzu wrote the classic book of Taoism: the Tao Te Ching, during his life. In the fourth century a book was written that promoted observance to the way of nature of life in everything. It is referred to as the key features of wu-wei; action not influenced by external forces. Another book expounded on these ideas further. It was known as Chuang-Tzu, and named after its author. [2]

In the first century C.E many groups used these insights to form practices and associations. Some hoped for a golden period in years that followed. This period was known as the great peace. The devotees of Taoism values were supposed to reign during the golden period. Motivated by such ideas, many private associations attempted to lead in the great peace. Among them was a trial to depose the Han dynasty in 184 C.E. [3]

Another Taoist movement that was founded in the same era was referred to as “the way of the heavenly masters”. The initiator declares to have been instructed by Lao-Tzu, whom he regarded as a god. In addition, the association assured to cure diseases. It also gave its followers manuscripts for writing their spiritual growth.

The first millennium was the era of the great peace of Taoism. Taoists formed detailed customs. They also formed various practices that would lengthen life and immortality. Many times Taoism did not emerge the authorized religion. Different kingdoms obliged their followers to do Taoists rituals, for instance, to rejoice the anniversary of Lao-tzu. [4]

The first millennium C.E. was a period when Buddhism began in China. Taoists always resisted Buddhism, and they persuaded many leaders to abolish it.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More However, the two religions did influence each other. Taoists concepts played a role in modifying Buddhism. Through the impact of Buddhism, Taoists formed monasteries and convents supported by the government. During the second millennium, Confucianism ruled over Chinese religions. The official outlook enhanced the unity of the three religions; Confucianism, Taoism, and Buddhism.

During this era Taoism formed systems appropriate to the requirements of specific people instead of official sects. With the triumph of communism in China in 1949, Taoism endured immensely. This was because the states outlawed both customs and religions, it resisted Taoism. In the 1980s some Taoists associations were formed and Taoist worship began again. Taoists rituals thrived in Chinese society specifically in Taiwan. [5]

Concept of God in Taoism In Taoism, Tao has the same definition as that of God. Tao signify a bed of river. Therefore, it implies course or way; the path of sensible living. Since Tao is signified as God, He is not visible although his being is there in everything. Tao, hence, is the path and every living thing has to commit to it. Taoism requires its devotees to adapt the features of Tao in their lives.

According to Taoism, a good person is like water. This is because water helps all living things without competing with them. By learning from this principle, a good person will love insight, people, and order.[6]

The solution to knowing the origin of Taoism is based on the definition that the phrase Tao came to acquire in the traditional Taoist barriers. In Confucian records Tao signifies a path, the right manner of behavior for people and for the administration of governments. The idea is both wider and deeper in Taoism.

Not only is Tao a ritual, something that can be possessed or lost. It is also the very creature of the world. There are three obvious differences but connected definitions of Tao. It is a metaphysical truth. It is a form of ordinary regulation. It is a kind of standard or model for a person’s life.

The key ideas of Taoism comprise the idea of Tao as the common element of every living thing. Tao does not only involve real things of whichever form, in their origins, transformation, and decay. Tao is an inseparable, fixed whole. People are elements or sections of an individual’s life. [7]

We will write a custom Essay on Taoism: Growth of Religion specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Philosophy of contradiction Tao is a motivation or purpose which directs the life. Therefore, the manner of existence is in accord with Yin and Yang. Ying-Yang is the olden Chinese philosophy of two unlike and complimentary powers in life. The Yin is linked to the womanly, while the Yang is linked to manly. According to the Yin-Yang theory, life is defined in terms of succession and adjustment of the balance of the two powers.

Shariati think that the complete accounts of Taoism together with Zoroastranism, Buddhism are founded on contradiction. A clash between two unlike poles forms history. In Taoism and the Chinese culture, dialectical perspective is of paramount importance. Everything, on the view of Yang and Yin theory, are in continuous fight and are the result of disagreement.

The existence of all these different powers in the matter and in religion, according to Shariati, forms a structure and way in the form of Tao. Below all these adjustments of facts is the course of Tao, which accepts the agreement of the unlike. [8]

The notion of Taoism In Taoism, the aspect of unity in diversity is similar to the aspect of Wahdatul-wajud. It considers first love, then understanding. Self-control, empathy and kindness are regarded as the three valuables of Taoism. Nevertheless, the theory of Tao did not induce reaction from people.

For the Taoist, believed it was a phony matter required for debate, and dangerous to wisdom and to stay with harmony. Taoism thought that the wise individual was a risk to the society because he thought in terms of laws and rules which would ruin the liberty that people had. Although Taoism was an opposition against the social financial system, it was so much into the current of personality, futurity and wisdom that it destabilized the society. [9]

Taoism instructs that by staying in agreement with the Tao or according to nature, it is likely to lengthen life and even become eternal. Researchers have differentiated between two different forms of Taoism: philosophical and religious.

Philosophical stands for thoughts established from 600 to 200 B.C.E. Religious signifies activities and rituals like alchemy (changing metals into medication that would make one live forever) and meditation that started around the first century C.E. These two forms play a role in differentiating two key levels in the history of Taoism. However it would be wrong to say philosophical and religious were completely different movements. [10]

Teachings The first Taoist writings commemorate the Tao. According to the foundation of the Tao Te Ching, it is difficult to provide a name for the Tao. It is simply beyond words. In addition, the Tao is the creator of everything. It forms all things on the earth, including human beings. The first records indicate that people should live in agreement with the Tao.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Taoism: Growth of Religion by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More An example is given of water flowing in a river. It moves because of the pressure on it from other factors such as force of gravity, yet it appears powerful than the banks; it erodes the banks away. Taoists find this illustration informative. Taoists claims the best action from people is not forced by deliberate intention. This example is also applied in the government. A government performs best if its people are unaware of their work. [11]

Afterwards Taoism forms various legendary ideas. It informs that there are many immortals. Some are linked to the earth, while others are linked to people. In addition it educates about the islands of immortals; holy mountains of China, the holiest being Tai Shan; and concerning the life giving features of things like gold.

Moreover, Taoism studies a person in precisely. The most significant power is the original breath referred to as chi. Chi and other powers dwell in the: head, heart, and navel. These three places are the sacred and most significant where immortals live. There are also residences for the three creatures referred to as worms that consume the crucial power and bring loss.

Practices There are two key forms of Taoist practices: exercises to lengthen life and large, complex ceremonies for the health of the society. The exercises to lengthen life attempt to keep or reinstate the crucial power with which an individual is born. Some rituals known as external elixir pertain eating and drinking, specifically metals.

For the early Chinese, gold signified the nature that all Taoists wanted to achieve. It could neither be ruined neither tainted. This ritual tried to produce gold from baser materials, like lead. In theory, one achieved more days on earth by using utensils made of gold or eating and drinking gold. These traditions are the origin of what referred to as Europe and America in alchemy. [12]

About 1000C.E. the external elixir was replaced by an internal elixir. In these rituals Taoists did not consume physical matters but rather performed rites. The practices involved reflection and breathing and acrobatic exercises. Similar to the two elixirs, the largest public ceremonies, referred to as Jiao, lengthened the life of the priests who did those ceremonies.

They ensured the society had peace, health, and safety of the people as a whole. In these colorful ceremonies, the three immortals were welcomed to a feast. Practically, only the priests gave the feast, although people from the community also contributed with rites of their own.

Taoism comprises both nuns and monks. However the number of nuns has been considerably small and many of the priests are not monks but dwell with relatives. Today, Taiwan has two levels of priests. Those possessing red headbands do rites of exorcism. Those possessing black headbands do key public ceremonies. Some Taoist societies, like “the way of the heavenly masters”, have been cautiously ordered.

Today the leader of the society, referred to as a pope, still declares to be an heir of the first pioneer. Moreover, Taoists have created private communities devoted to the defeat of the government. Apart from being a great participator in the Chinese culture, Taoism drew the attention of Europeans and Americans in the 20th century. Notions from the first Taoist writings became famous. Physical exercises such as Tai Chi and Taoist-impacted martial arts also became famous. [13]

Conclusion Taoism is a religion in China whose followers believe that one can lengthen his life by obeying the instructions of Tao. It began in China during the first emergence of philosophical thinking and of the general inquiry into the nature of humanity and the meaning of life. The lack of any description is not only viewed in Taoist philosophy, but also the rituals of Taoism and its very survival on the earth.

For nearly two centuries, people have stayed in societies ordered in shrines, adhering to ceremonies that match to the liturgical systems of Taoism. As a religious and liturgical association, Taoism, the social institution of the society, has not experienced any real governing body, or canonical principles. [14]

Bibliography Ellwood Robert, Alles Gregory. The encyclopedia of world religions. New York: InfoBase Publishing, 2007.

Kirkland Russell. Taoism: the enduring tradition. New York: Routledge, 2004.

Lan Hu Hsiao, Allen William. Taoism.USA: Chelsea House Publishers, 2005.

Robinet Isabelle, Brooks Phyllis. Taoism: growth of a religion. USA: Stanford University press, 1997.

Schipper, Kristofer. The Taoist body. California: University of California Press, 1993.

Stein Rebecca, Stein Philip. Anthropology of Religion, Magic, and Witchcraft (2ndEdition). USA: Ally


“28 Days” by Betty Thomas Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

The limo is borrowed by Gwen Cummings and crashes it when she was busy on her cell phone trying to replace he had destroyed due to her drunkenness. She is taken into a rehabilitation centre but very reluctant to undertake offered programs at the start. But latter reexamine her life and decide to change, though this complicates her relationship with Jasper her boyfriend.

She moves ahead befriending a recovering heroin addict who harms himself occasionally. All other inmates assisted her to realize herself as she tries to come back to her senses and deal with her alcoholism, at the end, she tries on giving up the alcoholism (‘28 Days’).

The movie shows demographic factors played a role to alcoholism; such factors included race, age gender income level and culture. From the movie, people of all ages were drinking, for instance Andrea was 17 years but much addicted.

All men and women were alcoholic, for instance Gwen and her mother were women, while men were Jasper and Eddie. Race and cultured played a role in predisposing to the alcohol dependence. It was like Native Americans who were rich drunk more. The main character was matched the description and the difference was not there with what was discussed.

The effects of alcohol include being prone to making decisions that are not good due to immature prefrontal cortex, this is seen when Gwen ruined her reception at her sister’s wedding. Makes people drink more over time. This effect might lead to alcohol dependence and abuse.

It might also make individuals take risks that need to be avoided, during the accident; she was drunk, on phone while driving (‘28 Days’). Alcohol ends up damaging memories as the area of the brain that store the brains might be damaged. It also leads to self denial, this was seen when she entered recovery as she was reluctant in taking up recovery programs claiming that she was not an addict.

When she decided to have sincere desire of getting out of the condition, it let to a stigma of being rejected. This is because; it ended up complicating relation with Jasper who was her long-term boyfriend. She also suffered abuses, as she was raised by her mother who cared less, hence provided conditions that led to the current conditions that Gwen was passing through (Wolz par 6)

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Jellinek’s Alcoholism Types include: Alpha alcoholism; which forms the earliest of the disease. Gwen falls under this category. The reason being that clearly depicted that she time and again dependent on alcoholic drinks to control her physical as well as psychological feelings; these was what Japer believed in.. She is the problem drinker, as she creates social and personal problems as in the case of destroying her reception at the wedding, and the accident issue, (‘28 Days’).

When she really wanted to, meaning that she had not lost control, hence she had no disease. Other Jellinek is Beta alcoholism; this involves drinking every day. Has no addiction and show no sign of suffering at the time of withdrawal.

It is apparent that one notable factor that instigates alcoholism is genetics; there are a number of genes in human beings that make some persons to be at higher risks of being alcoholism. This is among the causes that led to the addiction of Gwen. Looking at her family background, her sister was just recovering from addiction.

Her mother was also a drunkard (Wolz par 12). This shows that she comes from a family that drinks much. Another factor is emotional state. One’s emotional pains like these Gwen had, of being abused in her young stage, led her to drink alcohol to Prevent turmoil. Psychological factors like depression make people to become addicted. Gwen also had a partner, who was a criminal and drank regularly (Hubplace par 10)

Gwen became obsessed with alcohol; she always thought of drinking and never cared about anything else, this can be shown in the case where even on her sister’s wedding, she is drunk. She always engaged in drinking behavior of drinking even if it was causing harm to her, this can be shown when she ruined the reception at her sister’s wedding.

She even goes a head driving the limo, while knowing that she was drunk. When taken to the rehab, she thinks that, she is not the problem; this shows that she was denying her problems, hence too difficult to leave the habit (‘28 Days’).

The slogan of her friend Jasper that defines meaningful life as minimization of pains let Gwen to drink to gain comfort. The fun that her mother made of life by raising children in similar conditions that Gwen finds herself in, her mother didn’t care what her children were doing (Wolz par 8).

We will write a custom Essay on “28 Days” by Betty Thomas specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Her recovery was affected by the complexities in her relationship with Jasper. It was also affected by her engagement with a heroin addict which makes her more addicted. The factors that led to her recovery include; the mess that happened during her sister’s wedding. This let to her being taken to the rehab. Another factor was the encouragement she got from her friends in the rehab (Wolz par 8).

Gwen had reached the crucial stage. This is because when told to chose to either go to the rehab or jail, she is ready to go to the rehab, meaning that she wanted to change. At that time she was imbibing heavily though not always. She ended up losing control to the extend of drinking on the day her sister was to wed. She felt ashamed after the mess she did on a wedding day and felt sorry. The incident at her sister’s wedding that left her ruining her reception by destroying the wedding cake (‘28 Days’).

Her treatment program involved: detoxification and withdrawal; involved taking medication to prevent withdrawal seizures. Followed by medical assessment and treatment; this involved assessing medical problems associated with alcohol like blood pressure (Hubplace par 12) Psychological support and psychiatric technique; it was carried out both in groups and individually to deal with psychological effects of alcoholism, (‘28 Days’).

There were emphasize on abstaining and acceptance to enable her accept that she was an addict and control her drinking. Drug treatments; aimed at producing worse physical reactions. Family therapy involves her sister to understand her past. (Hubplace par 14).

During recovery she wanted to hang herself “When she realizes that she is not able to just stop drinking any time she wants” (Wolz par 12). After showing some signs of recovery, Jasper continues drinking and even fighting. She accepted her condition and become friendly to her fellow patients, who helped her much.

Though her past conditions never gave her peace, she stopped her relation with Jasper, but he continued following her to an extent of after therapy, her new courtship with Boone meant new life. They left their irresponsible and egocentric life. Though she was stressed up and struggling on how to let the past go. (Wolz par 12).

Work Cited ‘28 Days’. Dir. Thomas, Betty, Prod. Costas D.


Femininity and Masculinity Definition Essay essay help site:edu

Table of Contents Introduction

The root and development of feminity and masculinity

Feminity, Masculinity and art

Works Cited

Introduction Feminity and masculinity refers to the identity of an individual’s gender. Both feminity and masculinity derive their source from an individual’s gender as opposed to sex. Gender in this case refers to social while sex is a biological aspect. The society defines the meaning of being a male or a female.

Males consider themselves masculine while female are feminine. These definitions are social, creating the possibility of some males to consider themselves feminine and some women masculine. An individual with a masculine identity ought to behave in a way that depicts the masculine identity. On the other hand, an individual with a feminine identity should behave in a way that brings out their feminine nature (Melosh 201). The main aim of writing this paper is to explore the different cultures of feminity and masculinity.

The root and development of feminity and masculinity In the West, men are socially labeled as aggressive and competitive while women are articulate, passive and collaborative. Earlier, people believed that these traits are innate and embedded on the genes of an individual. It is now clear that the degree of masculinity and feminity of an individual is not innate but depends on social and cultural environment of an individual.

There are three key theories that highlight on the development of feminity and masculinity. These theories are psychoanalytic theory, cognitive-development theory and learning theory.

All these theories are similar because they are in two parts. The first part involves a child realizing that he or she is either a male or a female. The second part of all these theories is the child finding out the meaning of female and male with reference to feminity and masculinity.

Recent studies have shown that mothers have a crucial role to play in the development of gender identity. Because they are not of the same sex, a mother and her son relate differently, while she bonds naturally with her daughter because they share a sense of continuity and belonging.

Feminity, Masculinity and art In Benin, artists focus on the male form more than the female. Artists from this area have a tendency to project on the male form with perfection. This suggests the continuity of the cultural standards in Benin. There is a link between the exclusion of women in the art to convictions of the threats that they symbolize.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This notion is not only in Benin, but also in a majority of the countries in Africa. Depiction of the Portuguese visitors to Benin by artist in the 16th century clearly emphasizes on that exclusion of women and the embrace of masculinity. An example is the figure below. The body of the Portuguese in this artistic piece is flimsy. The artist has used the face, beard, hair and dress to bring out masculinity (Curnow 75).

Over the years, there has been a rise in feminist groups that oppose the use of graffiti in posters that look down on females. The most notable feminist groups that engage in this activism are Women’s Action Coalition (WAC), SisterSerpents of Chicago, Women’s Health Action Mobilization and the Guerrilla Girls.

They scrutinize advertisements, movie posters, book covers etc that portray women negatively (Ivinski 37). After identifying such literature, they inform the person behind it and show their displeasure. A good example of the literature that touches negatively on feminity is in the image below.

It is vital that an artist is sensitive to his or her environment with regard to feminity and masculinity. An artist has to bring out a balance of the two in a way that does not discriminate on another.

The ivory saltcellar, from Benin.

Aids activism poster by Gran Fury, 1991.

Works Cited Curnow, Kathy. “Prestige and the Gentleman- Benin’s ideal man.” The Art Journal. 1997. Print.

We will write a custom Essay on Femininity and Masculinity specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Ivinski, Pamela. Women Who Turn to Gaze Around. 1993. Print.

Melosh, Barbara. Gender and American History Since 1890. New York: Routledge, 1993. Print.


Racial Profiling Research Paper college essay help online: college essay help online

Introduction Ever since the early civilization man has always discriminated fellow men on the basis of their color, age, gender among other many factors. In the United States of America, discrimination is more spread across the different race origins that the citizens bear.

The American population is made of people from different origins, for example, we have; the African American, Caucasians, Red Indians among others. Some races feeling superior to others have promoted discrimination for a very long period. One way through which this has been done is racial profiling (MacDonald 4).

When the color of your skin or the origin of your race is used by the law enforcing officers as a basis of suspicion of having committed particular crimes in general non suspect investigations then that can be described as racial profiling (Glaser 4). This discrimination which most of the times has been based on religion, race, ethnicity or any other special character that one may be identified with undermines the human rights and freedom of every American citizen.

It is a fact that law enforcement officers at all levels target people of certain races or ethnic groups most of the time as seen during traffic stops and inspection. For many years, Americans of African and Hispanic origins have complained of being victims of race profiling due to allegations of their likelihood of committing crimes compared to Americans of other races.

For example, allegations of racial profiling have been on the policemen who suspect African American shoppers of being petty thieves. Individuals have been subjected to racial profiling when walking or shopping, for instance, blacks are often stopped and questioned by cops if seen walking in an area assumed to be a white dominated region (Muffler 2). This has become a major issue in the United States of America some debating on its essence and why it should continue or it should stop and thus the need to look into the matter.

Current System or the Way Things Are Currently Done In Regards to Racial Profiling

In the recent years it has become a major concern to everybody on racial profiling. Laws seeking to ban racial profiling have been introduced in the congress for example

Both S. 16(Daschle) and H.R 2364(Engel), (Laney 2), contains provisions relating to racial profiling. S.16 is an “omnibus civil rights bill, which includes provisions that would express a sense of the Senate that Congress enact legislation banning racial profiling and requiring law enforcement at the federal state and local levels to prevent the practice (Muffler 3).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The HR.2364 (Engel) aims to amend immigration and nationality act by establishing a Visa Fairness Commission to collect data on the ongoing racial profiling in the American Embassies and with the US border inspectors. The law enforcement departments have been accused of practicing racial profiling in their aim of controlling two vices: preventing the illicit drugs activities and containing terrorism threats.

Many Americans disapprove traffic stops but when terrorism investigations are the claims of making the stops, then the Americans have no problem in allowing the vice to continue. The fact that the bombings of September 2001 were carried by attackers of Arab origin, other Arab citizens living in the country whether innocent or guilty have been faced with adverse cases of racial profiling;

“50% Americans responding to a poll supported the laws requiring Arabs including those who are U.S. citizens to carry a special ID” (Muffler 6).

Another study carried in the country by the Opinion Dynamics showed that “54% of American citizens approved the use of racial profiling to screen Arab-male airline passengers. While in another carried by Cornell University “68% responded to racial profiling as a tool of fighting terrorism” (Muffler 6).

Thus, race profiling is within many American citizens and any bid to eliminate the vice is expected to face all sorts of challenges. While all the claims about Muslims and their relation to terrorism might be true, it is worthy noting that terrorists of Middle East (as they are usually faced with higher risks of racial profiling) background could have migrated to Germany, England or any other country and thus racial profiling by use of the geographical factors is also not bound to work.

The extent of racial profiling has been studied in some states, for example, in the Arizona Sentinel Investigation of all the vehicles which were stopped in the interstate highway in Florida, “While nearly 705 of the vehicles stopped belonged to the blacks and Hispanic, only a small 5% of the drivers were from the minor communities” (Muffler 7).

Racial profiling violates the individual constitutional rights as stated in the supreme constitution of the United States of America. The fourth amendment of the United States of America protects every American citizen against any unreasonable searches and seizures (Kops 72) while the Fifth Amendment protects against discrimination based on ethnicity, race or nation of origin as experienced in racial profiling cases (Rezmovic


Compare Laertes and Hamlet: Both React to their Fathers’ Killing/Murder Compare and Contrast Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

Hamlet and Laertes are characters that William Shakespeare used in his play entitled Hamlet. The setting of this play is in Denmark. The main characters in the play include Claudius (king of Denmark), Hamlet (also known as prince Hamlet and the son of the deceased king Hamlet and Queen Gertrude), Gertrude (queen of Denmark), Polonius (Lord Chamberlain), and Laertes (Polonius’ son).

The other characters who also contribute to the plot of this play include Ophelia, Horatio, Voltimand, among others. The protagonist of this tragedy is prince Hamlet. Both Hamlet and Laertes are angry with the murderers of their fathers and are determined to revenge.

Shakespeare’s work brings out the theme of revenge. Both Hamlet and Laertes are determined to revenge for their fathers’ killing (Schulman, para.3). They act out of anger and rage and are determined to find satisfaction and peace of mind through revenge.

Even if they both seek revenge, they have different characteristics and convictions that make them differ in the way they treat the issue. One night, outside the Elsinore Castle in Denmark, the guards spotted the ghost of the deceased old King Hamlet and they informed prince Hamlet about its whereabouts.

More about This Topic Why Does Hamlet Act Crazy? 5 114 What are Hamlet’s last words? 5 124 What is Hamlet’s concluding thought after he has mused over the skulls and the idea of death? 5 134 Which excerpt from Hamlet, act 1, scene 1 is a stage direction? 5 185 Thereafter, the prince makes a decision to go and see the ghost himself. The ghost reveals himself as the spirit of king Hamlet (Bloom, Pg. 16). King Hamlet’s ghost then informs prince Hamlet of the person who killed him; consequently, Hamlet accepts the ghost’s demands, swears his accomplices to secrecy and reveals to them his intention of killing the king to avenge his father’s murder.

The ghost revealed that King Claudius of Denmark had murdered his brother King Hamlet secretly, inherited his throne as king, and married his queen Gertrude (Shakespeare, Act 5, Scene 2, pg 3, line 68-69).The thought that someone killed his father makes Hamlet to harbor the spirit of revenge.

Shakespeare used the character of Hamlet to show that the effects of revenge may lead to disastrous results and some of them may be unintended. This is shown by the fact that Hamlet wanted to execute the revenge plan regardless of its consequences.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Foremost, he decides to prove whether his uncle Claudius is guilty of the offence and pretend to be insane. Armed with prove (Act 3, Scene 2), Hamlet goes to kill Claudius but gets him praying and stops because he believes that killing him while he is praying will send his soul directly to heaven.

He then leaves to confront his mother in her bedchamber where Polonius is hiding. Taking note of some movements from behind the tapestry, Hamlet thinks it is the king concealing himself there and thrusts his sword through the fabric killing Polonius instantly, and because of this murder, Claudius becomes afraid of Hamlet and sends Him to England where he plans for his murder. Here, the hatred of Claudius is also revealed.

However, Hamlet succeeds to come back. Laertes, Polonius’s son, who has just returned from France rages because of his father’s murder and demands for justice. The king tells him that Hamlet killed his father and the two combine efforts to kill Hamlet. In the end, the three of them die.

Hamlet agrees with the request of his father’s ghost to avenge his death but he does not execute Claudius immediately. He takes time to prove whether his uncle Claudius is guilty of the offence. He also blames Laertes for being the king’s accomplice in crime during his father’s reign.

However, Hamlet did not kill him. Hamlet is slow to act even when he has enough evidence that his uncle killed his father. His procrastination causes his downfall because he is killed at the end. Hamlet decided to kill Claudius only when he realizes that he is about to die and it is his only chance to revenge for his father’s murder.

Laertes on the other hand acts with rage when he hears that his father is dead. He organizes an army and comes to Denmark threatening to overthrow the king if he does not produce his father or his killer.

When Claudius tells Laertes that Hamlet killed his father, he is in a rush to revenge by killing Hamlet. This is what makes him to organize for a fencing match with Hamlet in order to set a chance of killing him. His hurry to execute his revenge mission without contemplating on the king’s motives leads to his downfall because Hamlet kills him during the match.

We will write a custom Essay on Compare Laertes and Hamlet: Both React to their Fathers’ Killing/Murder specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More From this play, it is clear that both Hamlet and Laertes are seeking to revenge on each other for their fathers’ deaths. Hamlet knows that Laertes was a major partner to King Claudius in crime during the reign of king Hamlet. In anger, he also seeks to kill Claudius an issue that makes him to kill Polonius by mistake. Laertes on the other hand is aware that Hamlet killed his father by mistake and out of anger. Nonetheless, he still blames him for not only killing his father, but also holds him responsible for his sister’s death.

Even though Hamlet and Laertes are justified to avenge their fathers’ deaths, their reactions are not right. At first, Hamlet seeks to get evidence that his uncle killed his father.

This seems to be a wise step for him to take but then he takes too long to establish the truth. After getting the truth, Hamlet still engages in unnecessary procrastinations in order to find specific evidence, which is not necessary. He also does this due to some philosophical and moral convictions, which at the end lead him to damnation. Laertes on the other hand is filled with rage and acts out of his anger rather than out of reason.

His reason for wanting to kill Hamlet is that he killed his father. In addition, he wanted to do this because Hamlet had a love relationship with his sister. He feels that he must revenge for his father’s death in order for him to have peace and to keep his reputation untainted (“Hamlet’s revenge,” para. 1). His hurry in doing things also leads him to damnation just like Hamlet.

Further Research Do you think Hamlet is a problem play or a tragedy? Why? 5 854 Why does Polonius think Hamlet is mad? 5 93 What conflict(s) does Hamlet Experience Inside Himself? 5 155 What words suggest that Claudius plans to control Hamlet? 5 26 In conclusion, some of the themes presented in William Shakespeare’s play Hamlet are revenge, rejected love and madness. The murder of the fathers of Prince Hamlet and Laertes grieve them and they set out to revenge. King Hamlet’s death makes Hamlet to get out of school and come back to Denmark to mourn his father’s death.

The marriage between his mother and king Claudius disturbs him. In one night, the ghost of Hamlet’s father walks to Elsinore and reveals to hamlet that Claudius is the one who killed him. Out of the ghost’s demand, Hamlet sets out to revenge but he is held back by his beliefs and convictions. His anger makes him to kill Polonius, Laertes’ father, who in turn seeks revenge.

Hamlets’ love towards Ophelia, Laertes’ sister creates more hatred between Hamlet and Laertes. Hamlet’s philosophical beliefs make him to doubt his course of action and lead him to delay in his revenge. Laertes is in hurry to revenge and maintain his reputation their behavior puts them in problems and they both die. This gives a message that people ought to act out of reason and in due time.

Works Cited Bloom, Harold. Shakespeare’s Tragedies. Broomall, PA.: Chelsea House publishers, 2000. Print.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Compare Laertes and Hamlet: Both React to their Fathers’ Killing/Murder by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More “Hamlet’s revenge.” Greenspun, January 11, 2003. Web.

Schulman, Arlene. “Shakespeare – Hamlet vs Laertes.” AllExperts. About, Inc., 2 March 2007. Web.

Shakespeare, William. Hamlet: a tragedy. London: W. Oxberry and Co. Printers, 1818. Print.


How can I impress my boss Essay essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Working hard and working smart

Observing companies code of ethics

Innovativeness and creativity

Creating an off-job relations

Being a loyalist


Works Cited

Introduction In our work place, there is need for good interrelation; it leads to good performance and employee’s satisfaction. As long as our work places are where we get daily bread, having a good interaction with that environment is important. There are expectation that the boss and the organization in general has upon us and fulfilling them and knowing them is crucial (Kellaway 2). This short paper discusses how to impress our seniors in the work place.

Working hard and working smart Bosses need the work in a company completed in good time. There are targets set for individuals and for groups in the company. For the boss to be happy with the work of an employee, then the employee must satisfy his/her duties. This requires hard work and determination. Working smart is an element of hard work which means that other than normal fulfilling of duties, employees fulfill them effectively and conveniently.

Observing companies code of ethics Every company has a code of ethics where expectations of employees are well stipulated. The codes act as the public image that the company has. It is as broad as the company’s mission and vision statements, company’s objectives and as narrow as integration between peers. It should be observed in all lengths.

The reporting time, departure time and policies defining the operations in a business should be observed. Other than maintaining and observing ethical conduct in the business as expected by the organization, upholding personal ethics is important; these ethics include good manners and being a person of high integrity.

Innovativeness and creativity Bosses are always under pressure to perform. To have an effective performance, they require some assistance in terms of mind and new methods that they can adopt to make their work easy.

An employee who innovates or is creative and sells the idea that he has to his boss is more likely to be in good terms with the boss. This is the starting point of close interaction between the boss and the employees. When an employee’s gets an idea which he thinks can fit a certain organization, bosses would be more appreciating if the employee shares with them before anybody else.

Creating an off-job relations Interaction with the boss should not be limited to the office one only. There should be other interactions outside the office. This mostly takes the part of collaboration in social activities which the boss is a part to, for example in case of a wedding, evening parties and team building activities. When in these activities, the interaction of boss-junior relation should break and replaced by an interaction of friendship (Infante


Ancient Rome: The Birthplace of Modern Sports Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

Table of Contents Introduction


Influence of Roman Stadiums

Training of Gladiators


Works Cited

Introduction The popularity of sporting competition in the modern society reflects that of the ancient Roman Empire’s vision for its society. Entertainment was an important aspect of the daily life of Roman citizens, hence their interest in sporting games and events. Most of today’s sporting games can be traced back to these games, albeit with a few or major changes. Games such as horseracing, ball games, board games, and the gladiator fights, which began in Rome, are still enjoyed in different parts of the world.

Several aspects of sporting events in ancient Rome can be observed today, for example, the similarity of gladiator contests to organized modern sports (Ow, para. 1). Gladiators were trained in special schools using methods are still used in training today’s professional athletes.

Several aspects of the gladiatorial games can be readily observed in today’s football, hockey, boxing, and wrestling contests in these events, the opponents dress in some form of armor, use game weapons, attract huge crowds, adopt fancy names and titles and frequently gain much popularity and prosperity (Hicks, para. 3).

Even the stadium architecture used back in the day is still in application. Modern-day horse and vehicle racing competitions exhibit great resemblance to the Circus-Maximus in Rome, where horses competed and the chariots crashed into each other to the delight of crowds.

Discussion Sporting events and activities in ancient Rome were very popular among the natives. The Colosseum in Rome, where most sporting events were held, was a huge showground that could hold more than 45,000 people. It was here that the Romans came to watch the violent and sometimes bloody battles that associated with the Romans. Events consisted of battles between gladiators, and even between gladiators and wild animals such as lions (Oracle, para. 8).

Another favorite sport was chariot racing. This sport exhibited stiff competition and often ended in injury or death of the participants or their horses. Roman charioteers, most of whom were slaves, were referred to as aurigae and would partake in this sport to become prominent, earn sufficient money, and buy their freedom. Chariot racing was one of the most popular sports in ancient Rome, it later spread to other parts of the world and is a favorite sport in some nations.

Sporting events turned into a show of display with fierce competition as the winners were rewarded and became popular and were subject to favors. To ensure that the games attracted huge numbers, the authorities spent a lot of money on the games but entrance, in most cases, was free. Publicly financed games also continued into the provinces with each region having its own amphitheater. Amphitheaters were the most common venues for sporting activities, the first of which was built at around 29 BC.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The amphitheater was oval or elliptical with sloping seats and supported on solid rocks. They were initially carved out of earth but this changed and the Romans started using cement to strengthen them.

A velum protected the crowd from elements of weather and in larger structures, underground floors were constructed to hold animals before a battle (Oracle, para. 10). The stands offered a spectacular view of the arena and with the crowds cheering on their favorite teams or individual, the view from the stands must have been a wonderful experience for anyone who attended.

Despite borrowing heavily from the ancient Roman, today’s sporting events are not about competition anymore, rather, they are focused on making profits. Competition is an integral ethos of the game as it creates fervor within the spectators, just as it was in ancient Rome. It is common to hear of match fixing and game cheats aimed at making some teams win through unfair tactics that were devoid in the ancient events.

Influence of Roman Stadiums The architecture of the Roman amphitheaters can be easily recognized in today’s stadiums. The amphitheaters were elliptical or near-circle in shape. The most famous of these was the Colosseum which covered almost six acres and with a height of 48.5 m. The structure is classical template for today’s stadia; the sloping seats, retractable roof, elliptical shape… all these borrow from the ancient Roman architecture.

Modern sports has not only borrowed in the sphere of architecture, it has also borrowed aspects such as pre-game rituals and names. For example, the University of South California’s stadium is referred to as The Coliseum, even though the stadium is larger than the real Coliseum, it borrows from the Roman architecture, similar to most stadia.

The Romans developed cement by mixing volcanic ash from Mount Vesuvius with slaked lime, this created a product that could harden when mixed with water and they used this to make building foundations to most of their structures, including the Coliseum. This has been replicated in the construction of modern stadia.

Despite the Romans’ dexterity in construction, historical evidence suggests that the stadium construction began in Greece, the word itself comes from the Greek word “stadion”, a measure of length equal to 200m. The Romans just emulated what had begun years earlier.

We will write a custom Essay on Ancient Rome: The Birthplace of Modern Sports specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Training of Gladiators Gladiators were trained in special institutions initially run by private individuals, but later possessed by the imperial state to avoid the emergence of a private military. The fighters were trained like athletes, similar to modern day training of professional athletes (Meijer, pp. 67).

They were given medical attention and were served food thrice a day. They were trained on the usa of various weapons (Ablemedia, para. 1). Successful gladiators became respectable and were famous among the low and high in the society and their role as entertainers was honored in valuable and commonplace items all over the empire.

The athletes stayed in cells within the training school and a typical day would have begun with a breakfast followed by some light warm-up exercise. Immediately, they would go into full training in the presence of their trainer, only breaking at lunch, and resuming in the afternoon. This is unlike modern athletes who hire a private coach and return to their residential areas after training, besides, today’s training procedure is more structured and everything is done according to book.

Conclusion The Romans have had had a huge influence in today’s sporting activities and events. Their contribution is not only in field events, it can be seen in other outdoor activities such as horseracing, called Chariot racing in ancient Rome. The Romans participated in boxing, ball games and Greek-style athletics too, all popular sports today.

However, it can not be said that the more common sporting activities have their origin among the ancient Romans, but they definitely adopted them with so much zeal that laws had to be enacted to control them!

Works Cited Ablemedia. Gladiatorial Training


“Confessions” by St. Augustine on Friendship Term Paper best essay help

Table of Contents St. Augustine’s idea of Friendship for God

Friendship with God

Friendship: St.Augustine’s Personal View


Works Cited

St. Augustine, also known as Augustine of Hippo, is one of the most influential philosophers and teachers from ancient times. Much of what we know about him comes from his writings. The world will never be the same because of his work and his masterpiece known to everyone as The Confessions of St. Augustine. He was ordained and later on became a Bishop of North Africa.

He may appear at first glance as a religious person who shuns the secular world and who pursued the spirit life using methods preferred by monks. Still, surprisingly, he believes in friendship. St. Augustine’s Confessions show that he considers friendship as an essential part of the Christian life.

Saint Augustine does not only believe in the power, beauty, and significance of friendship in this earthly existence; he also sees the connection between people from a deeply spiritual level of philosophy. He believes that friendships formed in this world have an ultimate purpose, and it is to prepare people for what is to come – a perfect relationship with God. First, there is friendship with God, and then there is friendship with the man. According to one historian, Augustine’s underlying framework to understand friendship comes from a heavenly perspective.

Augustine of Hippo believes that the only real source of friendship is God, and he adds that it is only through this God-man relationship that people can understand the ideal meaning of friendship (Hyatte, 1994, p.46). Besides, Augustine confesses that humans are not only supposed to tap this higher source for guidance when it comes to earthly relationship, this friendship, if done correctly, will lead them to God (Hyatte, 1994, p.46). This is evident in his writings, most notably in St.Augustine’s Confessions.

St. Augustine’s idea of Friendship for God It has to be pointed out that Augustine is not merely giving lip service to religion and his spiritual beliefs in the same way that some people are prone to do. He is not only making a suggestion when he defined friendship from a religious standpoint.

The context of his writings must be understood as not coming from the pen of a sociologist or a politician who merely attempted to say or write beautiful things that in turn, will be warmly accepted by the general public. Augustine of Hippo wrote from a deep conviction. This is a man of God who desires not to be misinterpreted when it comes to his teachings. There is a high level of orthodoxy in his teachings that says God is the center and an essential part of life.

This understanding covers every aspect of his biography, including friendship. In Book IV of St.Augustine’s the Confessions, he made an emphatic statement when it comes to judging who is a true friend or not.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Referring to a person whom he grew up with, and spent considerable time with as a school-fellow and as play-fellow, Augustine is blunt in his assessment of their relationship. This is seen in the following quote: “But he was not yet my friend as afterward, nor even then, as true friendship is; for true it cannot be, unless in such as Thou cemented together, cleaving unto Thee, by that love which is shed abroad in our hearts by the Holy Ghost, which is given unto us” (Augustine, Book IV). This mindset colors everything that he sees.

Augustine of Hippo did not casually mention the role that God played in the friendship he meant something deeper, and through the help of a commentary one can see a partial revelation of his worldview, that for Augustine: “there can be no consensus between men on earthly matters unless first, they agree perfectly on divine or spiritual ones … only those with orthodox religious beliefs can be true friends, and they agree on the matters of community because their taste and opinions are formed by those beliefs” (Hyatte, 1994 p.63).

This is a crucial component of Augustine’s understanding of what true friendship is. Once this particular belief system appears, then it is now possible to take a closer look at friendship viewed from this perspective.

To summarize, Augustine vacillates between two extremes when he describes friendship in the Confessions On the one hand, he said that he has no friends except those who share his beliefs. On the other hand, he confesses that he used to have friends, but they made him understand the weakness of the flesh. Augustine laments that in the connection between people that is not anchored by God, one can only expect frustrations and sorrows.

Sorrow is inevitable in a relationship composed of frail human beings. Grief also occurs in relationships governed by lust. Pain is the result of creating relationships to fill up the emptiness inside the soul of man. But there is nothing on this earth that can fill up that void.

However, friends are unaware of this, and so they keep on working on their relationship until it is no more or until one is hurt beyond repair. Sorrow comes when a friend is led by another friend into the path of destruction, thinking that there lies the road to serenity. Augustine implies that for friends, it is normal to make that mistake because, in usual circumstances, they are driven by their sinful nature.

Frustration comes from the realization that there are high expectations that could not be met. This is especially true when it comes to a special form of friendship between man and woman, a type of relationship that Augustine is not ignorant about. Before he was converted or before he gave his life wholly for the service of God, Augustine of Hippo really knows what it means to fall in love.

We will write a custom Term Paper on “Confessions” by St. Augustine on Friendship specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More He was a son to one woman and then became a husband of another for the simple reason of satisfying the flesh and at the same time, the purported benefits of a man-woman relationship. But in the end, he said that there is nothing in this form of relationship that lasts and truly satisfies the soul.

Augustine said that the friend is not only a friend – ready to serve, love, and protect – he is also a friend in need. There is that expectation of receiving the love given. It is expected that there is reciprocity in that type of love. Augustine said that there are times when it is impossible to pay back what was given, and the hope of love paid back in full can sometimes be suffocating.

But there is more. Augustine said that this type of friendship that is not anchored in the Almighty is a friendship that will end in sadness, especially when the other person dies, and those who are left behind are left with a void that they cannot understand.

Friendship with God When he took on a new understanding of life and death, when he became a Christian, Augustine began to regret the bond that he had with the world and the people who are of the world. But this does not mean that he did not appreciate his friendship with them.

In Book IV, the reader is introduced to a friend whom Augustine truly loves because when he was near death, Augustine was significantly affected, and there were no words that could describe his feeling. Augustine is deeply religious, but he is not a hermit. He is comparable to a pastor who longs to be with people and not like a holy man who prefers isolation and prefers to stay away from the crowd.

When he became a Christian, he all the more appreciated the power, beauty, and significance of friendship confessions, especially the one he shared with like-minded people. But before going any further, it is essential to point out that Augustine owes his conversion to his friendship with others.

It is through this friendship that he was able to see the error of his ways. His friend Alypius led him to the path of righteousness. For that, Augustine was so thankful. He wrote extensively about his friendship with Alypius and his impact on Augustine’s biography. He would continue to seek this type of friend those who would make him a better Christian.

Augustine’s method of acquiring friends and sustaining their relationship came first as the result of his ardent passion for knowing wisdom and truth. Thus, even at a young age, he chose to associate with those who can lead him to a higher level of learning. When he became a Christian, he still had the same passion, but this time around, his search for truth is made more complicated by another desire, which is the knowledge of Christ.

Not sure if you can write a paper on “Confessions” by St. Augustine on Friendship by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More It is no wonder then that Augustine’s friendship has a distinctive characteristic in it, and it can be best described as having the quality of evidence in a teacher-disciple relationship. Thus, Augustine will take a student under his wings, and he would teach this younger fellow, and in the process of teaching, he becomes a friend to this person.

But Saint Augustine is not always the teacher. For example, there was a time when friendship developed when he entered into a mentor-mentee relationship with Ambrose, the Bishop of Milan. The relationship started fet, but over time they developed a special friendship Augustine treasured for the rest of his life, as seen in the quote:

“That man of God received me as a father and showed me an Episcopal kindness of my coming. Thenceforth I began to love him at first indeed not as a teacher of the truth (which I utterly despaired of thy Church), but as a person kind towards myself” (Augustine, Book V).

Augustine of Hippo was attracted to Ambrose not by his eloquence and erudite thoughts, but by his kindness towards him. This is a revelation as to how Augustine perceived human behavior and how he is affected by it.

This is significant because the first impression that one will have on Augustine is a scholar who loves nothing more than to read and study. This initial assessment of his character creates a wrong assumption that this man is willing to sacrifice the nuances of human relationships to immediately dive into knowledge and wisdom – to feast on ideas and conjectures without regard to human relationships.

But this statement is proof that Augustine does not only have a powerful mind that has overpowered all his senses, but it also shows that he is a sensitive man. He brought himself near to Ambrose not only because Ambrose can teach him great things, but first of all because Ambrose demonstrated that he could be a friend to Augustine.

He is also fond of Nebridius, the friend who allowed him to experience life more deeply. That is the friend who allowed him to imbibe wisdom and understand the depths of God. Saint Augustine was forever thankful for meeting Nebridius, Alypius, and Ambrose. His friendship confessions will enable us to see the context of his declaration that true friendship is from and must be used to propel each one into the knowledge and intimate relationship with the Almighty.

Friendship: St.Augustine’s Personal View At first, Augustine felt despair because his friends are dear to him, but they lead him to the paths of destruction. It is difficult for him to reconcile what he is feeling and what he knows. It has become clear after reading St.Augustine’s the Confessions that the author is a sensitive man who may have the mind of a philosopher. Still, he also possesses the heart of an ordinary fellow who is mindful of his need for companionship.

It tore his heart and his soul, thinking about his desire to be with them, especially to his lady friend. But he had to choose the path less traveled. It was clear that he suffered in his decision to pursue a life dedicated to spiritual pursuits, but in the end, he was rewarded because he believed that God gave him real friends.

It has to be reiterated that in the latter stages of Augustine’s biography, especially after his conversion to Christianity and his clear understanding of the truth, Augustine appreciated friendship in the context of a student and teacher relationship. For Augustine, this type of relationship is not the same as the way modern people come to perceive a teacher-student dynamic.

For example, in ancient times, students and teachers can live in the same house, and they are not limited by the four walls of the classrooms. In other words, they can experience a deep level of connectedness that is not possible in today’s world.

It is through these relationships that Saint Augustine was able to prove that he can become a better Christian if he has these types of friends as opposed to engaging in a spiritual journey without companions. It can even be said that without his friends, especially when it comes to Appius, Nebridius, and Ambrose, he could not have written his masterpiece. This is because he was able to distill the lessons of life through his interaction with his friends.

This is perhaps the reason why Augustine influenced the Christian Church in such a profound way – he gave people access to lofty truths by means of earthly examples of human relationships. This may also explain why Augustine is popular with students, especially adolescents. That’s because he can connect with them as he exposed his inner-struggles as a young man and, therefore, can easily establish a connection with today’s teenagers and college students (Henninger, 1989, p.32). This is the legacy of Augustine.

Conclusion This research paper aimed to analyze the views on friendship by St.Augustine – one of the most influential Christian philosophers. The secret of Augustine’s success and the reason why he is so popular, even in the 21st century, is that he did not discuss theology using words that are difficult to grasp. He did not use concepts that require a genius to appreciate. He used his experience and understanding of friendship as a vehicle for communicating profound spiritual truths, and this is the reason why it resonates in the hearts of his readers.

In summary, the Confessions describe various forms of relationships between human beings and God. His idea that God is the source of true friendship and that God allows attachment to occur in preparation for an eternal relationship with him is profound but easily accessible by young and old. Augustine’s assertion that true friendship must lead people to God has become a standard of living. He was able to articulate these things because he also suffered and rejoiced greatly in his quest to find truth via the interaction with his friends.

Works Cited Augustine of Hippo. The Confessions of St. Augustine. Trans. Edward Bouverie Pusey.

Henninger, M. “The Adolescent’s Making of Meaning: The Pedagogy of Augustine’s Confessions.” Journal of Moral Education. 18(1989): 32-44.

Hyatte, Reginald. The Arts of Friendship: The Idealization of Friendship in Medieval and Early Renaissance Literature. MA: E.J. Brill, 1994.


Domestic Violence and Elderly Abuse- A Policy Statement Research Paper college essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

Facts of the Case


Public Opinion


Reference List

Introduction In a fast paced world driven by economic and commercial considerations, it is not hard to find people getting mistreated. When the people under question are weak, such treatment is all the more pronounced. That is possibly the reason why people who have a hard time at the office, vent out their feelings at home. It is also true that people, who just enjoy subjugation of others, do so at their home. In our world, the weak can be listed in their increasing order of weakness as follows: the women, the elderly and of course, the children. Invariably all of them face the brutality of domestic violence in one form or the other. In some cases, there are also weak men who are subjected to this harassment by their family members.

Facts of the Case A study conducted by Patricia Tjaden and Nancy Thoennes (2000) indicate that there are more than a million women and about eight hundred thousand men annually assaulted by their intimate partners at home. The US crime records indicate that there is numerous non fatal crime records registered due to domestic violence.

Out of all non fatal violence recorded in such criminal records, 20% of these are on women due to their intimate partners at home (Rennison CM 2003). The same figure stood at 3% for domestic violence against men committed by their intimate partners (Rennison CM 2003) on them.

Callie Marrie Rennison had conducted the study on data pertaining to 2001. She also points out that out of murders committed on females, 33% or one third of all female murder victims are committed by their intimate partners at home and 4% of the male murder victims are committed out of domestic violence. This works out to more than 1,247 women and 440 men dead in the US due to domestic violence.

A number of studies have been conducted in the US to understand the extent of Elderly abuse in the society. It has been recorded through research that over 1 million seniors who are over 65 years of age have been abused or ill treated by people whom they looked up for protection (Richard J. Bonnie


Behaviors That Build Trust and Behaviors That Hurt Trust Term Paper a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

The vast majority of relations which are developed between people are based on trust and abilities to comprehend the needs of other people. To create strong and professional relations, it is very important to remember that trust is a reciprocal notion: a person has to give it in order to get it (Reina 11). If a person is not able to gain trust in a certain group of people, it could be hard for him/her to continue developing communication in future.

This is why it is necessary to remember about those behaviors that may build trust properly as well as to consider those behaviors that may hurt trust and destroy reputation. There are many communication strategies and game plans with the help of which it is possible to use the idea of trust in everyday life, however, it is not always easy to choose the most effective and the most interesting method and meet the goals set.

In this paper, different types of behavior will be evaluated to understand how it is possible build trust with the help of respect, straight talks, and clarification of goals, have appropriate grounds to develop relations, and prove that personal achievements may be improved with the help of properly organized game plan.

To build trust and introduce good relations on an appropriate level, it is very important to understand that any relationship has two types of trust accounts: “the way you perceive the amount of trust in a relationship and the way the other person perceives it may be different” (Covey and Merrill 132).

This is why one of the behaviors that has to be considered is respect to each other. Only in case people respect each other opinion, idea, and suggestion, they may build trust. For example, in the company, there is a leader who considers his position as the only right one in the team.

He does not find it necessary to evaluate other suggestions, respect the opinions of other members of a team and organize straight talks. Though there is a certain order in such relations and clearly defined goals, there is no trust because there is no respect to each other. A leader is not aware of the way of how his team perceives relations. This is why there is no chance to built trustful relations in such team.

Taking into consideration this example, it is possible to define behaviors that hurt trust and decrease the productivity’s levels. Brief and unclear talks, inabilities to spend much time, rare communications with each other, and hidden goals which are achieved by each member of a team separately are the main reasons of why trust may be hurt. People have to realize that there is some connection that is common for all of them, and trustful relations cannot be developed in case at least one person does not seek to trust the others.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The game plan that is more preferable for those who want to safe trust in relation is to memorize the main aspects, the algorithms of relations, and the components. “Every interaction with every person is a moment of trust. The way you behave in that moment will either build or diminish trust” (Covey and Merrill 135).

This is why if a person wants to have strong and trustful relations, it is necessary to start trusting other people and to make them trust you. Only if this plan is kept in mind, there are the chances to demonstrate how mature and sincere your intentions are.

Works Cited Covey, Stephen and Merrill, Rebecca. The Speed of Trust: The One Thing that Changes Everything”. New York: Simon and Schuster, 2006.

Reina, Dennis. Trust


Boosting a person’s Esteem Term Paper a level english language essay help

Introduction Human beings have a self image of how they look like, their weaknesses and strong points. This image is shaped from childhood and influenced by the society and the people we live with. This self image leads to self esteem. When a person think that he is inferior t0 their peers in one way or another, leads to low self esteem (McKay


New York versus Hong Kong Compare and Contrast Essay argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

New York and Hong Kong are among the biggest cities in the world. These two cities possess very different aspects. A quick glance at the streets of New York will leave one shocked. The streets and path ways are full of garbage that lies unattended. This shows that the local authorities in New York don’t pay attention to cleanliness.

To make it worse you will still find people peeing on the side walks. They do it with so much confidence because they don’t seem to be bothered by passers by. However the people of New York are quite outspoken therefore one should expect frequent compliments and vice versa. I mean if they really like something about you they will let you know.

New York City is not crowded compared to Hong Kong where one can’t see beyond a hundred yards. But then the crowds of New York are rather noisy because it’s in this city where you will find people who are drunk before sun set.

The side walks of Hong Kong are free from litter and thus one would be ashamed if he/she tries to litter around. The people of Hong Kong don’t talk much hence they are rather shy so do not expect someone to look you in the eye and tell you to zip up. They simply don’t poke their noses into other people’s affairs unless you bother them. Mind you Hong Kong have the strictest laws in the world, so if one finds himself on the wrong side of the law he/she should be ready to face the music.

The population of New York comprises of people who relocated from different parts of the world hence they brought their cultures with them. In this city you will come across Muslims, Jews, Latin Americans and every kind you can think of because the constitution here gives people freedom to exercise their cultures.

In fact the different cultures can never be in conflict because the people here accept their differences. Same-sex marriages in New York are allowed so don’t be surprised when you see two men or women kissing in public places. That can not happen in Hong Kong. The Asians are the majority apart from the few immigrants who have gone there to do business.

If you are a business person, Hong Kong is the best place for you because their commodities are relatively cheap. If one was to buy the same commodities in New York they would cost double. That’s why most traders are going for Chinese merchandise because they are cheap. However their commodities are not durable so in other words they are expensive.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For instance if you bought Chinese bulbs they are cheap but they can’t last longer like the ones from Europe and England which are specifically found in New York. But there are people who argue that one can find durable commodities in Hong Kong but that depends on whether you are ready to cough more money.

The most common kinds of food in Hong Kong are wheat and rice. The foods in Hong Kong include meals that were adopted from other nations that interacted with Hong Kong during the colonial period and later on in trade. The food joints in Hong Kong serve foods in small portions and therefore one has to eat several meals in a day.

May be that’s why most people in this city are thin compared to the people of New York who tend to be overweight because the restaurants in New York such as MacDonald’s serve food in large portions. In Hong Kong the meals are usually complimented with duck meat and as well as fish. The meals are heavily spiced.

If you order for spaghetti in Hong Kong the waiter will place two chopsticks on the side of your plate because most people in this city use chopsticks instead of forks. If you have never used chopsticks before you should ask the waiter to give you some tips or just ask him/her to bring you a fork.

There are some foods that are common both in Hong Kong and New York, such as MacDonald’s burger. In New York the waiter can rarely serve you without issuing you napkins but contrary to that in Hong Kong napkins are no where to be seen they assume napkins are meant for babies. It’s therefore recommended that one should come with his own napkin or tissue when dining in Hong Kong. Their cutlery is not complicated like that of New York because if they are not using chopsticks they opt to use their hands.

In New York one has to get used to using the napkin. The cutlery is also complex because a waiter may bring you an omelet and place a fork, a knife and a spoon on the side of your plate. The Hong Kong tea is usually without milk and is served in small cups hence if you are used to drinking a whole mug of tea you will have to drink several cups to quench your thirst. In New York the milk is plenty but still if one wants to have black tea it’s available.

The side walk stalls in Hong Kong are convenient for people who want to have a simple meal. In New York people don’t like buying food from street shops because the cleanliness of their dishes has not been verified, since their adjacent areas are dirty.

We will write a custom Essay on New York versus Hong Kong specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Since Hong Kong is overcrowded, it would be wise to travel in public means because if you chose to use your own vehicle you may be late for your destination and in the final end you may not secure a parking space. Additionally, there are not enough gasoline stations in Hong Kong hence if you run out of fuel you will have to cover longer distances before you find a gasoline station.

Public transport in Hong Kong comprises of electric trains and escalators which move very first but one can still walk if his/her destination is not far. Although cycling is common in other parts of china it’s not present in Hong Kong because the landscape is hilly hence cycling would be very tiring.

The ancient form of transport in New York was water but it has been reengineered to integrate both road and rail transport. There are tunnels that run below the rivers and lakes that are used as paths by vehicles and electric trains. The idea of tunnels was introduced because New York is also hilly like Hong Kong hence it has several water bodies that occupy the greatest percentage of ground.

Public transport in New York includes commuter trains that operate day and night. There are so many people who own vehicles in New York and yet very few of them drive to work. This is because public means is considered cheap and faster. Motorists are usually held in traffic during peak hours because the electric trains are given the first priority.

Shopping in Hong Kong is fan because the shopping stores are strategically located at the convenience of commuters. I prefer to buy at least a simple garment from every time I visit a city for the first time because the garment will be a reminder of the fun I had in that city.

For instance, if you want to purchase low cost clothes you should pay a visit to Argyle center. There are some stores in Hong Kong that are designated for ladies wear so if you are a lady who is conscious about fashion you should consider shopping at lady’s street market. In this market you will find ladies items like beauty products, female foot wear and clothing.

There have been allegations that claim that the merchandise in Hong Kong is mostly comprised of imitated brands therefore some people argue that they are not durable. This also applies to electronic products; so next time you shop in Hong Kong make sure the item you are about to purchase has a valid guarantee.

In New York the department stores offer their sales in fixed price tags hence if you are not well loaded pocket wise don’t shop in New York. For those who don’t care about commodity price there are so many items that can be bought from New York and they include designer cosmetics and clothing labels. For those who are obsessed about jewelry New York is the place to be. Most people show of their expensive jewelry because that’s the culture of hip hop artists.

Not sure if you can write a paper on New York versus Hong Kong by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The people of New York are known for integrating jewelry into almost everything such as in automobiles where the rims are made from gold. It is common to find people who possess diamond teeth in New York. In Hong Kong nobody dares to put on expensive jewelry for fear of apprehension.

Crime in New York has been on the decline due to the installation of surveillance cameras on most streets hence the New York police department is able to observe the events taking place in the streets. The only kind of crime that is persistent is homicide hence unless you ruffle other people’s feathers you don’t have to be afraid of walking alone at night. The by-laws of New York were amended such that one can not own several guns at the same time.

Crime rate in Hong Kong is also very low and it’s only done in discreet by organized gangs that extort money from small businesses and other enterprises at night. Prostitution is also common at night. These gangs are also involved in ferrying drugs but then they carry out their tasks without attracting attention.


Physician-Assisted Suicide Research Paper college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Table of Contents Abstract


Literature Review



Abstract This paper explores four scholarly articles that report on physician-assisted suicide. It draws its arguments from several sources that discuss the controversial decisions that doctors are expected to make. This paper examines Manning’s (1998) work on Euthanasia in relation to Gorsuch’s (2006) research.

Manning (1998) asserts that physician-assisted suicide is an act that requires a substantial amount of scrutiny before it is ever executed. Gorsuch (2006) argues that physician-assisted suicide should only be considered if the patient’s wellbeing is at stake. This paper highlights the different opinions within the fields of law and medicine. This paper also examines the moral and ethical decisions that doctors are expected to make with regard to euthanasia.

Introduction The medical community is always at a crossroads when it comes to making life-threatening decisions. Physicians are not permitted to assist patients in committing suicide. Doctors are often forced to make morbid decisions. Nevertheless, they are guided by a code of ethics. However, the American Society of Internal Medicine does not encourage physician-assisted suicide (Gorsuch, 2006). Physician-assisted suicide challenges the norms of medical professionalism (Manning, 1998).

According to Gorsuch (2006), the Hippocratic Oath enables doctors to make logical decisions. Helping a patient to commit suicide is similar to a breach of contract. Encouraging or legalizing physician-assisted suicide is a decision that the medical community does not support. There is too much controversy involved. The Hippocratic Oath requires doctor to put the patients’ needs above their own (Manning, 1998).

According to Cauthen (1998), “It also forbids the taking of fees for teaching medicine. This tells us that we have to judge each tenet by its own merits and not regard it as a final authority in all matters. The American Medical Association has consistently condemned physician-assisted suicide as an unethical practice” (p. 1). As such, the courts and the medical community should institute structures that regulate such procedures. There are extreme cases, which may require physician-assisted suicide.

Literature Review Statistical data has shown that public opinion favors physician-assisted suicide (Gorsuch, 2006). This is only evident in extreme cases, where the patient is likely to experience a slow and painful demise (Manning, 1998). The Hippocratic Oath often takes precedence over physician-assisted suicide. Doctors are expected to save lives. Taking a patient’s life is a decision that has not yet been determined by the courts.

Euthanasia refers to killing a person to ease their suffering (Manning, 1998). Manning asserts that there are two types of euthanasia. Active euthanasia is a process that occurs when a person administers drugs to ease the suffering of a terminally ill patient (Manning, 1998). Passive euthanasia is the act of withdrawing or withholding treatment that may sustain a given patient (Gorsuch, 2006).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Passive euthanasia is legal if when it corresponds to several medical procedures (Gorsuch, 2006). Passive euthanasia was performed in the case of Karen Quinlan (Manning, 1998). “Physicians argued that she was in an irreversible coma, caused by a drug overdose. Her life support system was withdrawn after the court ruled in her parent’s favor” (Gorsuch, 2006, p. 87).

Euthanasia is an established medical procedure (Manning, 1998). Most policy makers encourage doctors to act as caregivers and healers. Patient-assisted suicide goes against only one of these principles. A physician should tend to the needs of his patients. This may include withholding treatment if the patient decides that he does not want it.

Physician-assisted suicide refers to administering drugs to hasten a patient’s demise (Gorsuch, 2006). Most scholars argue that euthanasia refers to the act of killing a person o ease his suffering (Manning, 1998). The term loosely refers to taking a person’s life to ease their suffering.

Levin (2003) describes euthanasia as the act of killing a person who has an untreatable illness to ease their suffering. Voluntary active euthanasia is the process of injecting a patient with a deadly concoction upon their request.

“Involuntary euthanasia occurs when a medical provider or some other person administers a lethal dose of a drug to a patient without the patient’s specific request” (Levin, 2003, p. 1). This is a crime. It is an act of murder and the offender should face prosecution. A patient’s consent is paramount when it comes to withholding or administering treatment.

Physician-assisted suicide lacks unanimous support due to several conflicting factors. A patient may display some psychiatric symptoms (Manning, 1998). These symptoms may encourage the patient to seek medical assistance in committing suicide. The medical community does not stand for such behavior among its physicians.

“Since 1992, proposed legislation authorizing physician-assisted suicide has failed in Alaska, Arizona, Colorado, Connecticut, Hawaii, Iowa, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, Michigan, Nebraska, New Hampshire, New Mexico, Rhode Island, Vermont, and Washington” (Levin, 2003, p. 1). Patients suffering from psychosis should be given other modes of treatment such as counseling and rehabilitation (Gorsuch, 2006).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Physician-Assisted Suicide specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Some patients cannot afford to pay their medical bills. They would rather die than live in abject poverty. Some patients cannot afford to clear their medical expenses.

Such patients seek physician-assisted suicide. “According to recent surveys, a majority of doctors in some areas — 60% in Oregon, 56% in Michigan, and 54% in Great Britain — favor the practice in extreme circumstances” (Cauthen, 1998, p. 1). Gorsuch (2006) asserts that physician-assisted suicide is a practice that should only be acceptable if the patient is likely to die from the disease.

Withdrawing life support is an example of euthanasia (Gorsuch, 2006). It is not a form of physician-assisted suicide. Patients on life support are often given the chance to sign a Do Not Resuscitate Order if the need to do so should ever arise (Manning, 1998).

This disclaimer ensures that the patient does not receive life support when it seems necessary. Sometimes the decision falls on the patient’s spouse or next of kin. The person responsible for signing the document takes part in the process of euthanasia. This is only performed if the patient has little chance of surviving certain medical procedures.

Unrelenting discomfort encourages most patients to seek physician-assisted suicide (Manning, 1998). Some medical procedures employ the use of painkillers. Physicians may lower the dosage of such drugs to ensure that the patient does not become addicted to the medication (Gorsuch, 2006).

Such patients may continue to experience unrelenting discomfort. They may even seek physician-assisted suicide as a means to escape their seemingly torturous experience. According to Cauthen (1998), “most people recognize that taking the life of a violent aggressor to preserve one’s own life is permissible if this is the only way to keep from being murdered” (p. 1)

Manning (1998) argues that old patients suffering from untreatable illnesses should be given the right to choose physician-assisted suicide. Cauthen’s (1998) study states the following:

The restricted argument for physician-assisted suicide does not logically authorize the killing of all innocent people but only those whose who meet all three requirements stipulated. It is illegitimate to abstract some remote generalized feature and make deductions from it as if all the other factors don’t matter. They do matter. Circumstances alter cases. Hence, each situation must be taken up on its own with all its necessary features intact. Each situation has a configuration of components that are essential to it — all of which must be honored.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Physician-Assisted Suicide by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More To show that a slippery slope is present, it would be necessary to show that no relevant differences exist between a first step that is justified and subsequent steps that are not. If no relevant differences arise, the subsequent steps should also be acceptable.

If relevant differences are present, they must be taken into account to determine whether they draw a line that should not be crossed. A more formidable version of the slippery slope argument contends that the more general postulate in the defense of assisted death is the principle of individual autonomy.

If one believes that an individual has an unlimited right to determine when life has become intolerable, then obviously this cannot logically be restricted to cases in which the patient is dying and in intractable physical distress. People in all sorts of conditions might conclude that life had become hopelessly intolerable and opt for death (p. 1).

Terminally ill patients are major candidates for physician-assisted suicide. Some scholars have argued that such a patient reserves the right to choose how they intend to die (Gorsuch, 2006). A terminally ill patient engaging in physician-assisted suicide saves his family from escalating medical costs.

Some medical procedures only delay the inevitable. Doctors often inform the patients whenever risks are involved. Physicians are also advised to inform the patient of the potential risks involved when carrying out certain procedures. Physicians should also discuss procedures that may only prolong the patient’s suffering. They should help the patient to choose from a certain number of options.

Patients have the legal right to decide what kind of treatment they prefer (Manning, 1998). This depends on the options that are offered by the physician. Withholding or withdrawing life-sustaining treatment is a practice that is well established within the medical community (Gorsuch, 2006). In such cases, patients are expected to sign a disclaimer. This document ensures that no legal action is taken against the doctor should any complications arise (Manning, 1998). It also protects the patient’s interests.

A hospital can save on time and resources if physician-assisted suicide is applied in extreme cases. Manning (1998) argues that doctors and orderlies should spend most their resources on patients who may have a higher chance of survival. This process can save the lives of more healthy patients. It may seem cruel but it is effective. Doctors would rather save lives than waste valuable resources.

Terminally ill patients are often treated in the Intensive Care Unit. They need more medical resources than other patients do. Those who choose to engage in physician assisted suicide save both time and resources, which other patients may need.

Terminally ill patients and their relatives experience a lot of emotional pain and discomfort. Physician-assisted suicide can give them the closure they need (Gorsuch, 2006). Keeping the patient alive can be a slow and traumatizing experience for all the parties involved. According to Manning (1998), “patients would rather die with dignity than be reduced to a slow and painful death” (p. 114).

Doctors can harvest the vital organs of terminally ill patients who have engaged in physician-assisted suicide (Gorsuch, 2006). Gorsuch (2006) argues that these transplants can save the lives of other patients with curable conditions.

Manning (1998) argues that laws can be constructed to meet the needs of terminally ill patients. Legislative incentives can be put in place to regulate the use of physician-assisted suicide.

Other scholars argue against the use of physician-assisted suicide. Gorsuch (2006) argues that despite its many advantages, physician-assisted suicide violates the Hippocratic Oath. It can be used as an excuse to commit suicide under false pretenses.

Passing a law that permits physician-assisted suicide can encourage patients and doctors to abuse of its principles (Gorsuch, 2006). Patients suffering from psychosis may use physician-assisted suicide to escape from their own treatable illnesses (Manning 1998). Irresponsible doctors may use it to justify their mistakes.

Physician-assisted suicide does not correspond with several religious beliefs (Gorsuch, 2006). Most religions do not condone suicide. Religious groups argue that life is sacred (Manning, 1998). Medical miracles have occurred on several occasions. Terminally ill patients have a sliver of hope. Doctors can sometimes, misdiagnose a patient. In such situations, physician-assisted suicide may not be an option. “Fewer abuses might occur if current practices were open to scrutiny and regulation” (Cauthen, 1998).

Terminally ill patients take risks whenever they ask their physicians for assistance in committing suicide. Levin (2003) states that, “physician-assisted suicide became legal in the state of Oregon on October 27, 1997. From the date of legalization through December 31, 2000, there have been seventy reported cases of people utilizing the law to end their lives” (p. 1).

Conclusion Most people who commit suicide suffer from depression and anxiety (Gorsuch, 2006). Terminally ill patients are in a class of their own. Manning (1998) asserts that adequate pain relief is not responsible for the decisions that patients make with regard to physician-assisted suicide. Gorsuch (2006) agrees and argues that physicians should always prioritize the relief of their patients’ suffering.

“The main abuse now existing, however, is that by denying terminally ill patients a choice in hopeless situations, we consign those whose misery cannot be relieved to pointless, needless agony” (Cauthen, 1998, p. 1). Physician-assisted suicide is a complex and sensitive topic of discussion (Manning, 1998). Legislation is a possibility that needs to be scrutinized before an actual law can be passed (Gorsuch, 2006).

Such a law should protect the rights of terminally ill patients as well as comatose patients on life support (Manning, 1998). Cauthen (1998) argues that physician-assisted suicide should only be legalized if it corresponds to the following conditions; “1) The patient must be hopelessly ill and near death, (2) mentally competent, (3) in great and uncontrollable pain or discomfort, and (4) make a voluntary request to be given assistance in hastening death” (Cauthen, 1998, p. 1).

If all the necessary steps are taken, both active and passive euthanasia can be adopted as ethical medical procedures (Levin, 2003). Patients reserve the right to end their suffering (Levin, 2003). The procedure can offer a permanent solution to the problem.

References Cauthen, K. (1998). Physician-Assisted Suicide and Euthanasia. Web.

Gorsuch, N. M. (2006). The future of Assisted Suicide and Euthanasia. New Forum, 21(1), 227-308.

Levin, M. (2003). Physician-Assisted Suicide: Legality and Morality. What is Physician Assisted Suicide? Web.

Manning, M. (1998). Euthanasia and Physician-Assisted Suicide. Killing or Caring?, 47(1), 102-125.


New product development Essay argumentative essay help

There are various stages that have to be followed in coming up with a new product that will suit the market. In this case, our product will have to go through various stages before it is fully commercialized in the market. Therefore, new product development is a good process within the company’s strategic plan that needs to be well attended to (Koen, 2004, p. 8). As a matter of fact, our product will go through the following stages.

Idea generation

In this stage, ideas for the new product will be obtained through various channels. In a broad perspective, the company can get these ideas by conducting a good SWOT analysis. These ideas can also come from consumer and market trends (Ullman, 2009, p. 5). Employees and our sales men will play an important role in coming up with new ideas that will help us to develop and launch our new product.

Idea screening

Ideas that have been generated will be screened to come up with the best outcome. This will be done to eliminate unsound concepts that might not suit our market. Screening is necessary before resources can be devoted to the whole process of developing the new product (Koen, 2004, p. 12).

Concept development and testing

In this stage, the company will develop the engineering and marketing details that have to be used. This will include looking for the target market, the amount it will cost to develop the product and how the market will react (Ullman, 2009, p. 15).

Business analysis

Business analysis can be done by looking at various market dynamics. In this case, the company will have to come up with a price, estimate sales and project the break even point and profitability (Koen, 2004, p. 17).

Market testing and beta testing

In this stage, the company will have to test the product in the market and make the necessary adjustments in relation to customer needs and expectations (Ullman, 2009, p. 15). This will help the company to evaluate if the product is acceptable in the market.

Technical implementation

Technical implementation includes various processes that have to be followed or initiated (Ullman, 2009, p. 21). This include; resource estimation, logistical planning, contingencies, supplier collaboration and others.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Commercialization

In this stage, the company will now launch the product in the market (Koen, 2004, p. 23). As a matter of fact, the company will run various promotions and advertisements to popularize the new product in the market.

New product pricing

New product pricing involves various aspects that relate to the new product in the market. These aspects revolve around value segments of the product, product costs and value analysis (Ullman, 2009, p. 25). All this aspects should be evaluated because pricing will play an important role in the success of the product in the market.

Ideas There are various approaches that will be used to get ideas on the new product. As a matter of fact, the company will use distinct approaches and mechanisms to idea generation to get the best possible outcome. In this case, the company will carry out a basic research based on SWOT analysis (Ullman, 2009, p. 28). Other ideas will come from the current and existing consumers and market trends. It should be known that the company has its own research and development department that will also help in coming up new ideas.

Employees will be given an opportunity to have a say on product development. In extreme cases, the company will look at competitor products in the market to come up with its own product. Different ideas have to be filtered to settle on the best possible outcome (Koen, 2004, p. 25). In this case, the company will have to filter all ideas as time goes by. Forums will be used to share different ideas and come up with the best new product idea.

This is because different people can be able to identify faults in a given idea than when it is done on an individual basis. Critical analysis will also be done on each idea to identify its strengths and weaknesses (Koen, 2004, p. 28). This is because an idea can be technical and difficult to implement based on its strengths and weaknesses. In the long run, the company will settle on an idea with more strength and less weaknesses.

Software’s like Jive will also be used to filter and settle on the best possible idea. This will be done through the channeling of different voices from the market and competitors to pick the best idea (Koen, 2004, p. 15). The company will also run through its business values to settle on the best idea. This is because an idea might not be in conformance with the company’s goals and objectives.

Criteria For an idea to move to the next stage, it will have to suit the target market. This is because customers are supposed to benefit by using the product. In addition, the product must be technically feasible to be manufactured. An idea will only be selected if it can meet the current and expected market competitive pressure.

We will write a custom Essay on New product development specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This is because market trends are always changing as time goes by and a product must be flexible to suit such market needs (Ullman, 2009, p. 22). As a matter of fact, expected profits from the proposed product will be evaluated and analyzed to see if the idea is indeed feasible.

Flow chart Source: RFFlow, 2010

Reference List Koen, P, A. (2004). The Fuzzy Front End for Incremental, Platform and Breakthrough Products. New York: Prentice Hall.

RFFlow. (2010). Sample Flowcharts and Templates. Retrieved from

Ullman, D, G. (2009). The Mechanical Design Process. New York: Mc Graw-Hill.


History of Iran-contra Episode in the mid 1980’s Essay college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Iran-contra episode was a political scandal between United State and Iran in the mid 1980’s. In the scandal, weapons were sold by the U.S government to Iran where the U.S hostages who had been held in Lebanon were released. On U.S policy by then, it was not allowed to make any funding in relation to support of Contras on the Boland Amendment.

Contra groups were repels of which North, who was a Marine Corps during the scandal, held partial accountability in the deal of the weapons sale to Iran which occurred through the intermediaries. The scandal represented an aberration in American foreign country.

To start with, it is a representation of a policy inconsistency in America policy as there was an amendment made against such transactions where the Reagan administration discarded its official weapons to Iranians.

The U.S policy held the focus on restraining communism expansion but the Reagan doctrine basing on Iran-contra episode was determined in providing assistance to them that had aligned themselves against the government through Soviet Union. In 1985, there was the authorization bill which supported the anti-communist deter groups receiving full public acknowledgement.

Iran had been declared as the leading sponsor in matters related to the international terrorism. This was the reason behind the laid restrictions on sale of any weapons to Iran. The U.S officials laid the underpinning plan for dramatic policy shift in their favor towards Iran. Fighting terrorism was however recognized during the reign of Reagan as the utmost foreign policy main concern (Byrne and Kornbluh).

Iran-contra episode was considered to be a leadership problem instead of foreign policy’s problems in America on its objectives. In this view, foreign policy appraisal during the reign of Reagan is then important. Putting onto the considerations of the Reagan doctrine, American military had been underscored in power during the Vietnam experience.

Iran-contra episode was carried in the secrecy which involved the foreign policy procedures. The operations involved carried two main objectives which included the hostage release and support of contra repels. Upon the discovery of the operations there was legal and upheaval to the Reagan administration. This proceeded Iran-contra committee which was meant to uncover them that held full accountability of the episode so as to avoid any other illegal activities which could be related with the foreign policy in future.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Iran-contra episode brought about full illustration of how the Reagan administration fully embraced his doctrine. The episode also brought about jointly two vexing and troublesome foreign policies. One of the policies dealt with Sandinista regime which was in Nicaragua, in the view of affirmed Marxist with the soul intention of spreading rebellion in terms of revolution all through in Central America.

The second problem was associated with the Reagan administration dealing with Ayatollah Khomeini who led the Iranian regime and along with scholars supporters, had detained 63 Americans an act which happened in November 1979. In mid 1985, Reagan opted for the reversal on longstanding foreign policy to the sale of weapons to Iran in an attempt of freeing the U.S detainees (McCormick 144).

The episode affected both bureaucratic and content characteristics of U.S foreign policy. There was a damage of both transparency and integrity of the government’s policy and this posed the challenge on how Reagan set of guidelines were being approved.

It is conversely viewed as a means of privatization of what is supposed to be a public foreign policy with transparency to just few individual groups’ consideration, such as the American Security Council as well as the privatization on constitutional grounds (Holsti 115). It is therefore a dictatorship path where the executive directs all powers without questioning.

It cannot be overlooked the fact that Reagan administration had largely made some successful efforts in Soviet Union restoration and becoming a central of focus to the U.S on its foreign policy. This however did not take long as during the second reigning of Reagan as there was more on accommodation than the confrontations on the enforcement of the foreign policy in America.

There were staunch in reverence to the anti-communist policy but the results were mixed after the Iran-contra episode. The values contained in the foreign policies were challenged as well as the directions of these policies in America.

In conclusion, there were no changes which were made in the legislation so as to protect any other future breakdown which would happen in legality in reverence to foreign policy dealings. Even after the investigations were done, Reagan was only charged with the failure of carrying constitutional duty which demanded the upholding of regulations.

We will write a custom Essay on History of Iran-contra Episode in the mid 1980’s specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The investigations which were carried were however viewed as a way of interfering with Reagan’s foreign policy. It can even be viewed as a deep commitment which the major purpose was to seek for the freedom of hostages. The Iran-contra episode is however viewed as a political witch-hunt through the investigations so as to punish officials over the variance on foreign policy in America.

Iran-contra episode however, was an exposure to the zealous disregard which was carried by the executive branch to represent legislative constraints on American overseas policy.

Work Cited Byrne, Malcolm and Peter Kornbluh. The Iran-Contra Scandal in Perspective. 2010. Web.

Holsti, Ole R. Public opinion and American foreign policy. New York: University of Michigan Press, 2004.

McCormick, James M. American Foreign Policy and Process. New York: Cengage Learning, 2009.


Equal Pay for Women Essay college admission essay help

Table of Contents Background

Trend Common in Private Firms

Are Women Less Educated?

Wrong Career Choice?

Do Women Work Less?


Works Cited

Background In 1963, the Federal Government of the United States enacted the Equal Pay Act that effectively illegalized payment of different salaries to men and women for similar work on jobs that need similar qualification, effort, and responsibility and are performed under identical work settings.

A year after the act was enacted, the Civil Rights Act was passed and this illegalized the favoritism of workers on the basis of race, religion, color, or sex. Under these law amendments, it is illegal to pay women less than their male counterparts for equal amounts of work done, this includes job transfers, promotions, or pay increases; influence of job evaluations to disfavor women; or deliberately discriminate males and females into jobs based on their gender (AFL-CIO, para. 1).

More than 4 decades after these legislations were passed, women continue to receive less wages than men, especially in the private sector. The National Committee on Pay Equity reports that women still earn three quarters of what their male counterparts do. The percentage earning for colored women is even more appalling; African American women earn 67.5 % of what men earn, Latinas’ receive 57.7%, while Asian Americans receive 90%, all figures relating to the 2010 Census results (NCPE, para. 1, 2). It is not fair to pay women lower wages than men as both genders have the same ability and perform similar work under the same conditions.

State census data further indicate that females in full-time employment receive less than men in similar positions in every state, although the pay gap differs. This trend continues despite the same statistics indicating that 40% of women were the principal breadwinners for their families in 2009 (NCPE, para. 3, 4). It is for these factors that I am writing this letter to inform the state of women’s grievances.

Trend Common in Private Firms Many private firms and businesses have failed to perform equal pay audits. Any employee who raises the question of equal pay in such organizations risks his job. Monitoring such firms becomes difficult as they are under no legal obligation to make their pay statistics public. Moreover, the businesses operate robust ventures in more than one state and this creates a hurdle in attempts to look into the disparity between women and men’s wages.

When such disparities are detected in these corporations, proving that they are a result of gender discrimination is not easy. The management in these corporations base the disparity on factors such as education and level of experience. Other reasons given include the high earnings of a few white males, and gendered patterns of occupational and career choice (Bates, para. 5).

Are Women Less Educated? These claims are meant to make women comfortable with the wage gap- and possibly believe that they can avoid this situation by making similar educational, career, and wage-negotiation choices similar to those of men. Such content is unjustifiable. While it is true that pay is directly proportional to one’s educational status, using it to justify lower pay for women is totally unfounded.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Data from US Census shows that gender pay gap widens with increasing levels of education, for example, women earn 60% less than their male counterparts do in similar positions for those with a professional degree, 75% for doctorate degree, 72% for master’s degree, and 75% for bachelor’s degree, and so on (Lips, para. 3).

Wrong Career Choice? Another reason forwarded as a reason for pay gap between men and women is that of wrong selection of occupations. This is a fallacy. Women earn less than men in every career category. Information from the Bureau of Labor shows that only four career categories indicated comparable wages between men and women, the rest exhibit great disparity.

Therefore, shifting into higher paying jobs, whether male dominated or not, may not be a solution to the pay disparity (Lips, para. 5). Psychologists have repetitively shown that jobs related with women or need stereotypically female expertise are taken to be of a lower cachet and merit lesser pay than those related with men and need masculine expertise (Slipp, pp. 74).

Do Women Work Less? Another reason given for wage differences between men and women is that women do less work than men. This may be true as gender pay studies focus mainly on full-time employees, however, a look at wages of male and female employees who work for at least 40 hours in a week exposes that the gap widens with increasing hours of work.

Women working 41 to 44 hour in a week earn 15% less than men in the same category while those working more than 60 hours per week earn 21.7% less. In addition, women have to work longer to receive promotion. For instance, female teachers have to work three years more than men to receive promotion as principal, according to the National Center for Education.

Conclusion Past studies reveal that gender pat disparity is not likely to end any soon. There is a minor drop in the gap from data collected since the 1960s and this calls for urgent government intervention. One way of reducing the gap in the private sector would be to compel these firms to make public their pay audits and provide stiff penalty for firms that are found guilty of this conduct. The steps taken by the Equality and Human Rights Commission in combating gender pay gaps are commendable, but more needs to be done.

Works Cited AFL-CIO. It’s Time for Working Women to Earn Equal Pay. 2010. Web.

We will write a custom Essay on Equal Pay for Women specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Bates, Karen. Equal Pay Warning For The Private Sector. September 2, 2010. Web.

Lips, Hilary M. The Gender Wage Gap: Debunking the Rationalizations. 2008. Web.

NCPE (National Committee on Pay Equity). Wage Gap Remains Static. November 18, 2010. Web.

Slipp, Samuel. The Freudian Mystique: Freud, Women and Feminism. New York: NYU Press, 1995. Print.


Energy essay help online

Table of Contents Issues related to the use of fossil energy

The energy crisis

Solutions to the energy crisis

Difficulties in implementing the new solutions


Works Cited

Fossil fuels, which comprise of natural gas, oil and coal, constitute most of our energy that is consumed locally, approximately two thirds of the electricity energy and transportation fuels depends on the use of fossil fuels (Fraust 12). The increasing economy of the United States over the last number of decades can be majorly attributed towards the use of fossil fuels as a source of energy.

With present situation and a projected period of close to two decades, the American economy and energy security will still be fully dependent on the use of fossil fuels despite the development and establishment of new nuclear power technologies which are reliable and renewable. Global energy security is always imperative in ensuring the development of a nation; ranging from industrial development to better health facilities.

The United States has and will always be rely on the available and affordable fossil fuels to drive key sectors of the economy such as transport, the manufacturing industry and the power industry. Of course fossil energy is the most cost effective form of energy that is presently available in the United States. Industries that have relied on fossil energy over the years have depicted efficiency of the fossil fuels (Fraust 13).

Issues related to the use of fossil energy However, the continued use of fossil energy raises some concerns that would particularly affect the welfare and energy security of the United States. Some of the concerns include environmental issues associated with fossil energy particularly carbon dioxide emissions, rampant pollution which is the pertinent cause of green house effect and global warming (Fraust 21). The continued mining of coal means that most of our land will be destroyed rendering the already dug pieces of lands useless for carrying out any economic activity.

The current use of fossil energy appears beneficial, but the continued use of this kind of energy will be disastrous in the future. The use of crude oil is also responsible for the environmental pollution through tanker oil spill that were recently experienced. Such environmental issues that are associated with the use of fossil energy put the lives of the citizens of the America and the whole world at risk (Fraust 21).

The total reliance on fossil energy poses a threat to economy and the security of the United States in the future. Some of the possible risks associated with complete reliance of fossil energy to run the economy, security and welfare of the United States are its depletion and the inability to renew fossil energy. Natural resources are bound to depletion and crude ail and other fossil energy source are no exception.

The energy crisis The increasing energy needs in the future will not be met by fossil fuels alone (Richards 100). Necessary steps should therefore be implemented in order to control the current crisis that is as a result of increased dependency on fossil energy. Global energy imbalance is the primary cause of the energy crisis that is currently being experienced in the United States and almost everywhere in the world.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More If the united states is to rely completely on fossil energy in future, then the United States department of energy has a major task ahead concerning the efforts to ensure that fossil energy is never runs out which is practically impossible, because the fossil energy reserves will soon run out(Richards 100). The depletion of fossil fuels and lack of use of fossil energy does not warrant the stopping of the key sectors of the economy to move forward.

The economy and security of the United States of America is paramount. This implies that United States must establish new effective strategies; extensive research on fossil energy technologies and most importantly, develop other energy sources such as nuclear and solar power which are more reliable and renewable and environment friendly.

Presently fossil energy is the only available and reliable source of energy to drive the economy, but considering the long term effects of fossil energy may turn disastrous in future if alternatives to dependency on fossil fuels are not established (Richards 105).

Solutions to the energy crisis The reliance on fossil fuels is a crisis by itself and therefore appropriate measures should be taken to curb potential problems that are related to the use of fossil fuels. The only solution to this crisis is through the establishment of possible alternatives to substitute the use of fossil energy.

Currently, this may not seem as a problem but in the near future, the crisis is bound to reveal itself. Since the depletion time of the fossil fuels can be predetermined, it therefore implies that urgent solution to the energy crisis is established and implemented early enough before the crisis gets out of hand (Sinha 150). The established strategies that would be required to address this issue should be able to provide both short term and long term solutions.

The only effective though impractical would be to reduce the reliance of fossil energy and promote energy independent economy (Richards 107). The critical part in the present crisis is noted through the recent reduction in global supplies of crude oil and the political instability among the major suppliers and producers of crude oil and natural gas, the increasing demand of crude oil, competition for the available fossil energy and the increase in environmental costs that are related to the use of fossil energy.

The digging up of coal and the carbon emissions can not be sustained any longer due to the violation of environmental policies and land preservation policies. In order to keeps the economy moving, the United States must therefore come up with new energy technologies that have the capability to be renewed and are free from depletion compared to the fossil energy.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Energy


Kandariya Mahadeva temple and Taj Mahal: Style and Meaning Compare and Contrast Essay college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Architecture has always been one of the major means of expression of peoples’ vision of the better world, religious and social beliefs. There is a great number of glorious buildings that became cultural heritage of the world history. According to Devangana Desai:

“Art activity is a social process in which the artist, the work of art and the art public are interacting elements. The social history of art explores the dynamics of the relationship between the patron/public, the artist and the work of art in the context of the social formation of a given period of history” (3).

The Indian social history is closely related to its architecture. Style and meaning of Indian architectural buildings expresses the social character and religious beliefs of Indian people. There are two major temples widely known in the world that perfectly express this idea. These buildings are the Kandariya Mahadeva temple and the Taj Mahal. They are “the most characteristic artistic expressions of Hinduism that provide a focus for both the social and spiritual life of the community they serve” (Michell 14).

Though they are very different in form and design, as well as in their meaning, they express the ideas of life of the period in which they were built. As all temples, they were built with one purpose: to maintain the links between Indian people and their gods. In order to understand the peculiarities of style and meaning, it is necessary to explore these issues in details and compare them to one another.

One of the most important issues that influence on the form of the building is its purpose, or function. A famous American architect Louis Sullivan wrote, “form ever follows function”. This principle can be one of the explanations of the architecture of both buildings. The Kandariya Mahadeva is a great stone temple dedicated to god Shiva.

The temple was built in the middle of the 11th century. It is an example of the central Indian architecture style. In was built in honor of one of the major Indian gods. That is why it has a specific architecture design. It is a very big stone building decorated with stone sculpture figures of women engaged in different activities. Below, there are smaller friezes that depict different aspects of the social life of Indian people, processions of horses and figures of elephants, army, etc.

The building is also decorated with towers of different forms and sizes, “the principal shaft of the superstructure is almost completely obscured by a clustering group of miniature towers which grow in number as they descent, providing summit for each of the projections of the walls beneath” (Michell 121).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More A total number of figures is about 8000 and the height of them are about three feet high. In addition, unlike the sculptures in other temples, the sculptures of the Kandariya Mahadeva are slender and rather tall. The carvings of different gods, goddesses and spirits can be found on the malor shrine of the temple. This temple is a bit larger than other Kandariya temples, “(102 feet long by 67 feet wide and 102 feet high)” (Allen 210).

Among the interior compartments, there is portico, entrance hall, which was designed in order to impress people who came there, a very big main hall, chamber and ambulatory. The platform, on which the temple is built, is also decorated with figures of women. The temple is surrounded by a beautiful green field. The entire image of the temple was designed in order to create a special atmosphere of calmness and spirituality. However, according to Michell:

“The temples are much more than a mere setting for the practices associated with certain beliefs; it is imbued with a complex system of symbolism by which it embodies the most elevated notions of Hindu philosophy while still serving the requirements of everyday religious life.” (14).

Indeed, the design of the building perfectly shows Indian cultural traditions. The poses of some of the figures suggest “a yoga exercise” (Allen 210). The poses are performed as a kind of ritual promoting the Indian spiritual traditions. Moreover, the design of the temple suggests a divine mission of the temple and promotes special ideology.

As Kulke and Rothermund suggest, the construction of the temple “coincides with the increasing samantisation of the regional kingdoms of India” (139). The temples of such kind were supported with grants of land and there were many servants. Though, the construction of the temple was rather expensive, very soon they became self-supportive and, what is more, they brought a great benefit for the king.

There was even a personal priest for the king. Thus, style, subject matter and meaning of the Kandariya Mahadeva are closely related to the social structure and beliefs of the Indian society. It represented not only religious traditions and cultural life of Indian people, but was one of the means of power, “the economic and political functions of the temple were realized in the role of the king in the royal ritual” (Kulke and Rothermund 140).

As opposed to the Kandariya Mahadeva temple, the Taj Mahal has an absolutely different style and design, as well as, it had a different function. If the Kandariya Mahadeva temple was built in honor of god, the Taj Mahal was built in honor of woman. It is a “mausoleum raised in honor of Mumtaz Mahal and it is determined to produces the finest building possible” (Ballard 72).

We will write a custom Essay on Kandariya Mahadeva temple and Taj Mahal: Style and Meaning specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It is also known as the world’s most famous and inspiring memorial to love and devotion. It was created by the emperor Mughal Shah Jahan in 1632. Apart from the temple of Kandariya Mahadeva, it did not have any religious context and served only as a tomb. However, there is no building in the world that would produce so many legends and inspired so many poets to write about immortal love. Today, visitors from all over the world believe in its magic power and salutary qualities.

So, as well as Kandariya Mahadeva, it is the greatest building of its period, “It presents the high flowering of a civilization” (Ballard 73). If the style of Kandariya temple is purely Indian, the Taj Mahal is more Persian building than Indian. Its design is very romantic and tender:

“The Taj Mahal’s architecture is not for certain, but this much debated figure produced a design of flawless symmetry and exquisite elegance, a synthesis of Muslim and Hindu styles executed in rose sandstone and milk-white marble” (Preston and Preston 2).

The basic structure is a big cube with arched balconies, pishtaqs, columns and archways. Due to such construction, the design of the building is symmetrical. There are several chambers and in the main one, there are two sarcophagi of Shah Jahan “the sultan, who created the place, wishing to enshroud his dead wife with unheard-of splendor.” (Berinstain 148) and his wife.

The largest dome of the mausoleum is the Taj. It is also considered to be one of the wonders of the world. It is decorated with a lotus. Actually, the lotus motifs can be observed in many decorative elements of the building.

The finial is decorated by the mood, a typical element of the Islamic architectural tradition. Thus, we can say that Taj Mahal is very different from the Kandariya Mahadeva temple in its form, format and composition. The temple is made from sand and stone and widely decorated with sculptures. In its turn, the Taj Mahal is made from marble and decorated with carvings, paintings, stone inlays and stucco.

However, both of the buildings have specific meaning and deep social context. Apart from religious meaning, both architectural buildings reflect Indian traditions. In addition, both of them transfer the social aspect of power. The Kandariya Mahadeva temple deals with the issues of religious and political power, and the Taj Mahal embodies the power of feeling of love.

Thus, both buildings are the brightest representatives of the Indian architectural culture and traditions. They are very different in design, style and construction as these issues were determined by their purposes and social structures of the époques in which they were built. However, there is one common thing that unites these buildings, it is the issue of power as the aspect of the social context. The Kandariya Mahadeva temple deals with the politic power and Taj Mahal is the world’s most famous symbol of power of love.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Kandariya Mahadeva temple and Taj Mahal: Style and Meaning by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Works Cited Allen, Margaret Prosser. Ornament in Indian Architecture. London: Associated University Press, Inc, 1991.

Ballard, Martin. Era Histories: 11 Land of the Great Mogul, Akbar’s India. London: Taylor and Francis, 1973.

Berinstain, Valerie. India and the Mughal Dynasty. New York: Harry Abrams, 1997.

Desai, Devangana. “Social Dimensions of Art in Early India”. Social Scientist. 18 (3), 1990: pp. 3-32.

Kulke, Hermann, and Dietmar Rothermund. A history of India. New York: Routledge, 2004

Michell, George. The Hindu Temple: An Introduction to Its Meaning and Forms. New York: Harper and Row, 1988.

Preston, Diana, and Michael Preston. Taj Mahal: Passion and Genius at the Heart of the Moghul Empire. New York: Walker and Company, 2008.


Formal Written English is disappearing Argumentative Essay best college essay help

Introduction Social network sites have changed the styles and techniques of writing for instance; texting involves use of abbreviations or many different techniques of crafting short messages and use of self-devised short hand techniques of instant messaging. Social network sites or technologies such as chartrooms or texting procedures do not require a stipulated format or standard of writing.

The problem requires urgent rectification and personal action since most users are aware of the effects on formal written English, but ignorantly continue to promote the use. The practice is very pervasive, therefore there is a general regard of the practice as a register emergent language or form of writing having its own styles are rights.

The blame often falls upon the proliferation of portable technology and internet real-time communication such as instant messaging (IM) or the chartrooms. This paper forms an argument that the informal style of communication is causing disappearance of the formal English and therefore people ought to reconsider the excessive usage outside of academia.

Currently, the most effected group are the youth who are highly involved in the social form of interaction. According to Crystal (p 18), the informal styles have two major ill effects namely, spelling degradation and corruption of formal English language. Globally, there are concerns of the informal styles creeping into the academically registered languages.

In line with Lenhart et al (p 1), most United States youth admit that various aspects of social writing are today part of their academic writing. Students either are not able to avoid informal techniques in their formal and appropriate styles of writing for the diverse academic context, or are not aware of the unofficial text appearances in their formal writings.

Various research reports indicate that students are aware of the effects of the slang and formulated short-hand form of communication on the academic skills and formal writing, but in most instances, they are often not aware that they have used the informal styles in the academic writing (Hyland, p 48). To these students, the style seems formal because of being accustomed to its use.

The informal styles of writing such as chartroom slangs and short cuts for messaging are perfect styles of building rapport, finding unique identity and enhancing social lives, but are definitely ruin effectiveness of worldwide academic writing.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The constant uses of the slang, short-cuts styles of texting and informal languages during writing and discussions, causes one to become accustomed to the approach and it is very hard to eliminate the style even when the situation demands for formality. Many people today face difficulties of constructing a perfect error-free and formal job application cover letter, essay or a research paper because of the same reasons (Hyland, p 48).

There is evident punctuation or grammar mistakes in academic writing that are characteristic to the informal styles of communication. On a positive note, today social setting requires teachers to take initiative of using the blogs to guide students informally and contrary, they have to guide them in academic writing as well.

If most people are today not able to tell the difference between lingo of chartrooms or short cuts of short messages and requirements of academic writing, then the situation poses bigger concerns. Other than highlighting importance on teachers and parent to emphasize need for formality among children and the youth, there is need to accept the negative effects that the informal style have in most of our day-to-day lives, especially on official and academic matters (Hyland, p 50).

It is almost certain that the issue of text messaging, emailing, online chatting and correspondence exchanges through social sites have overcome the traditional formal styles of exchanging written mails. It is the new global technological style of digital communication embraced as the current and common style of communication.

Research indicates that informal writing is more widespread among American youths compared to the formal style of writing (O’Connor, p 2). The instant messaging caused by the digital communication such as the Internet is a real-time style that is not easily replaceable for example the short-text form of instant communication via mobile phones is part of every average person’s daily life due to efficiency.

The effectiveness is however transforming to negative effects on the command of formal spoken or written English language. According to O’Connor (p 2), there are mixed reactions from research finding over the effects of Instant messaging and the technological effect is a major topic of debate.

The informal style of communication reduces communication difficulties associated with distance, time and money. Although there is support of instant and quick style of delivering messages, the formal level of communication lacks required support.

We will write a custom Essay on Formal Written English is disappearing specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The increases use of the style is a clear indication that the youth and children in the current as well as future generations grow and develop the informal styles as natural forms of communication. The socialization skills that past generations had are generally very different from the contemporary one since the past had a close link to formality.

All these are supporting evidences indicating the effects of the current communication protocol, but the debate does not change the situation. There is need for individual efforts or reactions towards change of current use of slang or other informal styles of communication and need to influence positive perception over introduction of formality on the current modes of social interaction among children as well as the youth.

It all depends on how one would interpret the informal form of communication. Is it a breakdown or an evolution of the formal written English language? Is it possible to capitalize on the slang usage to enhance traditional learning? Most scholars and those who understand the importance of formality will agree that inexcusable abbreviations, grammar mistakes and poor punctuations in academic texts differ depending on writer’s origin.

This means that the short cut and slang also differ from one region or social group to another globally. It is very hard to make such adoption of language common, defend it as cultural growth, and most importantly have common global understanding or usage of such informal styles of writing.

The slang forms of punctuations are arguably insults to the formal English and use of technology. It is the high time people stop pointing accusation fingers to the emergence of technology and embrace change in a right manner by incorporating and emphasizing on right form of written English, punctuations, abbreviations or short-hand writing that is also applicable in the academic platforms.

English teachers are spending a lot of teaching time correcting internet writing and speaking such as use of ‘you ‘ and not ‘u’ and many other common short forms used informally.

For most young people differentiating between formal and informal is not possible because everything seem accurate and normal and thus the reason they will consequently write “I want 2 be an Eng Teacher b4 2012 like u” in a formal writing. Instinctive corrections in such cases fail and this becomes a societal responsibility to put across such wrong usage explicitly.

If your child’s teacher requested you to assist in correcting the poorly written formal grammar, how would you explain the incorrectness of the slang your have been supporting all along?

Not sure if you can write a paper on Formal Written English is disappearing by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Works Cited Crystal, David. ‘Txting: The Gr8 Db8.’ Oxford: Oxford University Press. 2008. Print.

Hyland, Ken. Teaching and Researching Writing. New York, NY: Longman, 2009. Print.

Lenhart, Amanda, Rainie Lee, and Lewis Oliver. Teenage life online: The rise of the instant-message generation and the Internet’s impact on friendships and family relationships. September 2009. Web.

O’Connor, Amanda. Instant Messaging: Friend or Foe of Student Writing? March 2005. Web.


Argument for Removing Vending Machines in Schools Argumentative Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Table of Contents Introduction

Argument Against Vending Machines

Arguments for Vending Machines

Discussions and Conclusion

Introduction There has been a steady decline in the health of school going children in the U.S. This decline in health has mostly been characterized by a rise in childhood obesity which not only increases the risk of physical health consequences to the child but also psychosocial health issues.

This decline in health has been as a result of poor nutrition and unhealthy eating habits by most students. Ironically, junk foods which are responsible for the poor diets by children are readily available in schools through the vending machines which dispense chips, sodas and other foods that are of low nutritional value to the children. This paper shall argue that in order to ensure the health of children, vending machines which dispense sodas, energy drinks and junk foods should be removed from schools.

Argument Against Vending Machines While health issues such as childhood obesity can be attributed to a number of causes, the one major reason for obesity is overindulgence in unhealthy foods. Vending machines have been known to encourage unhealthy eating since all the foods and drinks that are offered by vending machines are of little nutritional value therefore making children prone to obesity.

Students are especially found of vending machine products. The foods and drinks available from dispensing machines are high on fats and sugars, both of which are known to cause overweight as well as obesity.

Proponents of vending machines may argue that children have a choice to not buy the unhealthy food stuff and opt for healthier foods offered within the school. However, this is unlikely to occur since the junk foods and drinks offered by vending machines in schools are more attractive to the students. It is unlikely that a child will buy a fruit or vegetables while he/she could buy a soft drink or a candy bar. The presence of vending machines therefore tempts students to eat unhealthy foods.

Fast foods and junks result to excessive body weight which has been linked to diabetes and fatal conditions such as strokes. As such, it can be argued that vending machines dispense foods and drinks that may have dire consequences to the consumer. In addition, these diseases that can result from consumption of vending machine products result in increased medical expenditure for the country.

Considering the fact that the products dispensed by the vending machines can be replaced by products that are of a healthier nature, it makes sense to remove this machines which dispense foods and drinks that may cause fatal conditions to the consumer as well as high medical expenses.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Arguments for Vending Machines Vending machines are not all negative and they make a positive contribution to the school. Vending machines result in corporate sponsorship for the school in which the vending machine is placed. This corporate sponsors offer monetary assistance to the school in return for a chance to advertise and distribute their products to the students.

This assistance may be in the form of building or even equipping the school’s library or gym or other projects which are useful to the school. As such, the school will benefit greatly as a result of the vending machines being in their school.

Vending machines also provide a cheaper means for some students to get their foods. Some students cannot afford the expensive nutritious diets that are offered in schools. As such, vending machines provide such students with a means with which to sustain themselves within their budget. Considering the fact that students only eat their lunch and break meals in schools, vending machines may not have an adverse impact on their health if the students go home and take nutritious means for their supper and breakfasts.

Discussions and Conclusion Failure to deal with the issue of unhealthy nutrition among students will have various adverse effects. Poor nutrition has been seen to cause obesity and overweight in children; both of which impact negatively on the child’s mental health and school performance. For example, obese students are more likely to suffer from exclusion from peer group activities and may also experience some form of discriminatory actions from adults.

These behaviors are not only negative to the child’s psychological well being but also his/her academic performance. It is therefore necessary to deal with the vending machines which contribute to poor healthy which has far reaching consequences on the child’s welfare.

This paper set out to argue that vending machines that dispense soft drinks and sweets should be removed from our schools since they increase the health risk to children. To reinforce this assertion, this paper has forwarded various arguments of why vending machines should be banned.

A discussion on the positive attributes of vending machines has also been given so as to present a balanced view on the topic. From this paper, it is evident that vending machines result in a school setting that favors unhealthy eating habits. The only way which this problem can be solved is by removing the vending machines. While removing vending machines will come at a cost to schools, the benefits in the form of improved health of the students will be worth the cost.

We will write a custom Essay on Argument for Removing Vending Machines in Schools specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More


Technology and Writing Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Technological advancement has led to great impact on writing. Like in other areas, advancement in technology has influenced the way people write both positively and negatively. Writing emails, chatting using social networking websites and writing short text massages have become day to day activities.

Today computer has become the basic tool for writing. Instead of using pen and paper or typesetting, today people prefer to type their work using word processors. Word processors are the technology that has great influence on my writing process. I prefer to use word processor software when writing instead of conventional ways. In the paper, I report impact of word processors on my writing process.

Using word processors has transformed my writing to a higher level. When using traditional pen and paper, I had to care more on mechanics of writing than communicating my message. I paid undue attention to hand writing, spelling, sentence structure and other basic mechanics. By using word processors, I am able to concentrate more on writing rather than caring about my hand writing or trying to check up spelling in a dictionary.

Word processors have allowed me to write at ease and improve on my critical thinking and writing. Before embracing word processors, writing seemed very complex. Before producing a final piece of writing, I had to go through many tedious steps including making an outline, writing a draft, editing and recopying the final draft. Using word processors has not only helped me to overcome mechanical difficulties in writing but also improve my attitude towards writing.

Word processors have many advantages over conventional pen and paper or typesetting. The main advantage of using word processors is ability to edit work without having to recopy. Word processors make it easy to edit, enabling one to correct mistakes, add or remove ideas without having to rewrite a piece of work.

Ability to rewrite my work without having to recopy motivates me to revise my work and therefore improve my writing skills. Unlike when using conventional ways, using word processor allows me to write quickly. Word processors have inbuilt support that make writing and editing to be considerably fast. Because of support provided by word processors, I do not worry much about style when using them but instead concentrate on communicating my message.

Good writing is a process that can take many years to achieve. Practice and learning through mistakes are important to writing. Using word processors makes writing enjoyable to me and motivate me to practice the skill. Using word processors, I can retrieve pieces of writing written in the past and try to improve on them.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In addition to revisiting my work, work processors makes it possible to share my work with other people who can advice me on how to improve. In spite of many positive contributions of word processor to my writing, they have shortfalls. Sometimes I am not able to spot my mistakes in writing when using word processors. In addition, dependence on some tools in word processor such as spelling checker inhibits ability to do so without help.

Technology significantly influences writing. Word processors are the technology that has great influence on my writing process. Using word processors enables me to concentrate on communicating my message rather than worry about mechanical difficulties. Using the technology I can edit or improve my work much easily than in conventional ways. Technology has become part of our life and adopting technology in writing is in order.


To what extent did the Cold War shaped the US relations with Latin America? Essay college admission essay help

Table of Contents A case study of Central American in 1980s

The US and Nicaragua

The US and El Salvador

The US and Guatemala




A case study of Central American in 1980s After the Second World War the relationship between the US and Soviet Union was changed from anti Nazi partners to latent enemies. But because of the nuclear threats from both sides, the possibility of a real battle became very small and a new form of cold war known as the competition between military, economies, politics, diplomacy, ideology and so on started.

During the cold war both sides were trying to gain more international influence and power, so foreign policy became especially important. In term of the US and Latin America relation had changed a lot because of it. This essay is going to talk detailed about those changes and focus on countries like EI Salvador,Nicaragua and Guatemala .

During the Second World War the partnership relation between US and Latin American was very good and strong. For example, in the first two years of the war most Latin America countries were neutral as US, after US joining the war they stopped diplomacy with those fascism countries and claimed war against them Mexico and Brazil even sent troops to fight with US.

Other Latin American countries also had done a lot to provide many material supports to US (Zhu 2002 p19). After the war although US did a lot to deepen its influence in economic, political and military terms but because its interventions anti US sense was popular in those Latin American people. In 1959, the Cuba victory pushed this sense to a very high level and rang the alarm to US.

In 1960, US have changed a lot of its attitude to Latin America. The reasons are on one hand, the great fear to the Soviet Union catch up and expansion, on the other hand the fear of Cuba bring communism domino effect to the Latin America countries and finally surrounded by the red empire (Priestland 2010 p48).

From 1960, US launched a lot of actions to suppress communism and gain its power in Latin America. Firstly, the long term actions toward Cuba to intervene and subvert the communism government. One thing should notice is it was not an independent movement but a collective one, countries like Dominica and Guatemala also involved. (Priestland 2010 p48). The relationships between the US and Latin American countries divided into clear branches.

Secondly, ideology competition with communism accompanied with military actions. This movement was trying to reconcile the relationship through ideology penetration and economic aid and at the same time defeat the communism ideologically and physically. (Zhu 2002 p26) But outcomes are not all good as predicted because these ideologies also raised disputes between the US and authoritarian regimes in Latin America.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Thirdly, mainly after the 1980s besides dollar diplomacy to Latin American, the US gave more concentration to Central America and Caribbean area as their most urgent task and changed their military and political strategy to a low intensity one. Nicaragua and EI Salvador can be good examples to understand the policy. (Priestland 2010 p51)

Nicaragua is quite different from other communism country, the reform of the Sandinistas was relatively soft and did not rose much class conflicts maybe partly because the avaricious Somoza regime that only the Somoza family owned 20% of the country’s cultivable land. (Skidmore


Eastern Influences over Ingres’s “The Grande Odalisque” and Henri Matisse’s “The Woman with a Hat” Term Paper essay help free: essay help free

This paper intends to discuss the similarities and differences of two different styles of pieces. The first one is Jean-Auguste Dominiques Ingres’s, Grand Odalisque, and the second piece is, Henri Matisse’s, The Woman with a Hat.

The discussion will show the emergence of exotic cultures’ influences, similarities and course the painters’ similarities on different eras of time[1]. Even though, there are six to seven decades in between these artists’ working eras, their styles of redirecting the art education towards new limits, are familiar.

Both artists’ pieces are influenced by the near East exoticism; to be more specific, Matisse’s, The Woman with a Hat, was painted in south France, when at the time, traveling between continents started to become a more efficient possibility, resulting in increased numbers of different cultures emerging from human trade and ending up in south France.

This was enough cause for Matisse to get influenced and experiment with the wild colors and exotic appeal of the idea of the East even he never left Europe to see the North Africa nor its wide palette of cultural connections made available on his time[2].

On the other hand, Ingres Grand Odalisque’s cause of birth was more politically involved under Napoleon’s leadership. With the help of the new technologies helping human kind to travel through oceans more efficiently, through the early stages of industrialism, and of course Napoleon’s unstoppable urge to walk towards the East, brought in a forbidden curiosity to the neoclassical art world’s newly trained artists to take a step beyond from what was thought to them.

Napoleon’s sister, Queen Caroline Murat, commissioned the piece in 1814 for which Ingres never get paid for, because of the collapse of the Murat regime in 1815 on Ottoman ground; by the end of the Napoleon’s dynasty, he ended up in Rome (Krén 1) where he belonged because of his —.

The primitive state of the East, with its savagery of women being held in Harem’s, exploited and available, was a clear sign of a fallen empire already (Krén 2). Even though, the idea of Harem was not accepted at all on Europe, it sure exhilarated the French artists, enough to start a new movement called, romanticism in its essence with sincerity and need of new exotic visual tastes.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Jean-Auguste’s Odalisque caused serious amount of criticism because of the style mixes of neoclassicism with new unorthodox romantic themes (Grande Odalisque 1). Imaginary world of romantic love, freedom of thought, individualism and self-expressionism was everything the Ingres chose instead of an accepted single style of academic art thought and imposed on class teachings (Wright1).

As the best student of Jacques-Louis David’s, Ingres refused the foundation of an orthodox teaching of arts at an early age. Instead, he focused his self-educatory behavior on the original Greek and Roman art[3].

The initial response towards the piece was the close and brutal examination of the women’s body’s proportions and the lack of realism on anatomical level (Grande Odalisque 2). Ingres was not aware however, that in a year, Manet’s Olympia, would be admired by the whole art exhibition community making it unfair his time.

Time passed and his unorthodoxly executed piece would find its real value after couple years by getting accepted from the artist community and by later years encourages artists like Matisse to discover female nude all over again (Wright 2).

Henry Matisse[4] was one of the most influential and progressive artists of the 20th century. His works were also greatly influenced by new technological advancements and cultural relations. It was reflected in the psychology and spirituality of his works. His “stylistic innovations fundamentally altered the course of modern art and affected the art of several generations of younger painters, spanned almost six and a half decades” (Dabrowski n. pg.). His main intention was to examine the essence of things.

Much of his works were inspired by Ingres’ Grand Odalisque which was not recognized by critics of the Ingres’ period, but was acknowledged later. New tendencies in painting were reflected in Matisse’s use of colors, which he used “in their maximum strength” (Lewis and Lewis 396).

He discovered that colors can have a great influence on produce a desirable effect. The discovery of this idea helped him to add many decorative elements to his pictures and, at the same time, avoid chaotic scenes[5]. He promoted that color and shape can give to the artist more freedom and let the fantasy create unpredictable scenes.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Eastern Influences over Ingres’s “The Grande Odalisque” and Henri Matisse’s “The Woman with a Hat” specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Indeed, the paintings of Matisse are full of life and energy. His innovative style suggested the escape from the rules of realism and gave “a respond to natural world, that he called a living harmony of colors, a harmony analogous to a musical composition” (Lewis and Lewis 396). Though, some of Matisse’s works were not pleasantly accepted, he remains one the of the first artists “responsible for significant developments in painting and sculpture” (Henri Matisse n. pg.).

Thus, Henry Matisse and Jean-Auguste Dominiques Ingres are two painters that brought innovations in the paintings of their époques. Their works were formed under the influences of great social and cultural relations and both artists were innovators who introduced new technological advancements in their times. Thus, two paintings under analysis, Grand Odalisque, and The Woman with a Hat show the differences and similarities in the styles of both artists.

As it has already been mentioned, the painting by Ingres was inspired by the exotics of the East. It depicts “a woman of the harem surrounded by luxurious accessories in a pose reminiscent of David’s Madame Recamier”.

The artist used mild colors and lines to transfer the beauty of a real woman, and “not an allegory of Venus” (Krén 2) like it was in works by Titian and Giorgione. In addition, the artist managed to show the Western beauty surrounded by Eastern scenery, though, he was not inspired by the works of Eastern artists, as their traditions did not allow painting nude women.

Moreover, women in Turkish harems were dressed in costumes, rather than being nude. So, the painting of Ingress was a mixture of classical traditions, exotic Eastern theme and modern technique of painting. He was the first who managed to unite these issues in one picture.

As well as Ingres’ Odalisque, Matisse’s The Woman with a Hat was an innovation in the world of art and “in the center of controversy” (Woman with a Hat n. pg.) that put a beginning to a new artistic movement. As it has already been mentioned, Matisse made use of new methods in use of colors that allowed creation of everyday scenes without adding chaos to the whole picture.

The Woman with a Hat suggested more individualistic and expressive style that marked out the author as innovator. The unnatural use of colors add life and expressiveness to the picture. The woman is depicted in a classical French dress, she is a typical French bourgeoisie. However, the lines and colors make it passionate and expressive. The hat is very significant detail that puts together the focus of the picture, in other words, it is a central figure of the painting.

The hat is the most bright and rich in color element of the picture. It attracts attention and, actually, holds it. With closer look, the picture seems abstract and non-real, however, the technique suggests that one should have the overall impression and perceive each element as a single unite. This technique was also adopted by Pablo Picasso who also made his contribution to new artistic movement called later expressionism.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Eastern Influences over Ingres’s “The Grande Odalisque” and Henri Matisse’s “The Woman with a Hat” by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More So, Jean-Auguste Dominiques Ingres and Henri Matisse are two great artists separated in time, but very close in perception of art. Each of them introduced new painting technique in painting that literally changed the attitude to the meaning and purpose of art. Both, Ingress and Matisse, were representatives of different styles and schools. However, it was Ingres who inspired Matisse to create many of his works.

The major issues that made those artists introduce such radical changes into the world of art were great social, political and scientific innovations, as well as technological development. Society could not stay the same and, as art is the reflection of the social changes, it could not be unchanged as well. Thus, new tendencies in art were the result of new psychological and cultural changes in society in times of Ingress and Matisse.

Works Cited Dabrowski, Magdalena. “Henri Matisse (1869–1954)”. In Heilbrunn Timeline of Art History. New York: The Metropolitan Museum of Art. Web.

“Femme au Chapeau.” 15 Nov 2010. Web.

Krén, Emil. “Ingre, Jean-Auguste-Dominique, Biography.” Web Gallery of Art. Web Gallery of Art, 01 Jan 2005. Web.

Lewis, Richard, and Susan I. Lewis. The Power of Art. New York. Cengage Learning, 2008.

Vassilika, Eleni. Greek and Roman Art. Cambridge. Cambridge University Press, 1998.

Wikipedia contributors. “Grande Odalisque.” Wikipedia, The Free Encyclopedia. Wikipedia, The Free Encyclopedia, 19 Jun. 2010. Web.

Wikipedia contributors. “Henri Matisse.” Wikipedia, The Free Encyclopedia. Wikipedia, The Free Encyclopedia, 12 Nov. 2010. Web.

Wikipedia contributors. “Woman with a Hat.” Wikipedia, The Free Encyclopedia. Wikipedia, The Free Encyclopedia, 6 May. 2010. Web.

Wright, Anne. “Ingre’s Grand Odalisque from a Book Talk by Susan Siegfried.” Yahoo! Contributor Network, 12 Apr 2010. Web.

Footnotes For a full description neoclassical attitude to exotic East, see Richard Lewis, and Susan I. Lewis, 354 – 356.

“Femme au Chapeau.” 15 Nov 2010. Web.

Eleni Vassilika. Greek and Roman Art. (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1998.) P. 6.

Richard Lewis, and Susan I. Lewis, The Power of Art. (Belmont: Cengage Learning, 2008) 396.

Richard Lewis, and Susan I. Lewis, The Power of Art. (Belmont: Cengage Learning, 2008) 396.


Monogamy as an acceptable system of marriage in America Essay cheap essay help

The choice between polygamy and monogamy family patterns requires considering the psychological, sociological, and spiritual aspects of marriage. The definition of family as a spiritual union of two partners is a weighty argument for justifying monogamy as the only acceptable practice of marriage in the United States.

The forms of families differ significantly throughout the world and the choice of the appropriate pattern depends upon the religious, philosophical and cultural background of a particular community. Monogamy as the marriage between two partners is recognized as the only legal form of marriage in the United States (Mooney, Knox and Schacht 161). At the same time, there are some situations in which the cultural background of an individual contradicts the current legislation of the country in which he/she lives.

For example, immigrants who come from the countries in which the polygamy is accepted, as a rule, do not give up their accustomed lifestyles but have to hide it from the community. According to the current legislation of the United States, polygamy can become the ground for deportation. The question is whether the state should make an exception for those who have polygamy families because of their ethnic origin and the system of their beliefs.

However, it would mean that people who can justify their persuasions with their system of beliefs would have the right for violating the law because along with the ethnic origin and cultural background the polygamy is rooted in the system of beliefs. The assertions of Augustine, an influential philosopher and theologian, concerning the family as a spiritual union of two people have not lost their actuality nowadays and might be taken into account for solving the moral dilemma of the acceptable family patterns.

Analyzing the marriage of Adam and Eve before the Fall as a purely spiritual relationship, Augustine tried to define the concept of sin with regards to family and procreation (Reynolds 241). Augustine shifted the emphasis from procreation as the primary and natural motivation for marriage towards satisfying the spiritual needs of the spouses.

Considering the customs and the cultural background of the American community, the marriage traditions are rooted in the Christian doctrines which depreciate polygamy as an example of lust. Still, even the interpretation of the Bible Holy Scripture concerning polygamy and monogamy is not unanimous and the examples of patriarchs who lived with several wives and had children with their lovers gave rise to the prolonged debates.

Explaining this controversy between the Bible teachings and the personal example of patriarchs, Augustine pointed at procreation as the only their motivation for marrying several women. “He [Jacob] used the women not for sensual gratification, but for the procreation of children” (Braun 247).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Taking into account the changes in the system of beliefs and the society norms, the need for the procreation became obsolete and cannot be regarded as the primary motivation for creating a polygamy family. “In the present altered state of customs and laws, men can have no pleasure in a plurality of wives, except from an excess of lust” (Braun 248).

The goal of procreation was obsolete even in Augustine’s times, not to mention the American society of the third millennium. The moral desirability of preserving the monogamy as the only acceptable pattern of creating a new family can be justified with the demand for satisfying the spiritual needs of the present day men and women which is possible only on the condition of ensuring the equal rights for both spouses.

Considering the spiritual needs of contemporary citizens and Augustine’s definition of family as a spiritual union of two partners, monogamy should remain the only acceptable marriage pattern.

Works Cited Braun, Nathan (ed.). The History and Philosophy of Marriage: A Christian Polygamy Sourcebook. San Francisco: Imperial University Press. 2005. Print.

Mooney, Linda , David Knox, and Caroline Schacht. Understanding Social Problems. Belmont: Cengage Learning. 2008. Print.

“He [Jacob] used the women not for sensual gratification, but for the procreation of children” (Braun 247).

“In the present altered state of customs and laws, men can have no pleasure in a plurality of wives, except from an excess of lust” (p. 248).

We will write a custom Essay on Monogamy as an acceptable system of marriage in America specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Reynolds, Philip. Marriage in the Western Church: The Christianization of Marriage during the Patristic and Early Medieval Periods. Danvers: Clearance Center. 2001. Print.


Globalization Positive and Negative Impacts Research Paper cheap essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The origin of Globalization

Positive Impact of Globalization

Negative Impacts of Globalization

China and India and the World’s Economy


Works Cited

Introduction The debate of globalization still rages with critics and proponents alike failing to reach a consensus on its benefits and detriments. This follows the prevailing differences pictured by people in their attempt to provide the real meaning of globalization.

Is it the coming together of political, economical, or cultural organization around the world, or is it the power behind the ontogeny of economy, success, or democratic liberation? It is worth noting that these, among other questions relating to globalization, will attract conflicting responses, majority of which will depend on people as well as place.

For instance, the answer from a person in Cairo will differ from one in Washington, which will also differ from the one in Johannesburg. In fact, the response will also differ with people from the same place.

Therefore, to come up with a standard definition of globalization may prove hard and hence the debate. Of paramount importance is the fact that, the answers will as well vary based on how various people in various places perceive globalization. There are those who will base their answers on culture, politics, while others will base them on economy. Nevertheless, the pertinent question remains, what is globalization.

Values come in handy when specifying the implication of globalization. For instance, when one pictures globalization as ‘McDonaldization’ or simply ‘Americanization’ of the world, it stands out as a process, steered by the American culture whereby, all other cultures follow suit. In addition and based on culture, globalization can stand as the intermingling of variety cultures in their pursuit of, not only learning, but also sharing with each other.

According to Rothenberg, “Globalization is the acceleration and intensification of interaction and integration among the people, companies, and governments of different nations” (2) This definition stands out as the most unbiased because it takes into account all the areas, which initially were separately used to define globalization. It considers the human welfare like security and health. It also carries with it the issue of environment, not sparing culture, which is a combination of religions, ideas, and politics.

Economy and the success of different societies around the globe stand out within this definition. However, this is not the final definition. As time goes on, different values will arise as expected, a situation that will alter the meaning. As a result, it leaves a room for such a circumstance and hence the most favored definition. However, it is important to consider some issues that surround globalization instead of majoring on its definition.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The origin of Globalization The precise emergence globalization is not well known. While some learners claim that it came in the course of the current epoch, others say that it bears a deep-rooted origin. Among the people who regard globalization as having a deep-rooted history is Gander Frank, the economist, who developed the dependency theory. Frank posits, “A form of globalization has been in existence since the rise of trade links between summer and the Indus Valley Civilization in the third millennium BC” (29).

Consequently, this implies that globalization of economy and culture has been in existence for a long time going back to the third millennium. For instance, during the Hellenistic era, commercial centers established at this period targeted the entire Greek culture. As a result, trade spread covering a large area beginning all the way from India to Spain.

This is the period when trade spread at a rate greater than ever realized before. It is the period, when the thought of cosmopolitan was used for the first time referring to a ‘world city’, which implied the coming together of a variety of Greek cultures. This scenario is perceived to be the first form of globalization, but not the only one.

The trade network composed of the Han Dynasty, the Roman Empire, and the Parthian Empire also stands as an early form of globalization. According to Adela, “The increasing articulation of commercial links between these powers inspired the development of the Silk Road, which started in western China, reached the boundaries of the Parthian empire, and continued onwards towards Rome” (Para. 2).

The Islamic Golden age cannot escape mentioning. It stands as another form of globalization in which a significant world economy was established. The establishment of global crops, knowledge, trade, as well as technology marked this period. As a result, crops like sugarcane and cotton dominated the Muslim world. In addition, the learning of the Arabic and the Hajj resulted to a global Muslim culture.

However, as all these happened, they could not be viewed as bearing the issue of globalization. According to the then peoples’ understanding, these were just but normal happenings expected in a growing culture, economy, and politics, to mention but a few. The events that unfolded as from the dawn of 21st century brought to light the issue of globalization.

People could not learn the subject of globalization the easy way until the outbreak of the World War I and II in the twentieth century. These wars were the root cause of the many global issues established as a result. In this century, the subject of human rights was discussed at large following the repercussions of the wars whereby, people were severely mistreated since there lacked a body or a policy that could protect them.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Globalization Positive and Negative Impacts specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This is the century when a global announcement of human rights was made in 1948, to take care of people in case of another war outbreak. In addition, the issue of establishing world services emerged as a result.

The World Bank saw its dawn in this century. Ambassadorial organizations like the League of Nations as well as the United Nations came to existence too. Global education also arose with the establishment of a global University in Tokyo, Japan. World Health Organizations, World Trade Organizations, among other global organizations were born in this century.

Moreover, a world economy emerged in the course of this period. Based on the aforementioned comprehensive definition of the term globalization, all these occurrences were incorporated therein, be it economy, culture, and politics. It therefore suffices to associate the origin of globalization with the 20th century.

Positive Impact of Globalization Globalization has influenced the world to a large extend in different ways. The industrial, economic, financial, health, political, to mention but a few sectors, bear a significant influence of globalization. The outgrowth of global output markets as well as the broadened access of a variety of alien goods and services, not only for industries, but also for consumers, has led to the global growth of industries.

This arises from the increased flow-in and flow-out of materials and goods both within and beyond the national boundaries. Bhagwati exposits that ” International trade in manufactured goods increased more than 100 times (from $95 billion to $12 trillion) in the 50 years since 1955” (27). The growth referred to here is industrial growth that was realized because of globalization.

Therefore, it is deducible that globalization has seen the growth of industries in the world. The emergence of globalization leaves a mark in the financial sector. The efforts employed in curbing the worldwide wars revealed the possibility of paving ways for the establishment of some of other worldwide services. The financial services sector bears this mark of globalization.

Globalization has seen the dawn of global financial markets while at the same time broadening the proximity of financing services, both internal and external. For instance, the dawn of 21st century was marked by a significant increase in currency trade, with more than $1.5 trillion being merchandized daily to cater for the increased investment and trade levels. The economy sector has also been influenced by globalization.

Globalization yields a positive impact on economy. People have made efforts to come up with a common world market where they are at liberty to exchange both capital and products. It is worth noting that, these markets depict a pronounced interconnection such that a fall or a rise in one is enough to bring a corresponding effect to the others.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Globalization Positive and Negative Impacts by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In addition, globalization has led to the production of goods and services at a cheaper cost. This on the other hand has paved way for the movement of employment opportunities to locations with less salary, minimal security of workers, as well as less health considerations. The impact of globalization in the field of health sector also stands out.

Global trade and global economy have led to the establishment of global health policies, which on the other hand remain favored by the rising technology and the medical trade. According to Ollila, “Global priorities, in this situation, are sometimes at odds with national priorities where increased health infrastructure and basic primary care are of more value to the public than privatized care for the wealthy” (6) Globalization has also influenced the area of politics.

In fact, some scholars have viewed globalization as the establishment of a global government, which portrays no more than a political foundation. United States offers the best illustration of this. Since it ranks highest among the world powers, it has grown politically because of globalization.

However, following the significant impact of globalization to the Chinese government, people have predicted that following China’s high rate of growth in technology, economy, wealth, and industry, it may soon alter the political arena. ” China will rival the United States for the position of leading world power” (Hurst 91).

Since this is a result of globalization, it suffices to say that; globalization bears a significant positive impact on politics. However, globalization carries with it some few negative impacts, for instance, environmental degradation.

Negative Impacts of Globalization The large amounts of CO2 emitted in the atmosphere following the advancement of industries because of globalization, have negatively affected the environment.

Countries like China are currently producing large capacities of these harmful gases and virtually all of its people inhale it. It is predicted that within the next few years, most of the tropical rain forests will be logged off, especially those of Papua New Guinea and Indonesia. In addition, the extensive interconnections among countries brought by globalization, have led to the famous financial crisis.

This follows from the experienced collapse of the mortgage market prominent in the U.S. This, on the other hand, has led to a momentous loss of jobs. Moreover, the increased job opportunities in the developed countries like the U.S have taken away talents of people, specifically from the African continent. This arises when the jobless people end up being utilized in doing jobs even if they do not match their talents.

Ultimately, they relinquish their talents completely. Globalization has also led to a rise in the spread of some lethal diseases. Robert points out that, “Starting in Asia, the Black Death killed at least one-third of Europe’s population in the 14th century” (262). This spread comes because of the accelerated interaction of people associated with globalization. The trades of illegal drugs like heroin and cocaine is on the rise, following the evident increased rate of entry and exit of goods in countries from all over the world.

China and India and the World’s Economy The world’s economy cannot be well understood without incorporating the contribution of China and India. The two stands as the world’s swiftly budding economic forces, and as a result, they have significantly influenced the global economy. Desai posits, “There will be a much larger percentage of the world’s economic growth in Asia, particularly driven by China [and] India” (12).

It suffices to infer that through globalization, the two are able to bring a growth of the global economy. Though China and India are competitors, it is predicted that as their powers rise, they will turn to be collaborators. Further inferences concerning China and India indicate that there is a high possibility of the two to challenge the U.S, following their entry into the global economy.

Referring to China, Zhiqiang says that “…it has to phase-in the liberalization of such services as banking, insurance, telecommunications, external trade, internal trade and tourism as well as the national treatment for foreign enterprises” (56). These are among the many contributions that China is making in the global economic sector. In terms of exportations, China has become the largest in the world and as a result, it is thought to affect the world’s economy.

China bears a vast manufacturing industry compared to any other country. This boosts its reasons for participating in the international market. India, on the other hand, has significantly influenced the global economy owing to its rapid development in the export sector.

According to Isabelle, “The two countries have thus in common the fact that, in the past ten years, they developed their strongest specialization in sectors linked to information and communication technology” (140) In terms of communication, transportation and insurance among other services, the two countries have highly established services in relation to other countries. All these factors sufficiently tell the reason as to why the world’s economy recognizes the impact of globalization of both China and India.

These services are not as established in the other countries as they are in China and India and this is why the world economy relies much on the contributions of the two. Worth noting is the notion that, if the share of the two was excluded from the global economy, the world would be unable to sustain its people. This is a clear indication that both China and India posses a good chunk in the world’s economy because of globalization.

Conclusion In conclusion, globalization viewed as the integration of economies, cultures, as well as societies, has been achieved following the worldwide political and communication connections. While people have set out to research on the origin of globalization, the results are debatable.

This arises because some claim that globalization bears a deep-rooted historical origin, while others associate it with the unfolding of the twentieth century, the period when many worldwide events happened, for instance, the world wars, WHO, UN, world universities, among others. Although, globalization has positively influenced the world, it in turn bears some negative impacts. It is good because it has brought the evident radical economic, industrial, health, as well as political growth.

However, it is bad because issues like environmental degradation, sweatshops, brain drain, food insecurity and spread of contagious diseases among others, have resulted from globalization. Fortunately, the merits of globalization outweigh its demerits. Of the contributions made to the global economy by the many countries, the one by both India and China remain the most significant.

This arises from the fact that the two are highly globalized in terms of industries, communication and insurance coupled with transportation services. The two have a good share in the world’s economy and if this share were eliminated from the world economy, the result would be no more than an unsolvable economic crisis. This is enough to prove that they significantly influence the global economy founded on globalization.

Works Cited Adela, Lee. Ancient Silk Road Travelers, 2010. Web.

Bhagwati, Jagdish. In Defense of Globalization. New York: Oxford University Press, 2004. Print.

Desai, Vishakha. The Growing Economic Influence of China and India. London: Word Press, 2008. Print.

Frank, Gander. Reorient Global Economy in the Asian Age. U.C: Berkeley Press, 1998

Hurst, Charles. Social Inequality: Forms, Causes, and Consequences. USA: Oxford University Press, 1999.

Isabelle, Bensidoun. The Integration of China and India into the World Economy: a Comparison. New York: Word Press, 2006.

Ollila, Edward. Global health priorities: Globalization and Health. England: HVAC, 2005.

Robert, Gottfried. “Black Death in Dictionary of the Middle Ages.” The History of Human Populations 2.1 (1983): 257–67.

Rothenberg, Laurence. The Three Tensions of Globalization. New York: Maxwell Publishers, 2003. Print.

Zhiqiang, Hwang. “Globalization.” The European Journal of Comparative Economics 6.1 (2004): 131-155.


Factors Related to Hypnotisability Research Paper a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Table of Contents Executive Summary



Time and Hypnotizability


Executive Summary The scope of the research is to measure people’s levels of hypnotizability and whether it relates to empathy, absorption and imagery. Studying hypnosis susceptibility helps us understand and identify different characteristics that make individuals react to hypnosis and how effective the proposed measurable scales are.

Hypnosis susceptibility study is conducted through experimental analysis that employs computer generated and self-report measures. Our comprehensive analysis concluded that all the three mentioned factors were positive predictors of hypnotizability. Importance of conducting this study was that medical professionals will be able to relate to new events and develop effective treatment inventions and therapeutic techniques to treat the most diverse forms of pains.

Introduction Manmillar et al (2005) defines hypnosis is a mental state, usually induced by a procedure known as the hypnotic induction. According to their definition, hypnosis uses the imaginative role-enactment which relaxes individual’s objective area of the mind, or may be delivered in the presence of subject.

To broaden our understanding Carli (2007) defines hypnotisability as “the cognitive trait allowing subjects to module perception, emotion and behavior according to specific suggestions” (p.64). Their contemporary research suggests that hypnotisability is a procedure that awakens our focused attention. Accompanied by physical relaxation and induced mental concentration, hypnosis scores are obtained after hyptonic induction, on a standardized hypnosis scale.

The ability to destruct the metal concentration is engrossed in the idea of training thoughts which may subsequently result to individual unconsciousness or even the progressive relaxation term known as ‘nervous sleep’.

Most clinicians agree that hypnosis is an effective therapeutic technique that can be used with people suffering from diverse forms of pains. It’s however argued that the degree to which people receive hypnosis vary from one individual to another and the levels of susceptible hypnosis as mentioned by Manmillar et al (2005) may range from high and low hypnotisability.

To come to a better understanding of the relationship between high and low hypnosis, Manmillar et al (2005) defines high hypnotizable generally as the ease of relaxing minds while Brynt and Idey (2001) defines it as the display of more fantasy proneness and greater absorption.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More While there are many similarities in high hypnotizable definition, Hilgard (1979) adds that individuals which such susceptible experience greater imaginary involvement while Kumar at al (1996) strongly focuses on their conscious experience in response to the imagery offered by the hypnotist.

In measuring hypnosis effectiveness, Braffman and Kirsch (2001) suggests two detrimental methodologies to include; simple and go/no go reaction times. His analysis further concluded individuals on hypnozability were positively related with simple reaction time and correlated with go/no go reaction time, when non hypnotic suggestibilities were statistically controlled.

It is evidenced that different characteristics make individuals react to hypnosis different and some may be more susceptible to hypnosis than others. Since their applications in both clinical and research settings, hypnotizability scales have never been evidenced to measure effects of hypnotizability.

Since hypnotizability is a stable construct, identifying its predictors would be helpful in comprehending individual differences observed in suggestibility (Paul and Mathews, 2003). Using a set of standardized suggestions to check individuals’ responses, followed by a standardized induction, to know the measure of hypnotic ability they posses is applied.

Barber, Spanos and Chaves (1974) further clarifies that individual differences in ability to respond to hypnosis could be described with the aid of imagination and absorption constructs. Paul and Mathews (2003) on the other hand suggests that hypnotic suggestibility and individual differences are most likely to be experienced with people with the ability to respond to waking and may not necessarily lack the ability to respond to hypnotic procedures.

Kogon et al (1998) define imaginary as the ability of a person to receive an experience or emotional state in one’s mind. He provides that relationships among imaginary and hypnotisability are complex and the methodologies used can easily inflate the relationships.

In this case, Kogon et al (1998) suggests for careful application of the results obtained as many may differ in their degree of association and functionality depending on context of their hypnotic application. In vivid imagery hypnosis application, Kogon et al (1998) performed an experimental analysis where they correlated computer generated and self-report measure of imagery with hypnotizability to measure the degree of their relationship.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Factors Related to Hypnotisability specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Computer generated imagery measures were used due to their ability to provide accurate results and because they are better predictors of hypnotizability. Credited as good hypnotizability measure, the computer generated results did not yield satisfactory results as most of the experiments were conducted outside hypnotic setting.

Moreover, the imagery modality used in measuring correlation between imagery and hypnotisability were valid. This is according to (Carli et al, 2007) reports that stated that “instructions of globally reduced perception” (p.14). In this case the research should have based their analysis on particular sensory modalities which would have yielded positive results that related to the study question.

Milling et al 2000 define absorption as an individual’s characteristic, which encompasses openness, to experience changes in cognitive and emotional, state over rage of circumstances. Green and Lynn (2008) defined it as the capacity for self- altering attention that is considered to be significant component of hypnotozability.

When relating back to highly susceptible individuals, Milling (2000) argue that individuals with highly susceptible are believed to get involved in a variety of imaginative practices more on faster when measuring absorption. Another study conducted by Council, Kirsch and Gran (1996) considers absorption as a predictor of hypnotizability and suggests use of scales designed specifically for measuring absorption to be used.

However in determining the relationship between absorption and hypnotic susceptibility, the most commonly used measures implied that the absorption scales were consistent and reliable related when tests were administered in the same experimental setting (Green and Lynn, 2008).

Szlyk (2003) defines the emotional processes underlie the experience ad creation of hypnosis. He speculates that empathy plays an important role in hypnotic subjects put together in hypnotic experiences. Szlyh (2003) experimental analysis included observations from various researches speculating the particular trait empathy and its relationship to hypnotizability.

He first defined empathy as the ability to understand another person’s feelings and motives. His experimental analysis however showed strong correlation of trait empathy with hypnotic ability. Higard (1970) further examined an individual’s capacity to empathetically recognize characters in drama and literature makes empathy a notable predictor of hypnotizability.

Wickramasekera (1998) study of ‘High Risk Model of Threat Perception’ that examined relationship between emphatic process of emotional contagion and imitation in relations to behavioral and experimental indices of hypnotic ability observed that development of psychosomatic symptoms were more susceptible in high hypnotizable’s as a result of increased empathetic characteristics they posses.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Factors Related to Hypnotisability by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Same clinical observations conducted by Spiegal and Spiegal (1978) confirmed that individuals with high hypnotic ability tend to relate to new events and begin to develop symptoms that resemble the ones they have observed in others.

Results The study recruited 244 participants among whom 239 successfully completed the questionnaire booklet. The study was aimed at identifying factors that best predict hypnotizability, along with the effect of time on hypnotizability. A series of correlations were employed in investigating factors favorable for hypnotizability completed with t-tests aimed at measuring the effect of time on hypnotizability

Our experimental analysis measures whether hypnotizablity relates to three factors; empathy, absorption and imagery. I first hypothesis that mpathy would be the highest predictor of hypnotizability. And secondly, there would be little difference between pre-group and post-group scores.

The results did however find correlation and intercorrelation values for hypnotizability to be as follows; the correlation for hypnotizability and empathy were r (237) =. 254, the correlation between hypnotizability and imagery as r= (237) = .1.141, hypnotizability and absorption is r (237) = .196

Table 1: The Relationship between Absorption, Imagery, Empathy and


Factor Formula Hypnotizability Results Absorption Pearson Correlation N Imagery Pearson Correlation N Empathy Pearson Correlation N Correlation values ranged from p<0.1 to p<0.5. When measuring the absorption, empathy and imagery rates against hypnotizability on a measurable scale on 0.1 indicating weak while 0.5 indicating strong correlation, imagery indicated a relative value of 0.5 against hypnotizability, which was in deed a strong correlation. Absorption against hypnotizability on the other hand indicated a vale of 0.5, also an indication correlation between the two, while empathy against hypnotizability recorded 0.2, which was an indication of weak correlation between the two factors.

When using inter-correlation measurement, empathy and absorption were rated as r (237) = p .503, while empathy and imagery as r (237) = p .274, and imagery and absorption as r (237) = p .445

Table 2: The Relationship between Absorption, Imagery, Empathy and


Factor Formula Hypnotizability Results Absorption Pearson Correlation N Imagery Pearson Correlation N Empathy Pearson Correlation N Inter-correlation values ranged from p<0.1 to p<0.5. Measuring absorption, empathy and imagery rates against hypnotizability on a measurable scale on 0.1 indicating weak while 0.5 indicating strong correlation, imagery indicated a relative value of 0.4 against hypnotizability, which was in deed a strong correlation.

Absorption against hypnotizability on the other hand indicated a vale of 0.5, also an indication correlation between the two, while empathy against hypnotizability recorded 0.1, which was an indication of weak correlation between the two factors.

Time and Hypnotizability The research used time to focus on the relationship it has on hypnotizability. With regard to the hypothesis empathy would be the highest predictor of hypnotizability and little difference between pre-group and post-group scores will be evident, a pre-hypnosis questionnaire was compared to a post-hypnosis questionnaire group. The overall hypnosis results showed a mean rate of 5.38 (SD 2.58). Below is a detailed summary of the results.

Green – Control group mean

Blue – Treatment group mean

Group comparison indicated the group that had the questionnaires before hypnosis (n=120) had a mean of 5.44 (SD 2.55) whereas the group that had hypnosis after the questionnaire (n=119) had a mean of 5.31 (SD 2.62). Am independent sample t-test was considered to compare two mean groups to determine whether the mean Group 1 was significantly different from mean Group 2. The results showed no significant differences between the means and the two groups, t (237) = .391 given p<. 0.5. on both groups

References Brynt, R. A.,


Drinking Age in the United States Essay essay help

The United States legal drinking age of twenty one years has been the subject of discussion for a long time based on the fact that some people are for it, while others are against it. The act which was established in 1984 prohibits drinking below the age of twenty one as it states that any state which allows teenagers under the age of twenty one to purchase alcohol would not receive any revenue.

Before 1984, the minimum drinking age varied from state to state such that some states would allow teenagers to consume alcohol publicly while others would not allow it to happen. However, although it is believed that all states go by that law, some states still allow teenagers to drink in private settings.

Consequently, different agencies and scholars have come up with their proposals concerning the same issue. As much as both sides have got their own reasons, based on several factors, the legal drinking age should be lowered to eighteen years. In addition, since America recognizes an adult after attaining eighteen years, it is illogical to prevent such a person from enjoying rights being enjoyed by other adults.

Therefore, bent on that, this essay argues for the idea that the drinking age should be lowered to eighteen years since the current law does not make much sense.

Majority who propose the drinking age to remain at twenty one argue that teenagers drink irresponsibly and end up getting involved in irresponsible and risky behaviors like careless driving. However, in the same country, a person can be taken to court and be tried at the age of eighteen years and above.

Therefore, even if someone commits such a crime, there is usually a way to deal with such incidences. In addition, the court is supposed to maintain law and order and therefore, teenagers under the age of twenty one ought not to be prevented from drinking in order to prevents accidents and other unlawful behaviors (Engs, 1998).

In United States, a person is allowed to join the military after attaining eighteen years of age. Therefore, it means that in legal terms, a person aged eighteen years can be considered as an adult and more to that, such a person can be trusted with very sensitive and important responsibilities like protecting the country from military attacks.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On the same note, such a person is also allowed to make decisions that affect the future of a country like voting. Bent on that, it is clear that in legal terms, a person who has attained eighteen years is mature and should be allowed to enjoy other rights that are being enjoyed by the rest of the population (ICAP, 2002).

Before making major conclusions, it is important to compare the problems of alcohol that existed before the establishment of the law and after the establishment of the law. According to Engs (1998), even after the establishment of the alcohol law in the year 1987, teenagers below the age of twenty one were still involved in irresponsible drinking which is characterized by behaviors such as missing classes, poor performance and other forms of violence.

The same study illustrates that the main cause of such behaviors is as a result of prohibiting teenagers from drinking in the company of adults who can teach them responsible drinking behaviors. Therefore, even though consumption of alcohol has reduced, other problems that emanate from the same have increased.

Since the main aim of rising alcohol drinking age is to lower such problems, a critical evaluation indicates that that the law does not entirely serve the intended purpose. It would then be more logical to lower the drinking age and allow teenagers to drink in public places; together with the older members of the society so that they can be taught how to drink in a responsible manner.

A study conducted by ICAP (2002) indicated that although United States is among the countries that have the highest drinking age; it has more problems with alcohol than other countries which have a lower minimum drinking age. For instance, in a country like Netherlands, the minimum drinking age of teenagers is eighteen although at sixteen; one is still allowed to buy alcohol from premises which are licensed.

Nevertheless, any one below the age of eighteen is not allowed to purchase and consume spirits. Similarly, in a country like New Zealand, the minimum legal drinking age is eighteen years meaning that all teenagers above the age of eighteen can purchase and drink alcohol at all licensed premises like bars and restaurants.

In consequence, since more countries have a legal drinking age of eighteen years, the minimum drinking age of United states is not is only strange but also impractical. Although countries like Britain and United Kingdom still record deaths that result from road accidents caused by driving under the influence of alcohol, U.S still records higher death rates than such countries (Engs 1998).

We will write a custom Essay on Drinking Age in the United States specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More United States is characterized by many violent activities that require the attention of police officers and other law enforcement agencies. With such a high minimum drinking age, the police officers usually have a lot of work in monitoring the drinking age of teenagers below the age of twenty one.

Worse still, research that has been conducted indicated that teenagers below the age of twenty one drink more than even the people above that age. If the minimum age was lowered, the police and other agencies that enforce law and order would concentrate on other activities instead of focusing on college and high school students.

As much as anyone may want to argue that increasing the drinking age is helpful, the available research and evidence illustrates otherwise. The main problem emanates from the fact that rising the drinking age has little if any impact on behavior. To confirm this, Hanson (n. d.) records that in a study which was conducted among teenagers aged sixteen to nineteen years, the daily intake of alcohol did not change even after minimum drinking age was raised.

In addition, in yet another study which was conducted in the District of Columbia, results illustrated that there were more accidents in states which had a high minimum drinking age. Studies conducted illustrated that once the drinking age was raised, teenagers below the drinking age developed a habit of borrowing alcoholic drinks form their older colleagues and that is the main reason why the consumption rate remained high.

A critical review of the alcoholic related issues prior to the increasing of the minimum drinking age and after clearly illustrates that the law does not solve the intended problem. The main reason is due to the fact that it targets a certain age group and not the alcohol problem at hand. Although no one negates the fact that alcohol is a major problem to teenagers, it is important to come up with a law that can solve the problem instead of aggravating it.

Even if alcohol abuse is serious since it carries serious consequences, it is possible to come up with a law that can mitigate the problem. For example, even without much struggle, studies have indicated that in societies where alcohol is not prohibited like in the Jewish society, young people have less problems than in a place like United States where there is a law prohibiting anyone below the age of twenty one from taking and buying alcohol.

References Engs, R. C. (1998). Why the drinking age should be lowered: An opinion based upon research. Retrieved from

Hanson, D. J. (n.d.). The Legal Drinking Age: Science vs. Ideology. Retrieved from

Not sure if you can write a paper on Drinking Age in the United States by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Internartional Center For Alcohol Policies (ICAP). (2002). Drinking Age Limits. Web.


Adidas vs Nike: Marketing Communication Strategies Report cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Introduction At the end of a product cycle, a company needs to get the products to the target customer. To do this, the company has to adopt some marketing strategies. Marketing strategies are required for both service and goods businesses. Sporting has moved from a recreational activity and has become a professional career for different people.

Companies manufacturing sporting equipments ranging from clothes, shoes, and other equipments need to market their products effectively. Despite the market for the industry increasing, there are international companies in the industry that adopt different marketing strategies for their success.

Such companies include Adidas and Nike; both companies operate internationally but they adopt different marketing strategies. Though the companies are rivals in the business, they find themselves facing the same competitor with the strongest one as Puma and Reebok (Reid


Extinction of minority languages Essay best college essay help: best college essay help

The process of globalization has become very intensive recently. Indeed, the whole world seems to turn into one great community with a unified culture, lifestyle, and system of values. What is more, this community tends to speak fewer and fewer languages, preferring to speak the language that is popular or simple, rather than the one that is native. On one hand, this process is essential, as far as it is based on the law of natural selection.

On the other hand, the extinction of minor languages leads to the extinction of certain cultural groups and their individualities, turning the world into a global grey crowd. So what should be done about the mentioned situation? Undoubtedly, the minor languages should be preserved.

The meaning of the languages that are on the edge of extinction today lies far beyond the linguistic concept. Indeed, languages do not only serve as a means of expression and comprehension; their function is much deeper. Apart from being a system of signs, a language carries a certain mentality, the character of the community it is spoken by. Moreover, the changes in the community’s life are inevitably reflected in its language.

Community and language function as one organism, and when a language dies out, the community also stops existing. In fact, it can become a part of another community, or adopt another language, but losing a native language means losing authenticity with no opportunity for further development and life. That is why, the process of languages extinction should be resisted.

Today the language policies aimed at preserving the minor languages are treated as unpopular and needless. The politicians see no sense in investing money into saving some language of an African community, as this investment will have no obvious use for USA or Europe. More and more money, however, are being spent on popularizing several “strong” languages, such as English, Russian, and Chinese. Indeed, all the countries of the world are to some degree English-speaking.

This is advantageous from economical and political points of view, and is bound to the experience of USSR, where the attempt to create a superpower started with accepting one unified language. The result of that policy, as well as of the one that is led today, is that the half of the world turns into one community with no certain culture, customs and traditions, but with one certain language to speak.

Due to the mentioned facts, we should realize that the preservation of minor languages is a worthy idea. This mission is close to the attempts to preserve the diversity of the nature, saving all of its creatures, their families and creatures. Every language has a history, and no language was made up just for fun.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Supporting a language that is on the edge of extinction means saving its history with the underlying culture. After all, if there is a number of popular languages, there should also be some private ones, which should be able to express some very intimate and very native feelings of their speakers.

All in all, it can be said that the intense process of modern globalization has led to the extinction of many minor languages. This process is hard to resist, however there is definitely a need for preserving the minor languages that still exist. Language policies aimed at supporting them should be treated as an attempt to save a piece of original culture, contained in a system of written and spoken signs. Popularizing the minor languages may be a purposeless task; however, their protection from dying out is extremely important.


Saudi Arabia as a Threat to the National Security: Myths and Facts Research Paper custom essay help

Abstract Although it is rather sad fact to admit, the modern world is highly preoccupied with the threat of terrorism which has recently emerged in the modern society. Such is the situation that the numerous terrorist acts have caused people to panic over their endangered future. Since everyone can remember the tragic events of 2001 and less known but nonetheless terrible accidents that have been caused by terrorists, it is quite understood why the modern world has frozen in anticipation of the inevitable to happen.

Because of the growing anxiety of the uncertain future, people started making assumptions of what the terrorist acts could lead to and if the safety is at high risks now. Instead of looking for the facts carefully, people start believing rumors and the suppositions that were not based either on logic, or on the events that did take place.

As a result, the population of Europe and the USA has been scared stiff and cannot think of the Arabic world in other way than of a world where cool-blooded murders and troublemakers live. Still such statements have nothing to do with the reality. One of the chief goals of the government must be the one of clarifying the issues of terrorism with people to help them to know more about the danger that they are exposed to, because those forewarned are forearmed.

The Roots of the Terrorism: Where the Evil Began Because of the fact that the modern world has faced the danger of being involved into a terrorist act accidentally, there has been a major concern about the phenomenon and its roots. Although the issue does not suggest broad discussion, it is still important to know what the grounds of the terrorists are.

The research on the reasons for terrorism, the people who commit it and the events that trigger this splash of violence are important fro the further preventive measures which have to be taken in order to save the lives of thousands of people. In case these measures are successful, there is hope that people will no longer suffer from the fear of a dreadful death.

The Reasons for the Savage Actions

As a rule, nothing happens out of a sudden, and every single event in a human’s life is triggered by the action that has been undertaken before. The same goes for terrorism, as the actions of the people who have been given a reason to act against the rest of the world. It would be a useful practice to trace the events that lead to the aggression from the Muslim world with its dangerous idea of revenge.

It cannot be doubted that the dangerous people have been influenced by the by the growing power of the leading countries. The influence of theirs, together with the economical and military power have added to the uncertainty of the world of the Muslim people, and the most daring ones started showing their protests to the actions of the world leaders, yet in their own way.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The terrorist acts that have occurred so far seem to have been inspired by the threat that the East thought the world leaders to pose to the eastern well-being and their traditions and customs. Te ingenuity of their life was the clue of the Eastern culture and the idea that it is so vulnerable and subjected to the influence of the West was unbearable for the Islamic people.

The Prerequisites of the Terrorism

Like many other historical tragedies, terrorist acts did not appear out of nowhere, but had certain prerequisites which could have been foreseen. Since the political reasons for the terrorist acts to occur are predominating, it seems that those responsible for the tragic events are the people who are in charge of the political safety of the country. Indeed, there are no other pretexts but the economical and cultural ones that can trigger such calamity and result in a bloodbath.

However, it cannot be stated that the leaders of the countries that are suffering from the terrorist acts occurring constantly have nothing to be blamed fro. The recent survey shows that there have been the elements of malpractice in the politics of the state during the recent years. Such political issues of rather doubtful nature have been emerging constantly over the past years. The politicians that do not compete fair for the parliament chair or the post of the president have proved o use the most indecent methods and means to achieve their goals:

So-called negative, or comparative, political advertising has been used increasingly in recent years. It conveys or seeks to evoke a basically unfavorable view of the opposing candidate or party, often by means of comparison with the sponsoring candidate. (Coleman 2000, p. 16)

The Right to Live – Or to Die?

According to the existing human rights, the right to live is one of the prior rights of a free person in the modern world. It is quite understood that the people all over the world cannot feel safe at the moment, regarding the international situation that is most tense nowadays. Together with the threat of terrorism, it makes people’s lives unbearable. However, the UNO has recently come up with something that can be considered an attempt protect people, their freedom and their rights.

There has been also discovered the link between the threat of terrorism and the political instability of the country. Rooting from the people losing the trust in the government, this issue has a great impact on the further development on the country and can result in continuous regress. As Davis (2004) put it,

At low levels of trust in the government, those who have great concern about another terrorist attack differ little in their support for civil liberties from those who have little or no concern about another terrorist attack; but among those who have some or a lot of trust in the government, greater concern about another attack is associated with a sharply lower support for civil liberties. (p. 40)

We will write a custom Research Paper on Saudi Arabia as a Threat to the National Security: Myths and Facts specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The Most Notorious Terrorism Acts Because of the dreadful consequences and the deaths that a terrorist act triggers, it is impossible to say which of them was the most terrible one; yet it is possible to calculate the damage that they have caused and to figure out which of the acts of terrorism has been the one of the biggest damage and the most desperate and mournful cries.

It can be said with certainty that the terrorist act that the whole wide world ahs seen and will probably remember for good is the accident that took place on September, 11 in 2000. The planes driven by the terrorists have taken hundreds of lives with them, and it was the most terrible event that the USA has ever witnessed since the day it was founded. The cruelty and the aggression of the terrorists was indescribable, since they aimed not on the government only, but also on the innocent people which did not do practically nothing bad.

It can be said that the terrorists have hit the head – the house of Pentagon – and the heart – the so-called Twins – of the United States. If the first act can be described as a political crime, an unlucky assassination the second is no doubt, the most cruel and inhumane action that could have ever be done to a country and the people that are living there.

Taking innocent lives with them has never bothered terrorists, but there is still something worth mentioning, namely that the idea of killing the other people for the sake of the idea can be a rather precise description of the terrorists’ military actions. The way Al-Qaeda operates leaves no room for mercy, but merely cool-blooded reflections on the results which the acts will trigger.

The 11th of September: They Hit U.S. in the Head and in the Heart

Although the tragedy occurred long time ago, there are still the things that remind of the tragic events. Because of the controversial facts that have been presented to the public, there are still heated debates concerning the question of the “authorship” of the crime. The most popular answer is that this is the deed of the Al-Qaeda leader, Osama bin Laden.

However, there are still certain doubts concerning this mysterious personality. There is no doubt that he exists, but the place where he is concealing from justice now is unidentified and it seem that it never will be, regarding what has been learned about his whereabouts at the moment.

The whereabouts of the headquarters of the terrorists are no secret to the international police and the governmental bodies, but the danger that the states will dispose themselves into as they approach the root of the terrorism is immense and thus the governments cannot risk the well-being and peace all over the world.

One of the main problems which the international police have encountered on its way to fighting terrorism is its unpredictability. Since walking the tightrope is not what the international police are fond of, they do not haste to take steps towards elimination of the headquarters.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Saudi Arabia as a Threat to the National Security: Myths and Facts by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More According to the principle of transparency that Obama provided, nowadays people can find out more about the reasons that made the terrorists attack the U. S., yet there is a tint of some things unsaid, in order to keep the people calm and to hush down the fear of the terrorists assaulting the United States citizen once again:

Many of the Bush administration’s most controversial national security policies – the warrantless wiretapping program, the torture program, the rendition program – were conceived, developed, and authorized in secret. The American public found out about these policies long after they were put into place, and after a great deal of damage had already been done. (Establishing a New National Security, Establishing a New Normal, 2010, p. 4)

The Problem That Is Yet to Be Solved The Residence of the Evil: Terrorists’ Headquarters

Nowadays probably everyone knows the way the terrorists’ headquarters is called and where it is situated. Al-Qaeda is considered one of the most dangerous terrorist organizations because of its being highly organized, which is posing a certain threat to the society. Disregarding the fact that this is t one and only terrorist organization that is known all over the world, it is still necessary to admit that it has certain power and it uses the power possessed aiming at the opponents’ life values.

It hits the most vulnerable spot on the body of a country that is straight against Al Qaeda, and there is no stopping to the awful acts of the people who are in charge of it. Formed by Osama bin Laden in Afghanistan in 1988 (Katzman 2005, 1), it is posing a deadly threat to the world safety.

Yet there is one more body of ever greater influence that has begun the continuous fight which is going on even at present, though the battle ahs been hushed down for a while. The name of the force that is ever greater than the one of the terrorists and their organization is the regime of Saudi Arabia. According to Yamani (2008), the abovementioned formation was the first to be blamed for the Islamic aggression that took place shortly after the regime began to take its toll over the political situation:

The Saudi Arabian regime, aided by oil money and custodianship of Islam’s holiest sites, has in recent years emerged as one of the most active and creative diplomatic players in the Middle East. It was a key covert supporter of the United States’ decision to invade Iraq, of efforts to achieve a comprehensive negotiated settlement of the Israeli–Palestinian dispute, and especially of efforts to counter Iran’s hegemonic ambitions. (p. 143)

Taking into consideration the above-mentioned, it can be suggested that the war that was started between the West and the terrorists was due to the political reasons, namely the reason of money and the economical profit. Since oil is rather valuable substance, there is no doubt that the battle was started only to obtain the right to behold the source of everlasting richness.

The case when the concern for their own future and the easy money have prevailed over the spirit of neighborliness is, unfortunately, not so rare. Anyway, the war was started and millions of innocent people were involved into the deadly process.

One of the most notorious questions is whether the people who were involved into the terrorist acts were persuading specifics goals or if the very act was the result of their inner tenseness and the desire to change things so that the country could live again without the invaders and the people who would make them get adjusted to the new ideas that were so foreign to their own ones.

Anyway, the day when Al-Qaeda officially started opposing the rest of the world is considered September, 1st (Leahy 2009) – the notorious and mournful day when hundreds of people perished in the building suddenly attacked by two planes.

The Way the Government Sees It

There is no need to tell that the government pursues the goals of the nation safety and the political stability. Unfortunately, it is not always that the two are compatible. However, in case when the government is threatened with an assault that has been successful and taken away several lives, there is a reason for a deep concern.

It might be useful to reconsider the means that the government uses to enhance its political strength and to find a way out of the complicated situation that the leaders have been trapped in. Whenever there are some political arguments, it is always better to listen to the opponent and to draw necessary conclusions rather than to oppose the rival directly and cause undesirable results.

In spite of the fact that the threat of terrorism is on of the most notorious ones in the modern world, the USA does not hesitate to take immigrants from the other countries. It is clear that the control in the airports has been enhanced, but that does not explain the carelessness of the U. S. government. As Chishti (2003) claimed,

The government’s major successes in apprehending terrorists have not come from post-Sept. 11 immigration initiatives but from other efforts, such as international intelligence activities, law enforcement cooperation and information provided by arrests made abroad (p. 7)

However, it must be admitted that the government did take the necessary precautions as they came to the conclusion that the safety of the nation must be the prior concern of the state:

Shortly after the terrorist attacks of 9/11, President Bush authorized a highly secretive National Security Agency (NSA) program to eavesdrop on electronic communications involving U.S. persons without a warrant and outside of the process set forth in the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act (FISA). (Keiber, 2006)

Conclusion In spite of the fact that the modern politics insist on the terrorist danger as something that has already been overcome and that has to be remembered as the tragic remainder of the past, there are still some roots of it left somewhere deep inside people’s minds, and in the politics’ craving for more influence and power.

Yet it must be understood that, despite the threat of terrorist acts occurring, there must be no prejudice against Muslims, as well as their culture, belief and traditions. It must be remembered that there are no right and wrong in the war and international conflict, for these are both opponents that are being misled. Wong (2006) was completely right saying:

The Global War on Terrorism (GWOT) is a challenge unprecedented in American history. It dictates a reexamination of the balance between national security and civil liberties to accomplish the dual goals of preventing future attacks and maintaining our commitment to the U.S. Constitution. (2)

It is necessary to understand that Wong is speaking about the war on terrorism, not on the people. Emphasizing the necessity to maintain peace, he admits that there must be some military actions undertaken, but the peaceful citizen must not suffer. Instead of constant conflicts between the nations, there must be some common decision that the nations must come to.

That concerns the Asian countries as well, since they cannot be called as the conflicting ones at all. A few people who are constantly causing calamity and making the government undertake military actions to calm down the rebellions are not the reason to judge the whole nation.

The reasons for the Asian countries to conflict with the rest must be understood as well. Taking into consideration the economical and political tenseness in the abovementioned countries, it can be easily understood why those people display such aggression towards the unknown world. What the western countries must do is to take time and wait until the leaders of these conflicting countries are ready for a constructive dialogue.

While military actions can only make the situation worse, a civilized approach can help the nations become friendlier to each other and build the relationship based on mutual trust and understanding. With a humane approach to the opponents, it is possible that the war will be won without a single shot. Yet the question of how much time it will take for the leaders of the Asian countries to build partner relationships wit the western states.

References Chishti MA et al. American’s Challenge: Domestic Securities, Civil Liberties, and National Unity after September 11. Migration Policy Institute (MPI): Washington, DC, USA, 2003. 5-20. Print.

Davis DW et al. Civil Liberties vs. Security: Public Opinion in the Context of the Terrorist Attack on America. American Journal of Political Science (AJPS), 48(1); 2004. 28-46. Print.

Establishing a New Normal: National Security, Civil Liberties, and Human Rights Under the Obama Administration; an 18 Months review. American Civil Liberty Union, 2010. 1-22. Print.

Katzman, K. CRS Report for Congress: Al Qaeda: Profile and Threat Assessment. Congressional Research Service, the Library of the Congress, 2005. 1-6. Print.

Keiber, J. National Security and Civil Liberties; Director of Studies Strategy. 2 (3) Center for Strategic and International Studies, 2006.

Leahy, P. J., and B. L. Cardin et al. Protecting National Security and Civil Liberties: Strategies for Terrorism Information Sharing; Hearing before Subcommittee on Terrorism, Technology and Homeland Security of the Committee of the Judiciary; United States Senate. One Hundred Eleven Congress, first session, 2009. 1-95. Print.

Wong, L. et al. Homeland Security and Civil Liberties. Strategic Studies Institute; Conference Brief, 2006. 1-4. Print.

Yamani, M. The Two Faces of Saudi Arabia. Survival: 50(1), 2008. 142-156. Print.


Cross Cultural Communications Term Paper argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

Table of Contents Cultural conflict


Assimilation and integration


Works Cited

In the globalized world, the need for people from different cultures to communicate effectively is essential. Yet, attaining effective cross-cultural communication is not always an easy undertaking. What with every person believing that his or her culture is the best and even more people not willing to learn or accommodate another culture? Moreover, human beings tend to be stereotypical, usually judging people from other cultures based on long-held biases.

Regardless of the stereotypes and biases, the human relations across the conventional world are such that governments need each other, and hence cross-cultural communication must be enhanced if understanding between governments and the people they represent is to be attained.

Among the cultures that have always been in conflict are the Islamic culture and the American culture. The latter is predominantly based on Christian principles, although the government and its people are quick to denounce any religious affiliations, choosing to remain a liberal society. Islamic culture on the other hand is based on Islamic religion, and Muslims perceive their religion as a way of life. Specifically, Muslims do not separate their religion from the life they lead publicly or privately (Hamada).

As Shaheen observes however, the casual American observer usually associates Islam to hatred, fanaticism, violence, women oppression, and jihad (2). This affects cross cultural communication between Americans and people who adhere to the Islamic culture because the former always view the latter as a group of people who believe, feel, think and act as one based on their religious inclinations.

Muslims on the other hand perceive adherents of the American culture as a “proud culture” with little tolerance to ideals that differ from what the ‘liberal culture’ advocates.

Cultural conflict Most cultural conflicts between the American culture and the Islamic culture are based on stereotypes. According to Shaheen, people form stereotypes through hearsay or imagination (5). As such, their perceptions are not based on personal experiences or knowledge.

The perceptions based on stereotypes however shape their future relationships with people from ‘the other’ culture, hence affecting communication between the two parties. One however wonders why effective cross-cultural communication between adherents of the Islamic and American cultures is such an important issue.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More There is an average 6.5 million Muslims living in the United States. Some are Americans by birth, while others are immigrants. More important is the fact that the United States as a nation needs to comprehend the Islamic culture in order to serve its strategic geopolitical needs as well as uphold its constitutional ideals such as religious tolerance. There are also a significant number of American scholars, investors, and even students in countries with a predominant Islamic Culture (Ahmed “Journey” 7; Shaheen 6).

There is evidence in literature to the effect that cross-cultural communication between adherents of the American and Islamic culture can only be effective if both parties take time to understand each other (Ahmed “Journey” 7; Shaheen 6; Zaharna 245). Notably, communication breakdown as observed by Zaharna occurs when one “observes the differences of another through the prism of one’s culture” (241).

Lacking knowledge regarding another person’s culture occurs because people are ignorant, and often times such people believe that their culture is the best. Such attitudes towards a different culture eventually breed ethnocentrism, which in turn leads to negative perceptions towards ‘the other’ culture. According to Zaharna, only a conscious awareness of differences that exist between two cultures can help facilitate understanding (241). As such, there is a need to investigate how the American and Islamic cultures differ.

Diversity With the United States being a cultural melting pot, it is hard to have a definite definition of the American culture. In the same way, it is hard to define the Islamic culture since it is made up of people of diverse backgrounds and origins. For example, during a 2001 ethnicity study in the United States, the Muslim community compromised of 25 percent Arabs, 3 percent Africans, 35 percent Asians, 30 percent African-Americans, and 25 percent Europeans (Theis).

In the same study, it was established that Americans will most likely pick a person of Arabic descent as a Muslim since there is a widespread concept that all Arabs are Muslim, while ignoring the large percent of Asians or African-Americans.

In communication, the Islamic culture can be defined as a high-context culture while the American culture can be identified as a low-context culture (Hall 18). In high-context cultures, communication is neither coded nor explicit. Often, the communicator expects the recipient to understand the physical and contextual cues of the message in order to get the “full meaning of the message” (Hall 98).

In most cases, the communicator avoids giving specific details, expecting the interlocutor to interpret the message for him or herself and hence unearth the meaning of their communication. Americans on the other hand practice a low-context culture, where the burden of making communication clear lies with the person articulating the message. As such, it is the responsibility of the person conveying the message to ensure that it is clear, precise, and accurate in order to avoid any misinterpretation by the recipient.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Cross Cultural Communications specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More A clash in cross-cultural communication occurs when neither of the parties knows how to interpret each other’s communication methods. Samovar, Porter and McDaniel specifically point out that mutual misconceptions occur between adherents of the Islamic and American culture since people on both sides do not have the patience, or the knowledge needed to understand each other’s point of view (164). Adherents of the American culture are specifically unfamiliar with the Islamic way of communicating, praying, and even relating.

Adherents of the Islamic culture on the other hand usually lack the knowledge and tact needed in presenting their faith and lifestyles to others (Samovar, Porter, and McDaniel 116). As a result, adherents of the Islamic culture (especially those of Arabic origin) have always been perceived as the “uncivilized character, the cultural other [or] someone who appears and acts differently [from] the white western protagonist…” (Shaheen 12).

In an example from (Ahmed “Journey” 11), the author observes that Muslim women may become nervous and perturbed when male officials in America or elsewhere look them direct in the eye, speak to them in a loud, show aggressive behavior or come too close to them. Modesty rules in the Islamic culture hold that men should address women in reasonable mild tones. Moreover, the Islamic culture expects people of opposite sex to maintain reasonable distance while communicating as a sign of modesty (Ahmed “Journey” 11).

Ahmed further notes that the nervous and perturbed nature of a Muslim woman may however be interpreted by the American male official as a sign that the woman is ill-at ease because of something she may be hiding (11). This suggests that unless adherents of both the American and Islamic cultures make deliberate efforts to understand each other’s cultures, a breakdown in communication between people of the two cultures will always occur.

According to Zaharna, while the American culture stresses the need for univocal openness, the Islamic culture relies more on using ambiguous communication (146).

This then raises the question, how can people from the two cultures communicate effectively with each other? More so, what are the chances that a Muslim working in America will learn to communicate effectively with people in the host country or vice versa? According to Zaharna, the answers to these questions are contained in people understanding each other’s culture (147). For Muslims living in America, the burden of effective communication is on them.

The same case applies to Americans working in Middle East countries where the Islamic culture is prevalent. In both cases, the person moving to the other culture has to research, understand, and in most cases make changes in his or her communication methods in order to conform to the host culture. Unfortunately, this cannot be an easy undertaking especially since change would call for one to set aside what they have always practiced and adopt a set of different communication approaches.

A Muslim faithful who has always used ambiguous styles of communication would for example need to adopt open, univocal communication while residing, working with, or dealing with people from the American culture. Notably, such a transformation in communication skills would not only require patience, but dedication too.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Cross Cultural Communications by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Having observed that the Islamic culture does not differentiate between religiosity and lifestyle, it is worth noting that people from the Islamic culture associate their well-being with God’s blessing. According to Zaharna, how different people perceive their positions in life also affects the way they communicate (248).

Notably, the American culture lays special emphasis on the need to work hard if one is to attain measurable accomplishments. According to the author, the American culture’s perception to material well-being can be defined as a “doing culture.” The Islamic culture on the other hand believes in a “being culture” where Allah’s blessings are deemed essential for success in life.

The two concepts as proposed by Zaharna are well captured by Ahmed, who indirectly alludes to the fact that the American culture borrows from Darwinian principles where the fittest people succeed or survive in life. On the same breadth, Ahmed indirectly equates the Islamic culture with Abrahamic faiths, where self-interest is abhorred, while virtues such as selfless love, concern for the needy and the dispossessed are encouraged (25-26).

Ahmed further notes that the American culture’s anxiety, competitiveness, anger and fear towards other cultures is deeply rooted in Darwinian thinking (26). This assertion can be interpreted to mean that there are suspicions on both sides of the divide, which could very well hinder effective communication.

The American will on one hand, relate with the Muslim with some skepticism especially considering that there is a wide held-misconception that all Muslims are violent. Muslims on the other hand relate with the Americans cautiously based on the selfish impression that most Muslims have towards the American culture.

Assimilation and integration Assimilation in the American and Islamic cultures is desirable if effective communication is to occur between adherents of the two cultures. However, the magnitude of the goodwill required from both sides cannot be underestimated if assimilation and integration is to become a reality (Tareen). As has been noted by Shaheen, the first step to progress would both cultures to contest stereotypes that exist between them (65).

Citing John F. Kennedy, Shaheen observes, “it is necessary to remove the prejudices of the people, enlighten their ignorance and convince them that their interest will be promoted by [the] proposed changes; and this is not the work of a day” (65). Seeing the extent of work that such changes would call for, one wonders just where the starting point would be.

The potency of mass media as a communication tool would perhaps present one of the most wide-reaching and effective means of enhancing cross-cultural communication between adherents of the American and Islamic cultures. Shaheen’s analysis of nine hundred American-produced films reveal that most such movies contained racist and nonobjective representation of the Islamic culture mainly through characters of Arab origin.

According to Samovar, Porter and McDaniel, the unrealistic messages and images passed through media channels can be changed if producers and writers are taken through literacy programs, which encourage critical thinking amongst them (169). One such effort as cited by Theis was the “Islam in America” campaign that published weekly advertisements in local newspapers across the United States in 2003. The campaign targeted the general audience including writers, publishers and the general citizenry.

Beyond the role that the mass media needs to engage in, the roles of governments and individuals are vital (Tareen), especially if people from the two cultures are to attain assimilation and integration. Governments also need to help the citizenry overcome some of the biases held towards the two cultures by overcoming the “ideological principle of antagonism” that has characterized American-Islamic relations in the past (Hamada).

There is no doubt that there are suspicions from both sides and hence opinion makers in the Islamic culture; just as is the case with leaders and opinion makers in the American culture. Yet these parties have an important role to play in helping the masses overcome these suspicions.

Conclusion For effective cross-cultural communication to occur between adherents of the American and Islamic cultures, there has to more deliberate action from both sides in order to change people’s perception regarding the “other” culture.

As has been noted in this essay, stereotypes formed mainly from hearsay and imaginations have always characterized relations between Americans and Muslims. In the post 9/11 world, Americans have become particularly suspicious of the Muslims because of widespread association of terrorism with Islam (Ahmed “Islam” 26).

Muslims on the other hand, having suffered rejection, mistreatment, and suspicion from their American counterparts have a deep-rooted perspective of the American as an arrogant person who cares little about the well-being of the other person. The situation can be described as “Muslims are for Americans what the Russians were for Churchill’ as noted by Ahmed (“A Journey”). Apart from these stereotypes clouding people’s judgment, they also affect how people from the two cultures communicate.

The communication process between the American and Islamic cultures is made worse by the fact that one is a high-context culture, while the other is a low-context culture. For effective communication to occur therefore there has to be a compromise between the two. Usually, the immigrant who needs to communicate effectively takes the responsibility of learning about his or her host culture and conforming to the same, and as observed in this essay, the process requires both dedication and patience.

As Shaheen has observed, relationships between adherents of the American and Islamic cultures are dominated by long held clichés and stereotypes (65). As such, for successful cross-cultural communication to occur, people in both cultures would need to find effective means to contest and overcome the stereotypes. More importantly, people in the two cultures must be willing to overcome their prejudices and ignorance by adopting change.

Both sides must also understand that any vilification based or religion or race is wrong. Through Muslims and Americans humanizing each other, there is a possibility that people from the two cultural divides can establish effective communication relationships. In the contemporary globalized world, adherents of both American and Islamic cultures will need each other for economic, political, or social reasons. Their relationships can only be successful if there is effective cross-cultural communication.

Works Cited Ahmed, Akbar (“A Journey,” online). 2010. A Journey into America, Past and Present. Web.

Ahmed, Akbar S. (“Islam”). Islam under Siege: Living dangerously in a Post-honor World, New York: Wiley-Blackwell, 2003.

Ahmed, Akbar (“Journey”). Journey into America: The Challenge of Islam. Washington D.C.: Brookings Institution Press, 2010.Print.

Hall, Edward Twitchell. Beyond Culture. NY: Double Day, 1976. Print

Hamada, Basyouni. “Global Culture of Cultural Clash: An Islamic Intercultural Communication Perspective.” Global Media Journal 3.5 (Fall 2004). Web.

Samovar, Larry, Porter Richard, and McDaniel, Edwin. Intercultural Communication: A Reader. Florence, KY: Cengage Learning, 2008. Print.

Shaheen, Jack. “Arab and Muslim Stereotyping in the American Popular Culture.” Occasional Papers Series (1997):1-91.

Tareen, Amra. America’s Schizophrenic Muslim Policy- Journey into America: The Challenge of Islam. All Voices inc., Aug. 2010. Web.

Theis, Rolf. “Muslim Americans in American Society- and in German Classroom.” American Studies Journal 52.1. (Sept. 2008). Web.

Zaharna, Rhoda. “Bridging Cultural Differences: American Public Relations Practices


Adopted children with gay parents have better chances of succeeding Essay essay help

Gay parenting involves a situation whereby gay people including lesbians are allowed to act as parents to one or more children through foster care, adoption, surrogacy, and co-parenting (Bozett ix). Therefore, gay parents are allowed by law to establish a normal family in some parts of the world.

According to different census studies, about 33% of Lesbian couples and 22% of gay couples take care of at least one child in their households. In addition, the same studies show that gay or Lesbian parenting has several advantages as opposed to foster care and some aspects of heterosexual parenting (Aiken 182).

Here, the supporters of gay or lesbian parenting argue that a considerable number of gay parents provide their adopted children with more secure emotional surroundings compared to heterosexual parents. Moreover, gay parents give their adopted children a chance to realize the importance of a full-time family compared to single parenthood, which is characterized by many shortcomings such as poor academic achievements and questionable behavioral characteristics in children.

On the other hand, evidence tends to support the perception that lesbian parents who are given a chance to bear their own children through artificial insemination are better parents in terms of providing emotionally stable homes and raising well-adjusted children. Lastly, gay or lesbian parenting serves to minimize the shortage of adoptive parents experienced in foster homes across the United States (Aiken 180-183).

Furthermore, studies show that gay or Lesbian parenting does not significantly differ from heterosexual parenting in terms of raising psychologically sound, well-educated, socially healthy, and well-adjusted children. On the other hand, most studies involving gay parenting and gay adoption seems to support the idea that adopted children with gay parents have better chances of succeeding in different aspects of life and academics. As a result, this essay looks at different aspects of gay or lesbian parenting, which seem to support adopted children in their mission to succeed.

First, many gay or lesbian parents tend to support the idea that children who will live in the future age should belong to each individual living in the present age. As a result, gay or lesbian parents have many long-lasting dreams and hopes for their adopted children as opposed to foster and heterosexual parents. Therefore, apart from realizing that love builds a family, gay adoptive parents are aware of the need for the family to act as the first teacher for their children.

Moreover, these parents are aware of the society’s view of their sexual orientation, and thus they tend to worry more about the safety and welfare of their children particularly in schools (Letts and Sears 163). Consequently, gay parents taking care of adopted children tend to build a strong attachment with their children and other adoptive and heterosexual parents who are sharing the same experience and vision for their children.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More As a result, the existence of children from gay or lesbian families in both private and public schools has forced school administrators and the society to reconsider their traditional perception of these children. Therefore, schools and the society become more committed towards guaranteeing the safety and integrity of adopted children from gay families thereby giving these children better chances of succeeding in academics and other social activities (Letts and Sears 170).

Secondly, studies show that the number of infants who are born out of wedlock is significantly increasing in the United States, and therefore, compromising care services at foster and adoptive homes. For example, in 1995, about 258,000 children aged below 18 years were living in foster homes across the United States (Aiken 182).

In the recent past, additional foster homes have been established to cater for the rising number of children from different races. However, studies note that abandoned children are brought in and out of different foster homes, and thus, the chances of these children developing emotional stability and personal identity are very minimal.

On the other hand, the same studies note that adopted children including those raised by gay parents have better chances of becoming emotionally stable and developing strong personal identities compared to their counterparts in foster homes. Here, the supporters of gay adoption argue that there is a high probability that many adoptive adults will want their adopted children, and thus, they are more willing to make various preparations and concessions for such children in terms of schooling and their social welfare (Aiken 184).

Lastly, studies on the quality of gay fathers and their parenting tactics show that gay parents are more willing to support paternal nurturance compared to their heterosexual counterparts. On the other hand, gay fathers are less likely to support economic provisions and empowerment for their young children.

Furthermore, most gay fathers show no signs of supporting the traditional characteristics of parenting, and thus they are more unlikely to provide their children with sex-typed toys and presents. In fact, gay fathers tend to endorse role models who are of the opposite sex for their children (Bozett 15).

Overall, there is evidence to suggest that gay parents have positive interactions and relationships with their biological and adopted children. Additionally, the parent’s sexual orientation shows no significant impact on the relationship between parents and their growing children (Bozett 15). Therefore, gay parents tend to establish stable homes in addition to long-term positive relationships with their children, and in so doing, they give their children the opportunity to succeed.

We will write a custom Essay on Adopted children with gay parents have better chances of succeeding specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Aiken, Lewis. Human development in adulthood. New York: Plenum Press, 1998. Print.

Bozett, Frederick. Gay and lesbian parents. New York: Praeger Publishers, 1987. Print.

Letts, William and Sears, James Thomas. Queering elementary education: advancing the dialogue about sexualities and schooling. Maryland: Rowman


The Issue of Bullying in the Schools Essay online essay help

Table of Contents Personal experience

Forms, Effects and recommendations of bullying


Works Cited

This paper attempts to look at the issue of bullying in the schools. A personal story about how I was bullied when I was young is included. The paper looks at this issue by considering aspects like causes and forms of bullying as well as examples of bullying cases.

Since the number of bullying cases has been on the increase in schools, recommendations will be offered on the best thing to do when bullying cases are reported. Main ideas on the topic will be presented so that the issue can be presented in a comprehensive way (Smith, Pepler, and Rigby 56-60).

Personal experience I grew up in south Bronx until I was thirteen years old when we moved to an Irish neighborhood. My brother and sister are half Irish and half Puerto Rican, unlike me; my whole family has a very fair skin. The first time I landed on this neighborhood, I was very delighted since unlike our previous home I could play outside the house.

I still recall what befell me the first time I went out to play; all the children in the neighborhood were white and the girls started harassing me by telling me that if I was hoping to live there I had to be white, they even spread baby powder on my face. We later become friends although some of their parents resented me because I was Spanish. The situation did not get any better since some children nicknamed me Goya bean: this made to hate Goya beans

When summer ended, I joined school and it so happened that I was the only Spanish girl in the whole school. Things did not go well here either since I picked fights frequently because other children teased me. At some point, it became a routine that I had to be involved in a fight everyday. The principle took the initiative of calling my mother to discuss the matter. When my mother came, she was told that I was a problematic child since I frequently fought with other children.

The board of directors claimed that with my stubborn nature I deserved to be taken to a special school where other problematic children studied. Since then, I was regarded as a problematic child. My mother was forced to transfer me to another school since I was expelled from my former school. I developed low self-esteem and I started taking drugs, soon afterwards I dropped out of school at sixth grade.

This victimization made me to start thinking of ways that I could change my way of life to show that I was still strong hence prove to my aggressors wrong. The events acted as a motivating factor for me to make a difference. Each time I feel like giving up my efforts of trying to be what I want to be, I look back and remember all the challenges that I have overcome in my life.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This makes me to realize that I have much more challenges to face and overcome; thus I become a stronger person. Every time I look back, I do not regret what I have gone through since it is through these chain of events that I have become what I am today.

One thing that I am proud of is that I managed to turn anger into motivation. Nevertheless, I must admit that these experiences left me with a scar since when one is a victim of bullying he or she is tempted to believe that something is wrong with them one asks questions like ‘why me?’ Bullying kills one’s self esteem and also makes one to feel isolated.

The victim may fear or feel ashamed to tell anyone since he or she may think that this has never happened to anyone else. It gives me joy to know that the issue of bullying is now a pubic affair since bullying stories were unheard of when I was growing up. It is also important to note that children are no longer afraid to report bullying cases.

Forms, Effects and recommendations of bullying Slavens and Kerrigan (23) see bullying as a term used to describe a pattern of behavior that is cruel and humiliating towards another person, he further notes that it can affect people of all walks of life and age.

Bullying can occur in two forms, verbal and physical. One can be bullied verbally when the bully attempts to verbally anger the victim by mocking them on purpose. Physical bullying occurs when the bully or aggressor forces physical contact with his or her victim, this may be in form of kicking or punching to the point that the victim becomes submissive.

Physical bullying is more serious as compared to verbal bullying since it can lead to serious injuries and sometimes death of the victim (Orpinas, Horne, 12-34). Bullies enjoy intimidating others to either gain fame or to satisfy their ego. Teenagers may bully others due to peer pressure since they may want to fit in a certain click. Factors that can lead to bullying include differences in physical and cultural characteristics; in addition, showing signs of inferiority can also be a major cause of bullying.

This vice has many effects on the victim. Since the bully has control over the victim, the victim can become stressed to the extent of becoming depressed. Most victims of bullying have low self esteem since they do not feel self-sufficient. The victim can also develop negative attitude towards the environment and the people around him.

We will write a custom Essay on The Issue of Bullying in the Schools specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Such a person may isolate him/her self from the rest of the world because of a feeling of inadequacy. School children who have been bullied may drop out of school or start taking drugs so as to seek consolation (Field, 211-250).

Teachers should be strict when dealing with bullies. Heavy punishment should be given to the aggressors so as to prevent them from repeating the act again and to also warn others not to repeat the same mistake in future. Victims of bullying should be encouraged to report to their seniors if they are bullied.

It is important for the teacher to diagnose any physical and psychological problems affecting the students. Schools and other institutions should set up advisory centers where students can be helped to overcome the aftermath of bullying. These centers should have friendly counselors so that students can feel free to discuss their problems with them (Slavens and Kerrigan, 12). The counselors should also be well trained so that they can offer professional help to the victims.

Conclusion Bullying is the act of humiliating others either verbally of physically. A bully is the aggressor who undertakes bullying. Although bullying is common in schools, it can also occur in other settings such as the workplaces. It is important for the school administration to come up with ways of dealing with bullying cases such as punishing the bully heavily. People bully others for different reasons such as the need to feel superior. The vice bears negative impacts to the victim to the extent that it can be verbal.

Works Cited Field, Tim. Bully in sight: how to predict, resist, challenge and combat workplace bullying: overcoming the silence and denial by which abuse thrives. New Jersey: Success Unlimited, 2000. pp. 211-250

Orpinas, Pamela, Horne, Arthur. Bullying prevention: creating a positive school climate and developing social competence. MI: University of Michigan, 2006. pp. 12-34

Slavens, Elaine and Kerrigan, Brooke. Bullying: deal with it before push comes to shove. Toronto: James Lorimer


Culture and Diversity Argumentative Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

America is a country built by people from different backgrounds. It is a nation comprising of people who migrated from other parts of the world, some willingly and others forcefully through slavery. All these people have their different cultures and the majority of them hold to them making America a land of cultural, racial and religious diversity.

The people who founded and built America migrated from various places of the world and they included the Europeans, Jews, Italians, Germans, Filipinos, Indians, Africans and the Irish among others. Even now, America still experiences massive immigrations mostly from Latin America, Asia, and Africa. The increased development of different cultures in America as well as social, political economic, racial and religious diversity affects the American nation in many ways.

There are both merits and demerits of the diversity in America. This diversity has enabled the people from different backgrounds to live together and understand the diverse cultures and practices of other people. The diversity is important in the educational processes of the American people as they learn from what is practically present with them.

These people also participate in these educational processes, which contribute to their development. Cultural diversity is important in economic development. It gives people involved in business to know the desires and needs of other cultures in the world and thus help them to come up with business strategies. The diversity in language is well exploited in this process.

Diversity also determines the health of a country or region. The more diverse a country is, the more innovative its citizens are likely to be and less resistant to innovations and change. It also gives individuals an opportunity to develop their personal skills by learning from each other. This not only leads to personal growth, but also leads to economic, social, spiritual and political growth.

On the other hand, diversity in the American nation has a number of negative effects. Segregation and discrimination in America has led to a heterogeneous nation divided along racial lines. This affects development negatively as the segregated group does not get enough opportunity to exploit their potential. They also pull back in developmental issues, which can impair the development rate of the country. Conflicting cultures also create conflicts between the citizens thus disrupting the unity of the nation.

Most of the immigrants to America came in with their traditional heritage and they are determined to maintain their practices. In this way, these immigrants overlooked the heritage of the traditional Americans.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The issue of maintaining a diverse heritage in America is what brought a misunderstanding between the communities involved and led to the marginalization of the immigrants. Some of the immigrants, such as some groups of the African Americans, felt inferior in their culture and decided to drop their heritage in favor of the original American heritage; however, they did not succeed.

Still, the traditional heritages of the immigrants make it easier to draw clear lines between the different communities holding different heritage practices in America. Their heritage makes them to be more unacceptable by the early American nationals who demand that the immigrants be assimilated to the American culture.

In order for a nation to remain one, the people have to accept the diversity of cultures in the nation and appreciate each other’s culture. The governing bodies should also do away with discriminative policies and come up with those that can unite the country.

In conclusion, America is a country that was founded on “the back of immigration” and therefore has people with different cultural and historical backgrounds. To unite this country language is a major tool to use and the American people should learn diverse languages. The citizens should appreciate each other’s culture and learn to live together as a united nation.


The Character of Joseph Grand in “The Plague” by Albert Camus Analytical Essay scholarship essay help

In this paper, I would like to discuss such character of Camus’ novel The Plague as Joseph Grand. Although it is too early for me to advance any far-fetched arguments, I can say that Joseph is very much similar to Sisyphus; he becomes accustomed to the routine nature of daily life, and his existence reminds us of Sisyphus’ attempts to roll a rock to the top of the mountain.

Albert Camus creates this character to show that the majority of modern people do not strive for intellectual or spiritual development, while focusing on the material side of their lives.

If they do decide to make a difference to their existence, their attempts are usually very superficial. Another purpose which Grand serves is to prove that as a rule people do not search for good qualities within themselves, and only a sudden misfortune can force them to do it. In order to elaborate this argument, I need to discuss the behavior of this man, his relations with others and, most importantly, those expectations, he sets for himself.

At first, one has to show how the author describes this person. Camus points out that “ambition was not the spur that activated Joseph Grand… All he desired was the prospect of a life suitable insured on the material side by honest work” (Camus, 56). This indicates that he was quite content with his status in community and the quality of his life. In part, this lack of ambition explains why he has served his entire life as a clerk and why his wife left him.

It should also be noted that Grand also attempts to write a book, most probably, a novel. However, he never even finishes the first line of this alleged masterpiece. In his defense, Conrad says that he struggles to find the most suitable words and phrases for this novel and this perfectionism prevents him from progressing further.

At this point, an attentive reader has to ask oneself a question whether this behavior can ascribed only to perfectionism or to something else, for instance to the fear of a making a mistake, laziness, and reluctance to take risks.

He changes his lifestyle only when the epidemic of plague breaks out in the town. This calamity helps Joseph to rediscover the traits of which he was unaware before, namely, fortitude and resolution. He is seen by others as the “embodiment of quiet courage” that raises the spirit of other people (Camus, 100).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More During the plague, he stops being a Sisyphus, engaged in senseless labor. He becomes a person who realizes that his life must not be spent in vain. At the very end, we learn that Joseph resumes the work on his novel, but we do not know for sure whether he has ever completed the first line. The author leaves it for the readers to decide whether Joseph Grand is a changed man, who can take initiative and responsibility for his actions, or he is the same Sisyphus, who is more content with the safety of daily routine.

It is quite difficult to determine how this novel would have looked like without him. Most likely, the plot of The Plague would have remained unchanged, yet the impression, produced by this literary work would have been different.

The thing is that Joseph Grand embodies the strengths and weaknesses of modern people, including their aspirations, fears, and prejudices. Again, this character proves an idea that people usually do not attempt to change for the better on their own accord, unless there is a powerful external stimulus. This is why the character of Joseph Grand is important to this novel.

Works Cited Camus Albert. The Myth of Sisyphus. 1955. Available at:

Camus Albert. The Plague. BookEden, 1967.


Planning and decision making in management Reflective Essay best essay help: best essay help

Planning and decision making are among the most valuable foundations on which businesses and organizations are built. For any organization to succeed in its undertaking, it needs to properly plan for virtually all aspects of its operations. The right decisions have to be made by its managers to see the business through successful operations.

Since the success of managers is reflected by the welfare of the organizations they manage, it is indubitable that planning and decision making cannot be separated from the practice of management. This paper is a thoughtful reflection of the usefulness of planning and decision making skills, acquired in class, in the practice of management.

As an aspiring manager, the ideas I acquired about planning and decision making in organizations will be very useful. This is because the topic was covered with clear explanations of the usefulness of planning and management in management and it also covered how one can plan well and make right and acceptable decisions.

Among the things that will be particularly useful in my life as a manager is the idea that planning and decision making is efficiently done using a bottom-up approach. This is because the use of a bottom-up approach in planning and making of decisions results in decisions that are characterized by sufficient consultation.

More importantly, the decisions made using a bottom-up approach are in most cases acceptable to both managers and junior employees (Smith 33). Other issues covered in the topic were equally useful and I am sure I will be applying most of the ideas I got in class, about this topic, in my life as a manager.

There are so many new things I learnt about planning and decision making. One of the new things that substantially impressed me is the fact that good managers are able to make decisions by just listening to their fellow employees (Smith 35).

That is, if someone comes with an idea of objection to a given plan, a good manager will listen to him/her and after evaluating the value of the suggestion, approve it or reject it. Since his/her evaluation is assumed to be based on shrewd judgment, the suggestion is, in this case, bound to have a positive effect on the organization. Much of the credit from such success goes to the manager for his/her coordination and leadership skills.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More My realization of the fact that listening to other people’s ideas makes a good manager will be very useful in my life. This is primarily due to the fact that I like putting my ideas across so much that it sometimes interferes with my listening skills.

After the course, I am a better manager since I can now start working on my listening skills and try to have a positive perspective towards every idea that another person puts across. I now appreciate the fact that to be a good manager, I do not have to do all the thinking and planning work but I should have good evaluation skills for gauging the usefulness of ideas suggested by other people.

As it can be deduced from the discussion above, good managerial skills require good planning and decision making. Taking a course that tackles the same is very important since, as students are taught on how to be good planners and decision makers, they are given a chance to evaluate themselves. This is very useful since after evaluating themselves, students are able to perfect their weaknesses as far as planning and decision making is concerned and consequently be good managers.

Works Cited Smith, Jane. Planning and Decision Making. New York. Wadsworth Publishing, 1996. Print.


Geological and cultural importance of Deer Creek Park (Colorado) Descriptive Essay college essay help online: college essay help online

This is an open space Park in Jefferson County with both geological and cultural importance to the whole nation. This park has offered great and wonderful views for a long time.

Most hikers and other outside fanatics have fun in deer Creek Park. Within the park compound there are various types of wild flowers especially the rainy seasons. Attractive views of the plains and the beautiful flowers, create a good photographic opportunities for the visitors (Hall 345). Most of people have preferred to visit this park due to its wide range of facilities that fits different types of visitors.

To begin with, the park has a wonderful and comfortable restroom facilities. Within its compound, the secluded areas for picnic are well secured with barbecue wires to ensure safety for the visitors. Both hikers and bikers are provided by multi purpose trails while climbing the mountain.

Any visitor to this park gets a chance to go through the park information, as there are information places equipped with brochures. The parks cleanliness is maintained through provision of many trashcans all over the place, thus it’s hard to see litter within the compound (Lipker 89).

The visiting time is relatively enough as the park is opened an hour before sunrise and its closed one hour after sunset. There are also attractive shelters within the compound and more beauty to the natural environments. The center of attraction lies in the presence of scrub oak habitat that is uncommon within that locality. In the park, wild animals enjoy oak as their food and their shelter. The atmosphere of the park is made wonderful by sweet melodies of different types of birds.

The most powerful force that is recognized in the formation of this park is erosion by water and wind. Other minor forces include Colorado River, volcanism, and climatic changes. Although this park is located in the desert, water also has a great impact during its formation. During the rainy seasons, the park soils do not absorb water as it is hardened completely by the strong sun (Yanagihara and Denniston 103).

When raining the water flows with force making the situation worse. The plants in the park have got shallow roots enabling them to absorb as much water as possible during the rainy seasons. On the other hand, these roots cannot control soil erosion as they are very weak and cannot hold the soil together.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The deer creek park occupies a big space approximately 1881 acre. In the beginning, its fertile soils attracted activities like mining and farming. Currently, people around the park also do a lot of hunting especially the deer that are common wild animals in the region. In the park, there are several well-managed trails that one can choose which to use (Hall 530).

Hiking trails are traveling paths inside the park. Some of the trails that are mostly used are Plymouth creek trail, Plymouth mountain trail, scenic view trail, and red mesa loop trail among others. The commonly used trail in deer Creek Park is meadowlark trail. This trail is estimated to have a length of one and a half miles. It’s a trail for pedestrian only although there are other that bikers can use. Through the help of residents around the park, the deer creek park has been able to offer protection and maintenance of wild animals and trees.

People from outside have also gotten an opportunity to be educated and conservation (Hlawaty, 210). The main aim of the deer creek park is to make use of that open space land as well as preserving natural resources. Some of the recreational activities that are conducted in the park include, luxury and family traveling where people enjoy themselves through trekking or by use of bikes.

Different types of sports, running and marathons have for a long time being conducted here especially the winter sports. During vacations visitors come in this park for leisure with their friends or family. Boating and sailing is also a common activity in this park especially when there are no water sports in progress.

The red rocks formed by the wind and water erosion are estimated to be 335 million years. These red rocks are formed by marine limestone and dolomites among other components (Samelson, et al 93). These red rocks are about 400 to 500 feet going upwards separating the lower and the upper sides of the deer creek park.

A slope for climbing these rocks is created where there is a crack. The strong and admirable red color is as a result of iron oxides from other layers as the original color of these rocks is dark brown. Some marine fossils are seen on these red rocks for instance snails, and fish among others. On these red rocks too caves and arches are also available.

In conclusion, the geological and the cultural aspects of the park have made it of value. Through these two people have learned, have funs, and enjoyed their leisure time well in the deer creek park. A lot of recreational activities have been organized and taken place in this park bringing people together (Lipker 113).

We will write a custom Essay on Geological and cultural importance of Deer Creek Park (Colorado) specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This has contributed in promoting the social aspect of people and unity among them. The most surprising thing I observed in the park is the presence of the rattlesnakes, thus one has to be very careful when making a visit there. Weather conditions are also to be observed keenly when visiting, as there are several eruptions of the rocks due to contraction and expansion.

Works Cited Hall, Frank. History of the State of Colorado, Volume 2, ISBN1110812094, 9781110812097, BiblioBazaar, LLC, New York, 2009. Web.

Hlawaty, Stephen. Mountain Biking Colorado’s Front Range: From Fort Collins to Colorado Springs, ISBN0762725559, 9780762725557, Falcon, New York, 2003.

Lipker, Kim. 60 hikes within 60 miles, Denver and Boulder: including Colorado Springs, Fort Collins, and Rocky Mountain National Park, ISBN089732627X, 9780897326278, Menasha Ridge Press, Birmingham, 2006.

Samelson, Jenna, et al. Colorado Campgrounds: The 100 Best and All the Rest, (3rded), SBN156579334X, 9781565793347, Big Earth Publishing, Colorado, 200I.

Yanagihara, Wendy and Denniston, Jennifer. Grand Canyon National Park, (2nd ed), ISBN1741044839, 9781741044836, Lonely Planet, Adelaide, 2008.


Business Management Plan Research Paper essay help

General description of the business The business will be structured as a limited liability company. The international hotel business has a lot of potential as more people are moving across borders for leisure, business or tourism purposes. United Arab Emirates (U.A.E) has been categorized as 18th among tourism competitive businesses by the World Economic Forum (WEF).

The UAE is well known for its great shopping facilities, hotels and other tourist destinations. All the year round, tourists and business people flock the UAE to catch a glimpse of the splendid world out there and spend some money too.

The hospitality industry in the UAE is experiencing a boom in business as new and returning customers are flocking the local hotels causing an influx of patrons. Travelers, such as tourists are in pursuit of comfort, which they are willing and able to part with a fortune, while businessmen are in search of convenience and the business opportunities the region offers.

Considering the hospitality industry in the UAE, there is still a lot of potential although the market is quit dominated by established brand names. However, for new entrants into the market there is still a lot of potential. We intend to establish a startup company in Dubai, by the name C-Zones Bar


Father-Son Relationships in Hamlet – Hamlet’s Loyalty to His Father college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Loyalty becomes a euphemism for blind obedience in William Shakespeare’s Hamlet. A curious relationship exists amongst the main pairings of fathers and sons therein. Though grown men, the sons in Hamlet essentially do exactly what their fathers tell them to do, without so much as a word of protest.

These boy-men adopt their fathers’ arguments, vendettas, and wars as their own, and seemingly guide their actions entirely by paternal approval. In the case of Hamlet, he surrenders his own life and future to the will of his father, albeit following significant hesitation, not to mention the passage of an entire play. Nonetheless, this essay examines the core action Hamlet, Laertes and Fortinbras share in Hamlet: the absolute subjugation of their own personal ambitions and desires to paternal rule.

Let us begin with Hamlet. His case begs particularly close scrutiny when we consider that the elder Hamlet has passed away. At the beginning of the play, Hamlet receives the dictum of action from the ghost of his father, demanding revenge against his treacherous brother, Claudius, with a decidedly passive aggressive manipulative tactic: “List, list, O, list! If thou didst ever thy dear father love – …Revenge his foul and most unnatural murder” (Shakespeare 1744).

More about Hamlet How did King Hamlet Die? 5 108 Which Statement Best Describes Gertrude’s Development Between Act 1 and Act 4? 5 57 What is the significance of the Willow Song in Othello? 5 1059 In act 1, scene 1, which character does Shakespeare use most to create suspense? 5 111 Interestingly, at no point in this initial exchange between father and son does the elder Hamlet ask his son if he might be agreeable to the challenge. The ghost simply indicts the king. “Now, Hamlet, hear: ‘Tis given out that, sleeping in my orchard, A serpent stung me; so the whole ear of Denmark, Is by a forged process of my death, Rankly abused: but know, thou noble youth, The serpent that did sting thy father’s life, Now wears his crown” (Shakespeare 1744).

The ghost then employs heavy handed tactics to remind Hamlet of his station and duty: “If thou hast nature in thee, bear it not; Let not the royal bed of Denmark be, A couch for luxury and damned incest” (Shakespeare 1745).

Significantly, the ghost reminds Hamlet not to exact revenge on Gertrude herein: “But, howsoever thou pursuest this act, Taint not thy mind, nor let thy soul contrive, Against thy mother aught: leave her to heaven” (Shakespeare 1745).

The significance of these lines lies in the ghost’s assumption that the deed has already been accepted. In essence, the ghost takes for granted that his son will avenge him, by virtue of his role as a son, while reminding him not to hurt his mother. Hamlet’s father, apparently, still rules the roost from beyond the grave. Tellingly, he meets with no complaint from Hamlet.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Laertes exhibits a little more freedom and self-direction when compared to Hamlet, however, he too directs his life according to the approval of Polonius, as evidenced by his return to Denmark after Polonius’ death. Laertes’ vulnerability to dutifully honor and obey his father becomes his undoing in the masterful hands of Claudius.

Laertes bursts into the castle, after nearly exciting a riot, and demands revenge for the death of his father: “And so have I a noble father lost; A sister driven into desperate terms, Whose worth, if praises may go back again, Stood challenger on mount of all the age, For her perfections: but my revenge will come” (Shakespeare 1786).

Claudius, spotting another boy-man and thus, easy prey, smoothly uses Laertes’ anger to his own purpose, using the same calculated appeal to obedience that we saw earlier with the elder Hamlet.

Claudius makes use of the same masculine weaknesses which Hamlet falls prey to so effortlessly and consistently. “Laertes, was your father dear to you? Or are you like the painting of a sorrow, A face without a heart?…Not that I think you did not love your father; But that I know love is begun by time;…There lives within the very flame of love, A kind of wick or snuff that will abate it;…that we would do, We should do when we would; for this ‘would’ changes, And hath abatements and delays as many, As there are tongues, are hands, are accidents; …Hamlet comes back: what would you undertake, To show yourself your father’s son in deed, More than in words?” To which Laertes, ever the good son, replies, “cut his throat i’ the church” (Shakespeare 1788).

Fortinbras, for the purpose of this essay, represents the man whose actions appear the most practical and explicable, in that they exist beyond the realm of emotion.

He seeks revenge not for the sake of his father, but to recover the lands and inheritance that the elder Fortinbras forfeited in the battle. “Our last king, Whose image even but now appear’d to us, Was, as you know, by Fortinbras of Norway, Thereto prick’d on by a most emulate pride, Dared to the combat; in which our valiant Hamlet – For so this side of our known world esteem’d him – Did slay this Fortinbras; who by a seal’d compact, Well ratified by law and heraldry, Did forfeit, with his life, all those his lands, Which he stood seized of, to the conqueror: … Now, sir, young Fortinbras, Of unimproved mettle hot and full, Hath in the skirts of Norway here and there, Shark’d up a list of lawless resolutes,… But to recover of us, by strong hand, And terms compulsatory, those foresaid lands, So by his father lost” (Shakespeare 1733).

In Hamlet, the vengeance that Fortinbras undertakes against Denmark and the elder Hamlet is essentially self serving, and less colored by emotion and obedience than that of Hamlet and Laertes. However, it is vital to note that Fortinbras praises the manner of Hamlet’s death at the end of the play, which suggests that he also values and acts by paternal rule. “Let four captains, Bear Hamlet, like a soldier, to the stage; For he was likely, had he been put on, To have proved most royally” (Shakespeare 1803).

We will write a custom Essay on Father-Son Relationships in Hamlet – Hamlet’s Loyalty to His Father specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Why do these men feel so beholden to this idea of surrendering to the will of their fathers, even if they should die in the attempt? Identity. Though both Hamlet and Fortinbras are named after their fathers, only Fortinbras’ action directly benefits him. Hamlet’s loyalty to his father cost him his life. Both, however, are princes, and dutifully accept the limitations of public office.

Further Research How do the actors’ physical appearances affect their adaptations of Hamlet? 5 73 Why does Hamlet kill Polonius? 5 38 How is Laertes a Foil for Hamlet? 5 166 If Shakespeare kills the character of Hamlet, what dramatic convention would he be using? 5 237 In the brilliantly prophetic scene between Laertes and Ophelia, Laertes asserts that Hamlet’s blind compliance to his father’s will stems from his position as the Prince of Denmark; his role is to obey and serve the dictums of royalty, regardless of his personal wishes. “His will is not his own; For he himself is subject to his birth: He may not, as unvalued persons do, Carve for himself; for on his choice depends, The safety and health of this whole state” (Shakespeare 1740). The relationship between fathers and sons in Hamlet seems to suggest that in Shakespeare’s time, sons of kings were little more than pawns to the larger will of the paternalistic monarchy.

Works Cited Shakespeare, William. “Hamlet.” The Annotated Shakespeare. A.L. Rowse, ed. New York: Greenwich House, 1988. 1731-1803. Print.


Which is Basic in Ethics: Happiness or Obligation Essay (Critical Writing) best essay help

In life, people do things for different reasons; however, all these reasons boil down to two broad issues viz. happiness and obligation. A person will either do something to achieve happiness or as a duty. Nevertheless, regardless of the motives behind one’s actions, the actions will be a means to an end or the end itself. Therefore, in this context, happiness and obligation might be the means to a desired end or the end itself.

Logically, the basic element in any pursuit is the end itself; consequently, the task here is to determine the element that stands out as the end as opposed to means to something else. The means to an end is necessary for the end is unrealizable in absence of the means. The debate on the basic elements in ethics still rages. Proponents and critics alike have their side of story, with critics claiming that obligation is the basic element in ethics while proponents hold that obligations are a means to an end and not the end itself.

The superiority of one element over the other determines its viability as the basic element in ethics; consequently, the element that surpasses the other becomes the basic element. At this point, one might confuse the means for the end and vice versa; however, as aforementioned, there can only be one end. Happiness is the basic element in ethics; not honor.

As aforementioned, the end is superior to the means to the end; consequently, happiness is superior to honor. One would wonder why he/she would seek happiness and not honor. Well, happiness is the end because “…we always desire happiness for its own sake and never as a means to something else…” (Mulvaney, 2008, p. 128). Therefore, if people desire and pursue happiness as the end, then happiness surpasses honor.

However, happiness is not autonomous; consequently, there has to be other elements that work in concert towards the realization of the same. Honor lie in the category of the ‘other elements’ because people do not pursue honor basically for what would come out of it but “…as being means to happiness, because…they will prove the instruments of happiness” (Mulvaney, 2008, p. 128). In the light of these observations, happiness outscores honor validating the reason why people should pursue happiness and not honor.

In its entirety, happiness does not seek to accomplish honor because in happiness, honor exists. However, this argument is relative depending on what is important to humans. There cannot be a one-fit-all answer to this question; however, the initial argument that people pursue the end and not the means answers this question. Happiness being the end stands out as the most important element amongst humans.

If honor were the most important element, then it would surpass happiness and having achieved honor, people would not pursue anything else. Unfortunately, this is not the case as even those in honorable positions seek happiness. Aristotle argues that, goodness of a man comes from executing good deeds carried out in proper excellence. For excellence to exist, virtue must be present, and in the presence of the two, one’s goodness becomes an activity of the soul as Aristotle insinuates.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More To understand the superiority of happiness to honor, it is worth considering Aristotle’s argument that, the “good of a man is an activity of the soul in accordance with virtue” (Mulvaney, 2008, p. 128). In other words, the motive behind any one’s activity determines the good of that person.

Virtue in this context surfaces with practice and knowledge; that is, one has to practice virtuous deeds and be aware of their implications. If one executes a virtue without knowing it is a virtue, then the activity is not good anymore and one’s goodness becomes obsolete. Virtue minus knowledge turns out to be mere duty and duty cannot define one’s goodness.

Moreover, for virtues to function optimally, they should relate to some morals and this leads to moral virtues. According to Aristotle, moral virtue is the consequence of a habit. Habit sprouts from actions that one continually do. The role of habit in achievement of moral habit is paramount here.

Just the same, way artists have to practice art after learning it; people have to practice virtues to qualify as having characteristics that associate with the virtue. For instance, by practicing kindness towards others one can be termed as kind. Likewise, by showing love to others one passes for a loving person. Without action that leads to habit, then a virtue does not qualify as a virtue. Aristotle likens habit of exercising virtues to that of exercising any other learned aspect of life.

For instance, he observes that not until someone plays a harpist, he/she does not qualify as a harpist. Similarly, virtue that is not exercised is no virtue. However, as aforementioned, Aristotle cautions against use of virtues void of knowledge, and he puts across some conditions that a virtue has to undergo to qualify its excellence.

One should “…know what he is doing…deliberately choose to do it and to do it for its own sake… do it as an instance of a settled and immutable moral state” (Mulvaney, 2008, p. 129). If these conditions are unmet, then the virtue holds no moral support thus negating its worth.

Critics would fault this argument and question the modality of distinguishing what is moral from what is not. At this point, Aristotle introduces the ‘mean’ as a way of balancing the extremes of any moral issue.

We will write a custom Critical Writing on Which is Basic in Ethics: Happiness or Obligation specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Aristotle seeks to explore mean value not from mathematical perspective where one obtains absolute mean, but from a philosophical point of view where mean is relative depending on an individual. Taken in this context therefore, ‘mean’ means that which is not excess and not deficient, depending on an individual. Critics would again raise the question of how to balance the relativity of this mean given the fact that no one is a replica of the other.

As aforementioned, virtue void of knowledge is no virtue and knowledge comes with emotions. Emotions coupled with actions executed at the right time underscores the mean state of any virtue. “To experience these emotions at the right times and on the right occasions and towards the right persons and for the right causes and in the right manner is the mean or the supreme good, which is characteristic of virtue” (Mulvaney, 2008, p. 130-31).

Therefore, time, occasion, subject, cause and manner are functions of ‘mean’ state in any virtue. Given the relativity of determining ‘mean’ state of a virtue, prudence and reason are the key factors that weigh one’s mean state.

There are different forms of mean states as even in some cases; mean is either an extreme or a deficiency. Nevertheless, these inherent differences do not nullify the superiority of happiness to honor or obligations. As previously mentioned, some mean states represent extremes where there are no excesses or deficiencies. For instance, there is no excess or deficiency of wickedness; therefore, the mean state here is an extreme; wickedness.

Murder, rape, adultery and theft among others are inherently wicked states. There cannot be a good or bad murderer. Nevertheless, some cases have clear-cut extremes and deficiencies thus mean stands out conspicuously. For instance, in giving and receiving of material things, the extreme is profligacy while the deficiency is illiberality; liberality is the mean. Whichever, way one perceives and determines his/her mean, the best way to hit the mean is by pushing one’s position towards the mean.

That is, to “choose the lesser of two evils…by steering clear of the evil which is further from the mean…drag ourselves in the direction opposite to them; for it is by removing ourselves as far as possible from what is wrong that we shall arrive at the mean…(Mulvaney, 2008, p. 134). In other words, doing things for the common good of all people underlines the principle behind the best way of hitting the mean.

In conclusion, people do things for different reasons; some do what they do for fame, honor, money, or leisure among other things while others do what they do to get happiness. To determine the basic principle in ethics calls for extensive exploration to distinguish the end and the means to the end. The end is superior to the means to the end and as analyzed above, happiness is the end while honor is means to the end. Therefore, happiness is the basic principle in ethics.

That which brings happiness to all people underscores what is ‘good’ for humans. The goodness of a person lies in the virtue surrounding any action performed. Virtues become virtues only when a person exercises them with full knowledge of their implication and chooses to exercise them deliberately. However, virtue has to be practiced continually giving birth to habit, which works towards realization of moral habits.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Which is Basic in Ethics: Happiness or Obligation by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Regrettably, virtues exist in extremes and if not balanced in a state of mean, they become vices. Mean is that state in which there are no excesses or deficiencies, a state of balance. There exist different types of mean given the diversity of those who practice is it. Overall, the best way of hitting the mean is to choose not the excess or the deficiency of a virtue. By doing so, everyone will achieve happiness with honor being one of the means to this felicity.

Reference Mulvaney, R. (2008). Classical Philosophical Questions (13th Ed.). New York: Prentice Hall